JP6730626B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Pachinko game machines.

In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a certain probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game ) Transition to the state, the mainstream is Pachinko machines that can win a large number of prize balls by opening the big prize hole provided on the game board surface. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, the probability variation game state that raises the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and the time shortening game state that raises the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine which is provided with such as, and which enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a game progressing state advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

JP, 2005-313674, A JP, 2011-45518, A JP, 2008-167875, A

However, since there have been many such game machines from the past, there is a problem that development of a model that realizes further novel game play is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A main game starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A main game identification information display section capable of displaying main game identification information,
An acquisition means for acquiring the main game information based on the ball entering the main game starting opening,
When the variable display start condition is satisfied, based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means, a special game determination means for determining whether to perform a variable winning opening opening game,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
Informing means for informing information related to the game,
Have
Setting means that can be changed to the first state, the second state,
Operation means that can be operated,
State setting means for setting the setting value to a changeable setting state based on the setting means being in the first state under the first condition,
Based on that the setting means is in the first state under the second condition, although the setting value cannot be changed, the state display means for setting the setting value to the setting display state in which the setting value can be confirmed,
And a setting value changing means capable of changing the setting value based on the operation of the operating means in the setting change state.
Equipped with
Based on the setting means being changed from the first state to the second state in the setting change state, the set value is confirmed,
In the setting change state and the setting display state, it is configured not to launch the game ball by the launching means,
In the setting change state and the setting display state, the processing associated with entering the main game start opening is not performed
It is a pachinko machine characterized by that.
<Appendix>
Note that other modes different from the present mode will be listed below, but the present invention can be carried out without being limited thereto.
Pachinko gaming machine according to this another aspect,
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a predetermined ball inlet (for example, A game ball can enter the second main game starting opening B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10). A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning opening (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display section (for example, second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first big winning a prize mouth C10, the second big winning a prize mouth C20). Until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a predetermined period has elapsed, the variable winning a prize port (for example, the first prize winning port C10, the second prize winning port C20) can be put into a state advantageous for the player a plurality of unit games. It is possible to execute the special game to be executed, and after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening) C10, the second special winning opening C20) to the player the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) until there is a specific number of balls to enter, or a specific period has elapsed. Special game control means capable of executing a variable winning opening opening game that executes a unit game that can be in an advantageous state once,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side.
Even if the first main game identification information is being variably displayed, it is possible to start variably displaying the second main game identification information. Even if the second main game identification information is variably displayed, the first main game identification information It is configured to start changing display,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Alternatively, the first main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group. ,
As the game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state.
A low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the low-probability lottery state is the variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the high-probability lottery state. Is configured to be a relatively long time,
The variable display period of the second main game identification information in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state is the variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be a relatively long time,
When the game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting opening, in the case of being in the normal game state and in the high-probability lottery state than in the case of being in the specific game state and the high-probability lottery state. One is configured so that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by executing the variable winning opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed is increased,
When the game ball is shot at a predetermined interval toward the second starting opening, in the case of the normal game state and the high probability lottery state than in the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state One is configured so that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by executing the variable winning opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed is increased,
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the information about the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub game identification information in the effect display unit,
In the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, when the information about the first main game identification information is received, the sub-game identification information based on the information about the first main game identification information is displayed on the effect display unit. On the other hand, in the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, when the information about the second main game identification information is received, the sub game identification based on the information about the second main game identification information is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to display information on the effect display section or to be displayed in a display mode that is more difficult to visually recognize than the sub game identification information based on the information about the first main game identification information. ..

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a more novel gaming property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an operation diagram of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a main process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the NMI interrupt process (when the power is cut off) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board reception control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the first (second) special winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 32 is a flowchart of the error management process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the firing control signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. 34 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of an external terminal transmission content determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the payout abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a ball path abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a payout motor abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (starting prize ball payout/motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of driving the motor) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of a motor error on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of instruction image display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 54 is a flowchart of the special game effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is an operation diagram relating to the first (second) special winning opening and the right general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an operation diagram relating to the first (second) special winning opening and the right general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is completed. FIG. 66 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 72 is an effect contents determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. 81 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is completed. FIG. 85 is an effect contents determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 95: is a figure which illustrates the opening pattern of the special winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the start demonstration effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 99 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 100 is an operation diagram according to the second special winning opening C20 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the lower shield member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a small hit game related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 112 is an operation diagram relating to winning at the V winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a processing image diagram 1 between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a processing image diagram 2 between the ECO unit of the pachinko gaming machine and the prize ball payout control board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a game ball circulation image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a main flowchart on the prize ball payout controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of an initial process at the time of power failure recovery on the prize ball payout control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the game ball number management process on the prize ball payout controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the number-of-balls-held management process on the prize ball payout controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the game ball launch control process on the prize ball payout controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the power interruption process on the prize ball payout control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124a is a flowchart of a main process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 124b is a diagram showing a cross section of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment in a state where the main control board is housed in the case and around the setting operation unit. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the setting change process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of a ball entry state display device calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the second RAM area clear check processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of section determination on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the section A o'clock determination on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of determination at the time of section B or later on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the SW totaling process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of a counter addition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the arithmetic processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of a ball entry state display device display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of display content update processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 138 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 139 is an electrical entire block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device during the setting change and the setting confirmation in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) in the case of changing the winning probability of the main game symbol according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. It is a block diagram. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the prefetch determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect execution determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) of the main control board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration for obtaining a win/loss table for each set value without the main control board grasping the set value in the pachinko game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of a main process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of an initial setting process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a table showing a random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number set in the initial setting process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of parameters for set values in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification from the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 152 is an example of a first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an example of a functional configuration diagram in the thirteenth embodiment.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game design/special design (special drawing) or a decorative design (construction drawing), but the "special design (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled by the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, fluctuations in the identification information, stoppages, advance notices, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state of retracting inside the game board (opposite side of the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In a configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker) that can take "there is", the advancing state = easy winning state, and the withdrawal state = non-winning state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, as a random number, a hard random number). Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning/non-winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine a stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. When determining the contents of the variation mode and the contents of the final identification information, it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number acquired by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers including winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number... Is called one random number) .. Further, for example, one kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the "gaming state" means, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, or a non-stochastic variation gaming state in which the probability of transition to the special gaming state is a predetermined value. Transition to special gaming state Probability of high lottery probability Game state, transition to special game Auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning in starting slot that triggers lottery (so-called normal symbol shortening state, for example, variable to starting slot If a member is attached, the variable member has a long open period, the variable member has a high winning probability, the variable member has a short time to notify the result of the open lottery), etc. is there. The "gaming area" is an area in which the gaming balls can roll, and is not limited to only in front of the gaming board D35 (viewed by the player), for example, on the back side of the gaming board D35 (viewed by the player). It may be a region in which a game ball including both the front side of the game board D35 (as viewed from the player) can be rolled. “Left hitting” is to hit the game ball by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the left side (left hitting route ML10) of the game area D30, which will be described later. "Right hitting" is to hit the game ball by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball will flow to the right side (right hitting route MR10) of the game area D30, which will be described later. The "left hitting area" is an area on the left side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is used as a reference. The "right hitting area" is an area on the right side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is used as a reference. "Expected average execution time of easy-entering ball game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary game symbol is continuously performed (for example, the situation in which a hold relating to the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the game state described above, for example, If the variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function operating state/non-operating state), the winning of the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member High and low probability (so-called general figure high probability lottery state / low probability lottery state), the length of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called general pattern fluctuation shortening function inactive state / operating state) ), etc. are realized by any one or a plurality of combinations. The "average value of the variable display period of the identification information" is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when the variable display period is configured to be determined for each variable display of identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , Which is an expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability×variable display period”), but if there is only one type of variable display period to be selected, one type Is the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss or a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variation display period with the highest selection probability It is also possible to add that the concept is limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index that indicates the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variation display period of the identification information As a method of realizing different "average values", different candidates and/or selection probabilities of the variable display period are added, or further variable display periods are added even if the candidates and/or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing, but it is not limited to either method). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period The variable period has at least the state "," may have not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, in accordance with the number of times the identification information is fluctuated and displayed, a state transition of “first fluctuating period state”→“second fluctuating period state”→“third fluctuating period state” is performed. Including what can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that “first fluctuation period state”<“second fluctuation period state”<“third fluctuation period state”, It is possible to build a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state (of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state that continues until the next big hit + the electric Chu specific game state (the next big hit cannot be obtained despite the situation where the next big hit occurs is definite) The more the situation continues, the faster the game progresses, so you may be able to eliminate the feeling of fatigue at the time of so-called hamari). Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first variation period state", the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, " In the "third variation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variation period state", between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting. In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information is particularly likely to be relatively long when compared with the “first fluctuation period state” ( In other words, in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information becomes particularly long compared to other states in the “second fluctuation period state”. Easy {that is, the fluctuation display period for short fluctuations that makes definite the deviation or the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuations that suggests a win is not selected (or difficult to select), but the fluctuation display for reach fluctuations (per long fluctuation) It is possible to exemplify that it has a characteristic such that only the period is selected (or easily selected)}. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of execution of the special game" may be a period immediately after the end of execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol variations, or the special game. It may be a period after one or a plurality of symbol variations after the execution of is completed until a predetermined number of symbol variations are made (that is, a high-probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed. If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range, so the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" In the case where the state transitions of and can be taken, the specific period can mean the stay period of the “first variable period state” and/or the “second variable period state”). "When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold" means, for example, that a special game (so-called big hit game) is likely to occur when the hold is exhausted, but there is a possibility that the special game will occur. The criterion is not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning/winning lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "winning symbol determination random number" for deciding whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a determination criterion, and the content of the event derived from these random number values (the result of the determination) , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of the stop symbol, the possibility of shifting to the specific game, etc.) may be used as the criterion. In the case of suggesting, "indicating or notifying the existence of the hold" is, for example, an effect at the time of holding the hold until the hold is reached (a pattern variation mode of the decorative pattern or it is performed in conjunction with it). Changing the execution mode of (background effect, etc.), and when notifying, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator (may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) at the time of the hold occurrence. (In that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the hold generation sound or the sound such as BGM is changed at the time of the hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the hold occurrence. Changing the lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.), or the execution mode of other effects (pattern variation mode of decorative symbols, background effects performed in conjunction with it, etc.) that are being executed at the time of the hold occurrence Can be changed.

Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the locations and functions of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means that performs the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification to one embodiment is a modification to another embodiment, and that one modification and another modification may be described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described.

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko gaming machines such as general electric officers). .. Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the locations and functions of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means that performs the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification to one embodiment is a modification to another embodiment, and that one modification and another modification may be described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery table and the reference table exist for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the term “table” is not limited to that format, and one or more selection candidates may be selected from the plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that it is a mode that is associated. Furthermore, a numerical value as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modifications (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.) is This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, by the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability change game, and by the time reduction game) It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (in terms of conditions such as the time-saving game, etc.) may be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. Should. For example, between the first main game side and the second main game side, the relationship between the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is the first main game side=the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed appropriately such that the first main game side<the second main game side or the first main game side>the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuation of the probability variation game state based on the meaning that it continues until the next big hit occurs, is "65535" set as the number of continuation (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, the probability variation game state is maintained until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of times of continuation, even in the choice of the realization method based on the same purpose, as long as it does not largely deviate from the purpose of the following embodiment or modified example. Should be understood to be appropriately changed.

(This embodiment)
Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine mainly includes a game machine frame and a game board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably housing the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and withdrawing the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the game board D35, and a sound effect according to a game state or the like is output.

The game board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, glass plate) on the front surface of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so that they are parallel to each other with a distance (19 mm in this example) exceeding 13 mm and not exceeding 25 mm. Has been. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism so as not to easily rock.

Further, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) does not obstruct the view of the entire structure of the game board, and the entire game area is colorless and transparent so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed. Has been formed.

The ball plate (for example, the upper plate D20 and the lower plate D22) has the game balls on the ball plate visible to the player (the number of game balls can be generally confirmed), and the game received by the player on the saucer. It has a shape that does not hinder the removal of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be taken out freely).

Next, in the game board D35, a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed, and a game ball flowing down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) via the transparent plate D16. You can check the position of. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left hitting area DL10 and a right hitting area DR10. Then, in the game area D30, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) and various general winning holes, a left-handing route ML10, a right-handing route MR10, a first main game starting port A10, and a second main game. Starting opening B10, auxiliary game starting opening H10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center ornament D38, a movable body accessory YK, a right general winning opening lamp LP10, a left general winning opening P10, a right general winning opening P20, a sub input button SB, and an out opening D36 are installed. In the present embodiment, the left-handing route ML10 may be referred to as the first downflow route, and the right-handing route MR10 may be referred to as the second downflow route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. Generates mouth entrance information.

Next, the second main game starting opening B10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting opening B10 includes a second main game starting opening ball entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball. Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win the second main game starting opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state.

Here, in the present embodiment, a first main game starting opening A10 and a second main game starting opening B10 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (left hitting area DL10) is the first. While being easily guided to the one main game starting opening A10, the game ball flowing down the right side (right hitting area DR10) of the game area D30 is configured to be difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged so as to overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting opening A10 and The main game starting opening B10 may be separated from the main game starting opening B10.

Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is equipped with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance ball information that indicates the entrance when entering the ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 serves as a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) It is configured such that the flowing game ball is less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball flowing down the right side and the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10.

Next, the left general winning opening P10 is equipped with a left general winning opening ball detecting device P11s. The left general prize-winning entrance detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the left general prize-winning hole P10 and generates left general prize-winning entrance information indicating the entrance of the game ball. Incidentally, a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls by the game balls entering the left general winning opening P10. A game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is left. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when left-handed (when the player hits the game ball by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left-handed region DL10 (left-handed route ML10) on the left side of the game region D30) It is configured so that it is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10.

Next, the right general winning opening P20 is equipped with the right general winning opening detecting device P21s. The right general prize-winning entrance detecting device P21s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the right general prize-winning hole P20, and generates the right general prize-winning entrance information indicating the entrance of the game ball. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged in the right-handed area DR10, and has both the role of the auxiliary game starting opening of obtaining the auxiliary game random number and the role of the general winning opening of paying out prize balls. There is. That is, the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 serves as a trigger for the lottery for expanding the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the right general winning opening P20. By the way, when a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a game ball (for example, two balls) paid out as a prize ball from the right general winning opening P20 becomes a game ball entering the left general winning opening P10. , Is less than the game balls (for example, 3 balls) paid out as a prize ball from the left general winning opening P10. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has been hit to the right is configured to enter the right general winning opening P20. That is, when a right hit (a right hit area DR10 (right hit route MR10) on the right side of the game area D30 is adjusted so as to flow down the game ball by shooting strength of the game ball) It is configured so that it is easy to enter the right general winning opening P20.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a ball entrance that can be entered when a right strike is executed, "auxiliary game starting port H10→right general prize port P20→second large prize port C20→ The order is from the first big winning opening C10 to the second main game starting opening B10 to the out opening D36. Further, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game starting port H10 will flow further down the game area, and the downstream ball entrance (the right side described above). It is possible to enter the general winning opening P20 etc.). On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right general winning opening P20 will flow into the back side of the game board surface, and will not enter the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 thereafter (execute right striking). Then, the game ball that has not entered the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20).

Incidentally, when the left-handed play is executed in the non-time shortened game state (the left-handed play is progressed in the non-time shortened game state), the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). It is difficult to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d because it is difficult to play, and the game is advanced mainly by entering the first main game starting port A10 as the starting port on the main game side, while At the time of right-handed execution in the time-reduced game state (in the time-reduced game state, right-handedness advances the game), the game ball easily enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). 2 main game starting port The electric accessory B11d is easily opened, and the game is advanced mainly by entering the second main game starting port B10 as the starting port on the main game side. Also, rather than the ease of entering the first main game starting opening A10 when the game ball is left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state, the right-hand game ball is fired in the time-reduced game state. It is easier to enter the second main game starting opening B10 when continued, in other words, the first main game start when continuing to shoot the game ball by left-handing in the non-time shortening game state. Rather than easiness of entering the ball into the mouth A10 or the second main game starting opening B10, the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting in the case where the game ball is continuously shot by right-handing in the time shortening game state The ease of entering the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) when entering the left general winning opening P10, which is easier to enter when performing left-handing than when performing right-handing, is determined by right-handing. By designing more than the number of prize balls (two balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20, which is easier to enter when executing at left than when performing left-handing, a non-time-reducing game state The difference between the average number of prize balls paid out by entering the winning opening, that is, the base when the game is progressed by left-handing and when the game is progressed by right-handing in the time-reduced game state, that is, the base It is possible to prevent the difference between the values (the expected value of the number of paid prize balls to be paid out for the 100 game balls that have been shot in the situation where the special game has not been won) becoming too large.

The right general winning opening lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, etc., and is configured to be turned on when a game ball enters the right general winning opening during execution of a special game. .. Also, as will be described later in detail, it is possible to suggest whether to shift to the probability variation game state or the non-stochastic variation game state after the special game due to the difference in the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. It is configured. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided in the left hitting region DL10 or the right hitting region DR10 on the game area D30. Further, it may be provided in an area other than the game area D30.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows down to the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20, and the like. It will be.

Next, on the upper right of the outlet D36, a first big winning opening C10 and a second big winning opening C20 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Before reaching the outlet D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol, and has a horizontal rectangular shape, which is an outlet. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of D36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d{ and the first big winning. Mouth electric accessory solenoid C13}. Here, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first special winning opening C10, and the first big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 to a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win the first special winning opening C10 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win (the first (1) Special winning opening The electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Vero type attacker) or as a mode (so-called slide type attacker) in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll can be used as a special winning opening and the opening can be closed or opened. It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open rectangular shape when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special winning opening electric prize C21d{ and a second special winning. Mouth electric accessory solenoid C23}. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric part C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is set in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a bello-type attacker) or a mode (so-called slide-type attacker) in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is used as a special winning opening, and the opening and closing of the opening can be adopted. This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the lighting number of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and a missing "-" (however, it is not limited to this, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed, a 7-segment LED is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

In addition, since the main game symbol does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous degree. However, in the case of adopting a method in which the main game symbol itself has a role of directing and does not display the decorative symbol, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later. You may comprise.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image display including a decorative pattern that fluctuates/stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is executed including variable display of decorative symbols and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 that displays a plurality of rows of moving images of decorative symbol variations simulating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display section SG12 that displays main game hold information, and It has 2nd reservation display part SG13. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 and the 2nd reservation display part SG13 are each comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding of the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations not executed). In the present embodiment, as a ball entrance through which the auxiliary game random number can be obtained, there are two ball entrances of an auxiliary game starting hole H10 and a right general prize hole P20, and one of the two ball entrances. Even when entering the ball, the display related to the acquired auxiliary game random number will be displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 and/or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by flashing or the like.

Next, the movable body accessory YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device SG, and has a role of driving and enlivening the game at the time of effect execution accompanying the symbol variation. It is preferable to move in the up-down direction, rotate, or turn on the light so that the driving is conspicuous, and it is easy to drive with a symbol variation with a high expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S and that produces an operation based on the operation by being pressed (pressed). The operation modes of the sub input button SB include single-shot pressing (operation mode of pressing the sub input button SB only once in a short time), continuous hitting (operation mode of pressing the sub input button SB multiple times), and long pressing. (Operation mode in which the sub input button SB is continuously pressed for a predetermined period). Further, the operation member electrically connected to the sub-control board S and by which an operation based on the operation is performed by pressing (pressing) is not limited to the sub-input button SB, and is not limited to the upper and lower buttons. , The left and right operation parts are provided, and the cross key configured to select the effect (preliminary effect, etc.) to be executed by operating the operation part, and the effect (movable by pulling to the front It may be configured to have a lever, etc. on which a body accessory operates, etc.).

Next, the outlet D36 is a ball entrance provided below the game area D30, and a game ball that flows down without entering any winning openings provided in the game area D30 enters the ball. When a game ball enters the outlet D36, the lottery based on a random number and prize balls based on the entered ball are not executed, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Become. In the present embodiment, the out port D36 is provided only at the lowermost part on the game board to enter the game ball that has not won the winning port, but the out port is provided at a predetermined position on the upper part of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not the winning opening, it is desirable to use a sticker so as not to be confused with the winning opening such as displaying “OUT”.

Although not shown, the size of the game board D35 (game area D30) does not exceed a square frame having a side of 500 mm, and a range including a circle having a diameter of 300 mm is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a winning opening (a gaming ball can be won, in other words, when a winning object does not operate (when a variable winning opening such as the special winning opening C10 is closed). It is not impossible to win a prize even with a physically possible trajectory for the game ball that has been launched. For example, the number of the first main game starting openings A10) (the number of entrances to the winning openings) is 5 ( The first main game starting opening A10 is one, the left general winning opening P10 is three, and the right general winning opening P20 is one). The number of winning openings can be set as appropriate, but a range of 5 to 15 is desirable from the viewpoints of winning ratio and prevention of game complexity. Here, the entrance of the prize hole is a passage surface of the game ball formed of the prize hole and the game nails connected to the prize hole (the game nails are continuously arranged in such a manner that the game balls cannot pass between them). Of these, the part farthest from the winning opening. The size of the entrance of the winning opening when the accessory does not operate (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 among the entrances of the winning opening, and if it is set by the game nail, nail and nail It is desirable to configure so that it does not exceed 13 mm, and the size (as described above) of the entrance of the winning opening of the variable winning device (electrical accessory or non-electrical accessory) other than the large winning opening is , 55 mm is desirable. Further, the size of the entrance to the special winning opening (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board) is preferably more than 55 mm and not more than 135 mm in order to distinguish it from other winning objects.

Furthermore, the size of the gate (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10) that triggers the operation of the normal symbol display device (the gate and the game nails connected to the gate (the game balls cannot be passed continuously between them) The maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 at the farthest position from the gate, that is, the substantial gate entrance) of the passage surface of the game ball composed of the game nails) does not exceed 13 mm. It is desirable to do so.

In the present embodiment, two big winning openings (first big winning opening C10 and second big winning opening C20) are provided. However, from the viewpoint of gambling, not to exceed two. It is desirable to configure. Further, as in the present embodiment, a structure that is clearly separated physically regardless of whether or not the two special winning openings are opened is desirable. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, it is desirable that the game balls can pass between the two special winning openings without being horizontally adjacent to each other. Further, in the present embodiment, two starting openings, a first main game starting opening A10 and a second main game starting opening B20, are provided, but the number of general winning openings (in the present embodiment, four general winning openings are provided). In consideration of the balance with the number (provided individually), it is desirable that the number is not exceeded.

In addition, a movable object may be provided in the starting opening, and the movement of the game ball already won in the starting opening may be changed by the movable object. In this case, it is preferable that the movable object always has a constant operation (including one that repeats a series of operations) so that the operation cannot be adjusted.

Further, as described above, a large number of game nails and the like are arranged in the game area D30, but this arrangement makes the fall of the game balls irregular within a certain range, but does not make them extremely irregular. Is desirable. Specifically, because the game ball collides with a device for changing the direction of the electric or other power (a windmill or other game ball falling), the game ball moves in a direction different from the direction of the drop. A device that raises the game ball by excluding changes (except for a device that raises the game ball a little and that does not make the direction of the fall of the game ball extremely irregular) is launched. Since there is a possibility that the order of the game balls and the order of entering the winning port or the out port may be significantly different, it is desirable not to provide such a device. In addition, the game nail and the windmill are driven almost vertically (about ±5 degrees) on the game board. Needless to say, the durability of the game nails and other structures provided on the game board does not change due to the collision of the game balls (for example, the game nail of this example has a Vickers hardness of 150Hv to 230Hv). It is made of brass.) is secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. A main control board M for performing control (which is directly related to a person's profit), a sub-main control unit SM for performing display control for various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content, and mainly A sub-sub control unit SS that performs an effect display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the error occurrence, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize ball according to a prize in each prize hole. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out game balls supplied from the tank KT to an upper ball plate D20, an error release switch KH3a for releasing a predetermined error, and a prize ball payout The prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the unit KE10, the error indicator KH3 that displays the occurrence status of an error related to payout (for example, 7 segment display), and the prize ball that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10. A payout control board KH, a launching device D42 that launches the game balls (reserved balls) of the upper ball plate D20 to the game area D30 one by one, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a pachinko game machine. A power supply unit E for supplying electric power to the respective parts, a power switch Ea which is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine, and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Further, on the main control board M, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the left general winning opening P10, the right general winning opening P20, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening. A game state display device J10 capable of displaying the state of game balls entering the winning openings such as C20 is provided, and a 4-digit 8-segment display device is arranged in a line in a row. In addition, the incoming state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key held by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check them. In addition, as an example of the entry status displayed on the entry status display device J10, section information based on the total number of outs and a base ratio (a value calculated by “(low probability payout quantity/low probability out quantity)×100”) ) And the like. The ROM/RAM area for executing the processing of step 1550-10 and the ROM/RAM area for executing the processing of steps 1000-1 to 3500 are different areas (addresses do not overlap with each other). You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine and the operating principle for paying out the game balls according to the present embodiment will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 3, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 3, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to a stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and a prize ball signal is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH. To do. Alternatively, a ball lending request is made from the game ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes payout of the game balls. As shown in FIG. 4, as the stepping motor KE10m rotates, a sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) is rotated, and the game ball is It is paid out one by one. The paid game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. Incidentally, as for the cross section C-C, as shown in the drawing, it should be supplemented that a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easily visible) is shown.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (dispensing motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photo sensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by projecting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is formed with six recesses along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit, When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, it is turned on (state in the lower stage of FIG. 3).

Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation/stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units, a sub-sub-control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display/stop display, hold display, and advance notice display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the computer (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.), backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information when power is cut off are installed. ing.

Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate/device will be outlined. First, the main control board M is a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting entrance ball detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance ball detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance ball detecting device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning opening ball detecting device P11s}, drive solenoid not shown (the above-mentioned first big winning opening solenoid C13, 2nd big winning Mouth solenoid C23 etc.), information display LED (not shown) and the like, which are indispensable input/output devices for the progress of the game, such as game peripherals (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B). , 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) are electrically connected, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM/sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production/game progress state, etc. can be transmitted to the sub control board S.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board are arranged. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. The main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication).

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and accepts a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R (may be referred to as a card unit R) for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided inside the prize ball payout control substrate KH, and the prize ball payout control substrate KH and the launch device D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided separately from the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

Here, the launch device D42 determines the launch intensity (launch position) based on the operation amount of the launch handle when it is detected that the player directly operates the launch handle D44 (touch detection), and the game area D30. It is configured so that the game balls can be fired one by one toward any position of the counter, and even if the game balls are continuously fired, a counter or timer is provided so that more than 100 game balls cannot be fired in one minute. As a result, the game balls are launched at a constant interval (for example, 599.9 ms/1 piece). In other words, it is configured such that the game balls are always fired at a constant interval (the firing speed does not differ) regardless of the game state such as the probability variation game state or the state of the game such as whether or not the special game is executed. As a result, the player's launch skill is appropriately reflected regardless of the state of the game. More specifically, when the player desires a right-handed stroke, the right-handed stroke can be executed by operating the firing handle D44 to a position corresponding to the firing strength at which the right-handed stroke can be performed, and the player can left-hand strike. If desired, left-handing can be executed by operating the firing handle D44 at a position corresponding to a firing strength at which left-handing can be performed, and whether or not a special game is being executed. Regardless of the state, the game ball can be launched with the launch intensity based on the operation of the launch handle D44 at all times.

The firing handle D44 is provided with a firing stop switch (not shown), and is configured so that the player can stop the firing of the game balls at any timing (can be fired in units of one ball). ing. Specifically, even when the player operates the firing handle D44 (it is detected that the firing handle D44 is directly operated (touch detection)), by operating the firing stop switch, It is possible to stop the firing. Here, "direct operation" means that a part of the player's body is used and a game is made by contacting the game machine. In addition, in this example, from the viewpoint of gambling, the performance of the launching device D42 does not change over a predetermined period or due to external noise, etc., and the launching motor (launching handle (strength adjustment) so that durability is secured. Function), the control circuit of the launcher is designed respectively. Further, it is desirable that the firing handle D44 does not have a function of vibrating the firing handle D44 or the like so as not to hinder the adjustment of the firing position by the player.

In addition, a portion of the launching device D42, which is the entire device for launching the game ball, which gives kinetic energy to the game ball, is configured by one launch motor. Further, the firing handle D44 has its firing intensity returned to 0 when not directly operated by the player (so as to be returned to the reference position when released from the firing handle D44 by being urged in the reference position direction by a spring or the like). Therefore, the strength adjustment skill of the player can be reflected in the game result.

In addition, in this example, the game ball used is a ball having a diameter of 11 mm and a mass of 5.4 g or more and 5.7 g or less.

Next, the sub-control board S, as described above, the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative design, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown, so-called effect. Motor, solenoid, etc.) of a movable body part for use in the connection. Further, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), it is possible to start or end the measurement of the base value, execute a predetermined effect, start displaying the maintenance mode, or the like. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub input button detection device SBs detects that the sub input button SB has been operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. Is configured to be. In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit in that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

Next, the flow path of the game ball used for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls shot into the game area D30 are each entrance port {first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, first big winning port C10, Two major winning openings C20, general winning openings P10, out openings C80} are entered, and the players are guided into the game machine (inside the game machine frame D) through the entrance sensors corresponding to each entrance. .. Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game starting port A10 passes through the first main game starting port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the game balls guided into the game machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the game machine. In addition, although not particularly shown in the present example, a switch for entering a ball (each ball entrance (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10, a first big winning port C10, 2 major winning openings C20, general winning openings) is a switch through which game balls entered are passed, and one or a plurality of switches different from the switch for detecting the entrance into each winning opening} It is assumed that

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial setting (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (transmission at that timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at that timing and transmitted in a control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power supply is normally shut off is not stored in the RAM. If Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored. Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). To do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1007, that is, if the information indicating that the power has been normally shut off is stored in the RAM, or if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPU MC of the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power interruption that are stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and in step 1014, acquires the various information commands on the sub-main control unit SM side. (At the timing, a command may be set and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the main control is performed at step 1014-1. CPUMC of the board M, the return setting of the solenoid (second main game start opening B10d of the second main game start opening B11d, big winning opening (eg, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Also, in order to return the open or closed state of the movable piece (for example, the upper shield member C24, the lower shield member C25, etc. in FIG. 100) described later to the state before the power is turned off, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, In the order of winning hole and movable piece, it is determined whether or not the solenoid actuation bit is on, and if it is on, it is judged that (the second main game starting opening/large winning opening/moving piece is open before power off). Then, the solenoid actuation flag is stored in the corresponding address (in order to open it again)}, and the process proceeds to step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally turned on in the RAM, and proceeds to the processing of step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 10B is executed), and the process of step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPU MC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms), in step 1000-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the input processing described later. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number updating processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value updating type random number updating process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value random number updating process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a starting port 2 valid period setting process (a process of setting the valid period of the second main game starting port B10) described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. In addition, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won in each winning opening is four balls for the first main game starting opening A10, one ball for the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10 and the second. The big winning opening C20 has 13 balls, the left general winning opening (also sometimes called general winning opening) P10 has 3 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has 2 balls. It should be noted that these numbers of prize balls paid out are examples, and the number of prize balls paid out is different when entering the first main game starting port A10 and when entering the second main game starting port B10. Alternatively, the number of payouts of the prize balls may be different when the ball enters the first special winning opening C10 and when the ball enters the second special winning opening C20. In addition, when a game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a win/loss lottery is not executed, and a predetermined prize ball payout amount (three balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. When a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired and a predetermined prize ball payout amount (two balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of prize balls of all the winning openings provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example does not exceed 15 for one prize (ball) and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. It is configured so that it is invalidated under circumstances or while an error is occurring), and it is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, while realizing various game states. The direct game results are summarized in "whether or not the fired game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

In this example, since the specific prize-ball payout control process is performed not by the main control board M but by the prize-ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. However, when there is a failure due to a sudden matter such as a power failure while paying out the prize for one game ball, there is a case where the correct number of prize balls cannot be performed. Therefore, in this example, a retry function at the time of abnormality for paying out the game ball for the prize again (for example, when the game ball wins the first main game starting opening A10 and one game ball is paid out). In this case, the power is cut off, and after that, after the power is restored, the remaining three game balls are paid out. Of course, by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize the correct number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. The function does not have to be provided.

Next, in step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a later-described auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special winning opening valid period setting process. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entry time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state display process. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a handle state signal inspection process. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an outlet monitoring process. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an LED output process. Next, in step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a firing control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a test signal output process. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a solenoid output process. Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entry state control process. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets to permit the generation of a timer interrupt, and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt processing.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal, and in this example, it is attached to the game board surface. Switch (for example, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s, the first big prize entrance detection device C11s, Second prize winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), an out ball count switch for detecting a ball entering the out port D36, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, an opening signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18) Etc.), a magnetic detection signal 1 (a detection signal by the magnetic detection sensor 1), a radio wave detection signal, an impact detection signal, a touch state signal, and a magnetic detection signal 2 (a detection signal by the magnetic detection sensor 2). .. In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, the input determination is performed by a process different from the input process.

The random number update process is a process of relatively simply updating the random numbers used in the lottery, which has a very low influence on the winning (for example, adding a constant), and in this example, a normal symbol variation pattern random number. (For example, the auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and the variation pattern random number (for example, variation mode lottery random number) are processes for updating.

The initial value updating type random number updating process is a process of updating a random number used in a lottery that has a certain degree of influence on the payout (a process different from the various random number updating process described above). , Random number per normal symbol (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), later-described special symbol soft random number, etc. Is a process for updating.

The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated in the initial value updating type random number updating process used in the lottery in which the influence on the payout occurs to a certain extent. In this example, as an example of the random number to be updated, a normal symbol per initial value random number, a normal symbol initial value random number, a special symbol initial value random number, a special symbol per soft initial value random number and the like can be exemplified. In addition, the initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol initial value random number are random numbers updated in the initial value random number updating process when configured to have a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers.

In addition, the timer subtraction process is a 2-byte timer (for example, the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product release timer MP22t-B, the special game timer MP34t , Open time timer, etc.).

In addition, the starting opening 2 effective period setting processing is a winning opening that facilitates winning of a prize by operating the ordinary electric accessory depending on the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d). (For example, it is a process of setting the valid period of the second main game starting port B10).

The winning monitoring process is a process of updating the passage counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and sending a command to be sent to the effect control board.

The special winning opening valid period setting process is a process of storing the result of the valid period determination of the special winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20). As in the third embodiment to be described later, when the special winning opening is provided with the specific area C22, the special winning opening valid period setting process saves the result of determination of the valid period of the specific area C22. You may.

Further, the abnormality detection process is a process for monitoring magnetism, disconnection/short circuit monitoring, power source monitoring, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set/open/closed state of the frame of the game board D35, shock monitoring, and the like. ..

In addition, with the ball passing time abnormality detection processing, in order to detect the ball passing time abnormality when the game ball enters the various ball inlets (for example, the first main game starting port A10), each switch level is detected. Is a process for monitoring the continuous ON time (continuous ON time of the ball entrance sensor).

Further, the game state display processing, the number of times the special electric auditors continuously operate (the number of execution rounds in the big hit), the error state, the number of operation reserve balls of the normal symbol display device (displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) Of the current auxiliary game holding ball) and the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device (the current main game holding ball number displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20) This is a process of making a display request.

The handle state signal inspection process is a process for monitoring the touch state of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44).

Further, the out-port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out-port (for example, the out-port D36) in order to create a security output request.

Further, the LED output process is a display on the special symbol display device (for example, a display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, a display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20). , The first main game symbol display device A20 of the first main game side operation reserve ball number display, the second main game symbol display device B20 second main game side operation reserve ball number display), normal symbol display device In (display of auxiliary symbols in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation reserve balls on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), display of error state, display of game state, display of division (for example, Initialization of the display to display the number of times the special electric auditors work continuously (display the number of rounds in a big hit) Is a process of sequentially controlling the LED output controlled by the main control board M such as output of display data.

Further, the firing control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the firing of the game ball, which will be described in detail later.

The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting the signal to a corresponding output port.

Further, the solenoid output processing is for a normal electric winning object (for example, the second main game starting opening electric winning object B11d) solenoid and a special winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) solenoid. This is a process of outputting output data. In the case where it is configured to have a shield member (upper shield member C24, lower shield member C25) in the special winning opening as in the fourth embodiment described later, the output data of the movable piece solenoid is output by the solenoid output process. To execute.

In the incoming state control process, the base value to be displayed on the incoming state display device J10 is calculated, the calculation result is stored, the display of the calculation result is controlled, and the like. At this time, when a setting changing means to be described later is provided, the normal prize ball number counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc. are stored for each set value. It is also possible to configure so that it is displayed on the incoming state display device. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current setting (for example, the jackpot winning probability and the number of prize balls at each winning opening) is read, and the storage area corresponding to the current setting (for example, , A normal prize ball number counter value, a normal out number counter value, a total out number counter value, a final base value of the immediately preceding section, and the like) are set. Then, the entrance state information is generated and displayed based on the values stored in the respective storage areas. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately generate and display the incoming state information (for example, the base value) for each setting. Further, regarding the entry state information displayed on the entry state display device, the display content is switched by operating the dedicated entry state display switching button or by operating the setting change button (for example, When the current setting is 1, when the entry state display switching button is operated once, the entry state information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated one more time, the entry state information of setting 3 is displayed. Displayed), the latest information for each setting may be confirmed. Here, when the setting change button is used, the configuration using the above-described setting key (for example, turning on the power and turning the setting key switch to the left so that the setting is not changed by operating the setting change button). It is preferable that the display contents be switched by operating the setting change button in the state where the display is turned on. In addition, when the display of the entry state information is switched by the entry state display switching button or the setting change button, it may be configured to return to the display of the current setting after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of the NMI interrupt processing (when the power is cut off) performed by the main control board M. First, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power failure signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is cut off in the gaming machine, the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1019-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a timer interrupt is in progress. If Yes in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1019-2 whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned on is stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. If Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power supply is abnormally cut in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power supply is normally shut off in the RAM, and in step 1020, the CPU of the main control board M is stored. The CPUMC sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. Although an example of executing the power interruption process (FIG. 8) by inputting the power interruption signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, the invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption signal may be input to a specific input port. It is also possible to set and set the main control board side main process (FIG. 6) or the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) to monitor a specific input port to determine the power interruption and perform the power interruption processing.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 7. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes an anti-payout control board reception control processing described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently executed. If Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball that has not yet transmitted the prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an error that is unsuitable for performing the prize ball payout-related error (for example, an error relating to a failure of the payout motor, the upper plate full tank). , Out-of-ball error, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control substrate M has a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time (see FIG. 12). ) Is set. Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the award ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the information thereafter. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next processing (antipayment control board reception control processing of step 3200). To do. Even if No in step 3105, step 3110, and step 3115, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3200).

<<Contents of commands and information transmitted/received between the main control board/payout control board>>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 121. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information that the command is a prize ball payout command and information about the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000B) means that there are 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means that there are 15 prize balls. ..

Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Although details of each error content will be described later, if the bit corresponding to each error is “0”, it means that the error has not occurred, and if the bit is “1”, the error is generated. Is occurring. Bit 0 relates to completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout related information is received. Here, if Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M includes error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error, and thereby sets the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side to the main control board M side. But manage (unified management). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the error flag relating to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize-ball payout completion information is present in the received payout-related information. If Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command related to the current payout completion) and performs the next process (step 3500). Process). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflowed or passed in the case of a gate) in the auxiliary game starting opening H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start opening ball entry command, which is a command related to the fact that the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is entered, to the sub-main control section SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the player has entered the right general winning opening P20. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the right general winning opening entrance command, which is a command related to the fact that the right general winning opening P20 is entered, to the sub-main control section SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in the form of setting it in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of holdings, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 1200). Even if No in Steps 1104 and 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1200). Here, in this embodiment, when the player enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20, the random number on the auxiliary game side can be acquired. In addition, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game starting port H10) will continue to flow down the game board surface and start the auxiliary game. While it is possible to enter a ball entrance (right general prize hole P20 etc.) downstream of the mouth H10, the game ball entered in the right general prize hole P20 flows down into the back of the game board surface, and then other. It is configured not to enter the entrance. Although details will be described later, even if a game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10), no prize ball is paid out, but the right general winning opening P20. When a game ball enters, the prize ball is paid out.

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2150, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game start opening detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game starting opening detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the entry determination means executes a first (second) special winning opening entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a general winning opening detection processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an out-port entrance detecting process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance detecting device H11s is the entrance detecting time (above that time, the auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s. When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for a time longer than the time when it is considered that the auxiliary game starting opening H10 has entered the ball. If Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPU MC of the main control board M detects the end time of the input from the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s (above that time, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device). When H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s). If Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2154 or step 2160, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M inputs the input from the first main game starting mouth entrance detection device A11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, the first main game starting entrance). When the ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than a time period in which it is considered that there is a ball in the first main game starting opening A10. If Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 222-1-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is off). Or not. It should be noted that the case of the non-time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is off, or may be the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is off (when the opening/extending function of the electric accessory is not activated). Further, the case of the time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is on, or may be the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is on (when the opening/extending function of the electric accessory is operating). If Yes in step 2212-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 2212-2 whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). If Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2222.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input time from the incoming ball number counter MJ10c for the detection time If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s). Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first main game starting opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2222. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B inputs from the second main game starting entrance entrance detecting device B11s as the entrance detection time (more than that time, When the second main game starting mouth entrance detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the second main game starting mouth B10. If Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the second main game starting opening valid period is on. If Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2230, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2231-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is off). Or not. If Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). If Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2240. As described above, in this embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time-reducing game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time shortening flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device) When the operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10, 1 is added to the counter value of the starting opening entering ball number counter MJ12c. It is configured.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the ball entering the game ball is detected during the period when the ball entering the second main game starting opening B10 is not effective), in step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines 2 It is determined that there is an illegal ball entry in the main game starting port B10, a second main game starting port illegal ball entering command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in Step 2231-1, Step 2231-2, or Step 2224, the process moves to Step 2240.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2233, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the second main game starting mouth entrance detection device B11s is the detection time (above that time, the second main game starting entrance When the ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the game ball has passed the second main game starting opening ball detection device B11s). If Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the second main game starting opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game starting opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the fraudulent detection time (detected as a normal ball entry) by the first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s (second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s). It is determined whether or not the time is ON for a time longer than the specified time and the time when it is determined that fraud has been performed. If Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game starting opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, if No in step 2240, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the detection time (the relevant time). As described above, when the entrance detecting device detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that there is a entrance at the entrance. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the first (second) special winning opening valid period is on. If Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening ball flag. Next, in step 2360, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected while the entry into the special winning opening is not valid), in step 2361, the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal in the special winning opening. It is determined that there is a special ball entry, a first (second) special winning opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2362, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the detection time (the time concerned). As described above, when the first big winning award winning detecting device C11s (the second big winning award winning detecting device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball is the first big winning award winning detecting device C11s (the second big winning award winning device). It is determined whether or not it is OFF for more than the time when it is considered that the detection device C21s) has passed through}. If Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2368, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

Next, in step 2370, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is a fraudulent detection time (above that time, the first large Time when it is considered that an illegal ball is detected in the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20) when the winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening detection device C21s) detects the input. } It is determined whether or not the above is ON. If Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2370, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning opening P10 (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening P10) is paid out by the game ball entering, , A general winning opening entrance detection device P11s (in the present embodiment, it is a entrance that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute the lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball. Is a general winning opening ball detection device P11s which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10 and a general winning opening which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of a gaming ball into the right general winning opening P20. It has two general winning a prize entrance ball detection devices P11s) and a ball detection device P11s.

First, in step 2402, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the general winning a prize entrance detecting device is the detection time of the entrance (the general winning entrance detecting device detects the input. Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2410, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2411-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off). Or not. If Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). If Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the general ball count counter MJ13c, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning a prize entrance detecting device is the detection time of the entrance (the general winning entrance detecting device is input for a time longer than that time). If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the general winning a prize entrance detecting device). If Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. Even if the result of step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2, or step 2412 is No, the process proceeds to step 2420. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the general winning opening P10, 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

Next, in step 2420, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning award entrance detecting device is a fraudulent detection time {if the general winning award entrance detecting device detects the input, the general award winning prize is detected. It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entrance into the mouth is detected}. If Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the ball detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or more, the total discharge confirmation is performed). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that a ball has entered. If Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the end time of the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input for the predetermined time or more). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has passed. If Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out-port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control substrate M detects that the input from the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s is the entrance detection time (the above-mentioned time or more, the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s detects the input. Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (when it is considered that there is a ball at the outlet C80). If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out-port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 2620.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the detection end time of the input from the out-outlet entrance detecting device C80s (the above-mentioned time or more, the out-entrance entering detecting device C80s inputs the input). If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s). If Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the outlet detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the outlet long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process moves to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the out-mouth entrance ball detection device C80s is a fraudulent detection time (when the out-mouth entrance ball detection device C80s has detected the input for at least the time. , It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than a period of time when it is considered that an illegal ball has been entered into the outlet C80. If Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out-port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700). On the other hand, if No in step 2620, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that prize balls related to the first main game starting opening A10 are to be paid out, and step 2712. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process moves to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. If Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that prize balls related to the second main game starting opening B10 are to be paid out, and step 2722. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process moves to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening ball flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the count value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (13 in this example) related to the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M informs that the prize balls related to the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20) are to be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process moves to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the prize-ball payout amount (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize-ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that prize balls related to the general winning opening are to be paid out, and the next process (step 1100). Process). On the other hand, if No in step 2732, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserve ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), and at the same time sets the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H. Refer to, determine the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the obtained game state of the auxiliary game side and the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, it is compared with when it is off). Then, a winning symbol is selected with a high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPU MC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol "D0, D1, D2" is present, and the stop symbol that is the winning symbol is "D1, D2", which is caused by the stop of each. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (0.2 seconds open→closed) and stopped. When the design is “D2”, the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 2.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). Also, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second opened → 1 second closed → 1 second opened → 1 second closed → 1 second opened → closed) and stopped When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open→0.8 seconds closed→4.0 seconds open→closed). Incidentally, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary. After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, the variation display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1, D2 in this example). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the hit pattern on the auxiliary game side, open mode (for example, in the case of hit pattern "D1", open for 1 second → close for 1 second) →Open for 1 second →Close for 1 second →Open for 1 second →Open mode to be closed, in the case of winning pattern "D2", open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds,) Then, a predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game starting opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Even if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. In this embodiment, when the main game short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is kept open for the longest time. Has been done.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening timer MP22t-B, and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the opening time of the electric auditors object has been reached. To judge. If Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d, turns off the electric auditors open flag, and performs the next process. The process moves to (processing of step 1300).

If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in steps 1206, 1224, 1230 and 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, auxiliary game symbol It may be provided with an auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number or the like for determining the variation time of.

Although not shown, in the second opening operation of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game once), the game to the second main game starting port B10 Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered, the opening operation of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is configured to be finished, that is, the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag ON). In the case of), the opening (longest opening) of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → The opening time of “open for 4 seconds→closed” ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are the second main game starting opening B10. It is configured such that the opening (opening period) of the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d is ended by the achievement of whichever comes first. In addition, in the case of non-time shortened game state (auxiliary game short time flag off), if the opening (longest open) of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, " The opening time of "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 2.0 seconds → close" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, It is configured such that the opening (opening period) of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is ended by the achievement of whichever is earlier, when the game ball of 10 balls) enters the second main game starting port B10. ing. Further, the total time during which the ordinary electric auditors' character is opened at the longest opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time shortened game state (auxiliary game time shortened flag ON) is 4.2 seconds, and In the time shortened game state (auxiliary game short time flag off), when the longest opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2"), the total time during which the normal electric accessory is open is 2.2 seconds. Even in the state, it is configured so that the maximum opening time of one time does not exceed 6 seconds, and the maximum number of winning prizes in operation does not exceed about 10 at every gaming state (time-saving gaming state. Or whether it is a non-time reduction game state).

Further, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that has actuated the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in the hit mode, immediately (for example, It is configured to operate (within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol variation time in the gaming machine), and it is possible to clearly associate with which trigger the normal electric auditors product is operating. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation of the normal electric auditors product (the second main game starting port electric auditors member B11d) (during the operation of opening → closing) The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary and the ball comes out. It is designed so that it does not differ significantly from the design.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it has received the first main game starting mouth entrance information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting mouth A10. judge. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a first main game starting mouth entry command, which is a command related to the fact that the player has entered the first main game starting mouth A10, to the sub-main controller SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls related to the main game (particularly the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, 4). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning/non-winning lottery random number for determining the win/fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

In addition, the winning/winning lottery random number may be configured by one random number, or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. As a random number generated by two or more random numbers, a CPU built-in random number that is updated based on the clock of the CPU or an external clock and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) that is updated by a timer interrupt process are provided. The result of calculating (for example, adding) may be used.

Next, at step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game starting mouth entrance information from the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main starting mouth B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly the second main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the win/fail lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win/loss lot number for the first main game and the win/loss lot number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Note that if No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the next process (the process of step 1400) is performed.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M, and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and the next process {steps 1400(1) and (2) process } To move. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400(2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400(1) and (2)) Processing}.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball for the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball for the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to the execution of the second main game symbol on hold, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on the winning order or both main game symbols at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not being changed, and the condition that the main game symbol is held is present. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variable start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPU MC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number relating to the present symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read out, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (holding digest processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and determines the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, Based on the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning/winning lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and the main game symbol winning/winning result and the first Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), a stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A/5A/7A" and "4B/5B/7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined by referring to the main game symbol is 4R, 4B, 5A, 5B is 8R, 7A, 7B is 10R. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may}.

Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and the main game symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the win/loss lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, variation mode random number), and these are determined as the RAM area of the main control board M. Is temporarily stored in and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 26 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, based on the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol, the main game time saving flag state, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol for a certain random number value can be determined Has been done. For example, if the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit with respect to a certain random number value, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and the main game shortened flag is on (time reduction In the gaming state), the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time of the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side. When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, the second main game side is likely to be held by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. It is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M, and A command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM side Sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (symbol fixed display instruction command) indicating that the symbol variation is finished to the command transmission for transmitting to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) stop the variable display of the main game symbol, and control the display of the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1420, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550). Even if No in step 1506, step 1510, or step 1514, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1550). In this way, in this example, it is configured to transmit the remaining time saving number (the number of remaining symbol fluctuations that will end the time shortening game state depending on the number of symbol fluctuation endings after the end of the special game) to the sub-control board S. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special game control processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if Yes in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. In addition, in the case of No in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, at step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes a plurality of times) is set. Next, in step 1616, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric prize C11d (or the second special winning opening electric prize C21d) of the first special winning opening C10 to make the first big prize. The winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, and the special game timer MP34t (especially opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control unit SM side. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines a predetermined number (eg, the second winning hole C20) of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there are 10 winning balls. If Yes in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) for opening the special winning opening. ) Has elapsed. If Yes at step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1626, the process shifts to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning entrance C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning entrance C20). Is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum round number). If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in a step 1650, a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

In this example, the maximum winning number of game balls set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10, and when the maximum winning number is reached, Controls to close the special winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20) immediately, and prevents the winning of the game balls exceeding the maximum winning number, while the ball gaze (large Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to an unforeseen situation such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the prize-winning port, under the prescribed conditions (within the prescribed period after closing) Only, the winnings exceeding the maximum number of winnings are processed as valid winnings.

More specifically, when the first big winning opening C10 is opened in the first round of the big hit, and when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winnings are made in the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, Although one round will be over, in the situation where nine game balls have entered the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, the tenth and 11th balls have entered the first big winning opening C10. Even if the number of game balls that exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) that causes the first round to end due to the occurrence of the ball entry at substantially the same time enters the first big winning opening C10, It is configured to pay out the prize balls by making the winning effective. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid or drive transmission mechanism) and the opening/closing part (door etc.) of the special winning opening are executed in real time to execute the closing process so as to prevent excessive winning (winning exceeding the maximum winning number). Is closed, and the structural design and electric design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in the opening/closing member and its vicinity immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while preventing the game performance from deviating from the payout design value.

Also, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less through one unit game, and it is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls to the winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed immediately, and after the maximum opening time, the winning of the playing ball is blocked while the ball is Even if the player wins after the maximum opening time due to an unforeseen situation such as (the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the special winning opening), under the predetermined conditions (after closing) Only within a predetermined period), the prize is processed as a valid prize.

More specifically, as a mode of opening the special winning opening when executing one round in the big hit, "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → depending on the type of big hit and the number of unit games (number of execution rounds) → Any one of a plurality of operation patterns such as “14.5 seconds open→closed” and “29.5 seconds open→closed” can be set. The total opening time is 30 seconds or less, the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the special winning opening has passed in one round, and the game ball is being closed during the closing processing of the special winning opening. Even if the player has entered the game, if the winning period is within the valid period (about 1000 ms after the closing process of the big winning opening), the winning is valid and the prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, the driving mechanism (solenoid or drive transmission mechanism) and opening/closing part (door etc.) of the special winning opening are closed and the big winning opening is closed in real time so as to prevent winning after the maximum opening time. However, the structural design and electrical design are performed so that the plurality of gaming balls do not stay in the opening/closing member and its vicinity immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while preventing the game performance from deviating from the payout design value.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the probability variation jackpot symbol (is a jackpot symbol that will shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, in this example, " 5A/7A/5B/7B"). If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag, and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probability variation big hit symbol, which is the big hit symbol to be shifted to the non-probability variation game state after the special game is a stop symbol, in this example, "4A 4B"), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997).

Also, in this example, the electric support game state (the time such as opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric auditors, the time until the opening, the number of times such as opening, and the ordinary electric auditors only operate based on the end of the big hit. It is a state that changes the probability that the combination of symbols that will be displayed is changed so that winning can be easily done, and may be referred to as a time shortening game state or an auxiliary game time shortening game state). The state, except during the probability change of the special symbol (in the case of probability change game state), until a predetermined predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) change of the main game symbol is made (main game symbol of the predetermined number of times) Until the end of the change) is limited. In addition, the number of game balls obtained along with the winning of the other winning holes is approximately the same as the number of game balls fired (ball output rate does not exceed 1) or less than that. The payout design in the state (arrangement of each winning opening, the operation contents of the ordinary electric auditors, the probability of hitting the auxiliary game pattern, etc. is designed), and the payout performance in the electric support game state is the payout of the big hit game. It is designed to be no higher than performance. With this configuration, the game relating to the main game symbol and the game relating to the auxiliary game symbol become the master-slave relationship in the game, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag/main game short time flag/auxiliary game short time flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the fraud detection information management process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). This is the process executed in step (3), and is intended to remove the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously turned on after a predetermined number of interrupts. The same meaning is said when the term is “predetermined number of times consecutively”). If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal radio wave is completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that illegal magnetism is detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926 the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1926, in step 1928 the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame opening flag, and proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame opening flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). .. Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the error management process related to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the fact that an error has occurred and error type information (control command of step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the transmission process). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the information indicating that the error is released (control command transmission process of step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). Even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3000).

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the firing control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1). Get the error flag. BIT0 indicating the communication state indicates normal when "00000000B" and abnormal when "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the firing permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a firing permission signal, and "00000000B" indicates an error (abnormal) and "0010000B" indicates normal. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550-8). Here, for the output port, for example, BIT0 is digit 1-bit data, BIT1 is digit 2-bit data, BIT2 is digit 3-bit data, BIT3 is digit 4-bit data, BIT4 is digit 5-bit data, and BIT5 is firing enable signal bit data. , BIT6 is configured as effect strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as security bit.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to confirm the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). On the external relay terminal board G, a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning and symbol stop, current game state (normal game state, Specific game state, special game state, etc.) output terminal for game state information output, error information for outputting various error information detected by opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Output terminals and the like} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal of the payout related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are terminals for outputting signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a jackpot during jackpot (there are a plurality of jacks depending on the type of jackpot). ), a door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a starting opening winning time output terminal that outputs a signal when the winning opening is won, and there is not enough balls in the prize ball tank KT. While the output terminal for outputting the signal while the ball is running, the output terminal for the number of special symbol confirmation times that outputs the signal when the special symbol confirmation stop, etc. of the game related information that is important information for the game hall operator side It is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals of these important game related information.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to send the game related information and the payout related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, the outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It does not mean that That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level/Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON/OFF) by the section, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input/output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force causes the contact portion G2 to be closed, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected. Therefore, on the side of the hall computer HC, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G by detecting the conducting period. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and the hall computer HC side main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable the one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the goto action. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and One-way communication is also possible by a photo sensor having a light receiving section (for example, light from a light emitting section connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is possible to receive the signal by reading the section).

However, since the physical signal (switch state is turned on/off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC by one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input/output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input/output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the special symbol determination frequency, It is customary to configure such that only the information indicating that "1 variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted).

Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures in case of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

First, other signals; a preliminary signal that outputs that it is always off is; from an arbitrary timing after power is turned on (for example, (a) main control board side main processing execution start in FIG. 6A); It is a signal that always outputs an off signal. The signal is a signal that is used or not used depending on the development model (complexity of game play).

Next, it is an IN/OUT signal; the number of game balls entered into all the entrances (including the exits) arranged on the game area D30 (≈the number of game balls hit in the game area D30) ) Is output; the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, but may be the value of the number-of-balls-in counter MJ10c). Every time a multiple of a predetermined number (10) is reached; an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then an OFF signal is output for 0.2 seconds. When the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, an IN/OUT signal; a signal that outputs the number of gaming balls paid out by the gaming machine; A signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. When the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a lapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt=0.004 seconds), and when the next output is awaited. May start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the above-described predetermined period has not elapsed).

Next, a signal of the unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that the glass door of the gaming machine (frame with transparent plate attached, for example, glass door D18) is open; door unit open detection When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door opening flag is turned on in step 1924) {* However, after changing from off to on, the sensor D18s is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; it is a signal that outputs an always-on signal during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door opening flag is on) {* However, it is on → After changing to OFF, the ON signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, it is a signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the front frame of the gaming machine (the frame body to which the game board is mounted, for example, the front frame unit D14) is open is the front frame unit. When the opening detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned on in step 1934) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) May be the output timing}; is a signal that outputs an always-on signal during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame opening flag is on) (* However, After changing from ON to OFF, the ON signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, a signal of the unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that the saucer frame of the gaming machine (the frame body with the ball saucer mounted and the bowl unit D17) is open is; When D20s changes from OFF to ON (* However, the output timing may be ON for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) after the change from OFF to ON}; the detection sensor is ON. During the period, it is a signal that always outputs an ON signal {* However, after changing from ON to OFF, the ON signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Here, the signals of the three types of unit monitoring systems may be the same output signal according to the configuration between the units. In that case, the ON signal may be continuously output while any of the open detection sensors is ON. Further, the opening detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH side (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH. Is bi-directional communication).

Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; the signal that outputs the number of symbol variations targeting all of the symbol variations that triggers the opening of the special winning opening (attacker) is the first main game symbol or the second main symbol. When the variable display of the game symbols ends (for example, when the changing flag is turned on→off in step 1424) {* If the period of fixed display of the symbols ends after the variable display ends ( Alternatively, the output timing may be set to (when started, and during the period)}; the ON signal is output for 0.5 seconds. The output period is preferably configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period for which the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be adopted. Further, it may be configured to output the signal during a period during which the fluctuation of the main game symbol is fixed.

Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; a part of the symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation on the second main game side) that triggers the opening of the special winning opening (attacker) is targeted, and the number of symbol variations is output. The signal to be; when the variable display of the second main game symbol is finished (for example, in the step 1424 in the second main game symbol display process, the changing flag is turned on→off) {* Incidentally, the variable display After the end, the output timing may be when the period in which the symbols are fixedly displayed has ended (or has started or is in the period)}; a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.5 seconds Is. The output period is preferably configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period for the variable display period of the second main game symbol.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; the signal that outputs that the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (while the accessory continuous operation device is operating) is; when a special game is started (for example, This is the case where the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off→on in step 1606, but it may also be the case that the condition device operation flag is turned off→on in step 1432) (*Before the start of the start demo period, During the period, the output timing may be after the end}; during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the accessory continuous operation device operation flag or the condition device operation flag is on), the always-on signal is output. This is the signal to output.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; during the period in which the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (while the accessory continuous operation device is operating), and the symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the special winning opening (attacker) The signal that outputs that the time shortening game is in progress (variable time shortening function is operating) is; when the special game is started (for example, in step 1606, when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned on → on) Or, if the condition device operation flag is turned off→on in step 1432, and if the time shortening game is started (for example, if the main game time saving flag is turned off→on in step 1708, and/or, In step 1710, if the auxiliary game time shortened flag is turned off→on); during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and/or the condition device operation flag is on) , And a period during which the time-reducing game is being executed (for example, a period during which the main game time saving flag and/or the auxiliary game time saving flag is on) is a signal that outputs an always-on signal.

Next, other signals; output information for uniquely identifying the gaming machine {* Identification code of gaming machine manufacturer (2 bytes), gaming machine model name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU The specific information (chip code register value=4 bytes) is output in sequence}; the signal is; arbitrary timing after power-on {eg, (a) main control board side main processing execution start in FIG. Approximately 10 seconds after the input); the unique information is divided into each frame (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit) serial transmission method (start-stop synchronization, It is a signal to be output during the period until all output at 200 bps). It is preferable that the signal format (rated voltage, rated current) is different from that of the other signal types.

Next, a signal for IN/OUT system; a signal for outputting the number of game balls to be paid out from the gaming machine; is a game ball to be entered by a ball entrance sensor of each winning opening for which prize balls are to be paid out. When detected, the total number of prize balls to be paid out is summed up, and every time the total number of prize balls (for example, the value of the prize ball number counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); 0.1 seconds It is a signal that outputs an off signal for 0.1 second after outputting an on signal for all. When the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a lapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt=0.004 seconds), and when the next output is awaited. May start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the above-described predetermined period has not elapsed).

Next, a security-related signal; a signal that outputs that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine; It is a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds from an arbitrary timing afterward (after a lapse of a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds) after turning on the power). The output period may be the same as the output period of the IN/OUT system or the winning detection system.

Next, it is a security system signal; a period other than the period during which the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (from the operation of the special electric auditors to the lapse of a predetermined period after the operation ends) {for example, the first (second) ) During the period during which the flag is off during the special winning opening valid period}, it is output that a winning into the special winning opening (which is an attacker, for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) is detected. The signal to be played is large in a period other than the execution period of each round during the special game (including the discharge waiting period and the inter-round period) {for example, the period during which the flag during the first (second) special winning opening valid period is off}. When the game ball is detected by the ball entrance sensor (for example, when it is determined as No in step 2305): After an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, 0.2 seconds are output. Is a signal that outputs an off signal. When the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next is a security system signal; the signal that outputs that there is a magnet sensor error (a sensor that senses the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism) is; when the signal from the magnet sensor is turned on ( For example, if the flag for detecting an illegal magnetism is turned off→on in step 1914) {* However, if the flag is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after the flag is turned on, the output timing is satisfied. No}; a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds. It should be noted that, due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap.

Next is a security system signal; the signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses a radio wave detects an abnormal radio wave) is; when the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on (for example, In the case where the flag for detecting illegal radio waves is turned from OFF to ON in step 1904) (*However, if the flag is turned ON again within a predetermined period (1 second) after being turned ON, the output timing is not satisfied} A signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds. It should be noted that, due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap.

Next, a security system signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses a radio wave detects an abnormal radio wave) on the payout control board side (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) When the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control board side is turned on (for example, when the information on the radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control board KH is confirmed in step 3215) {* However, The output timing is not satisfied when the power is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after the power is turned on}; this is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output periods cannot overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period. In addition, a command indicating that the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on is transmitted from the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH) side to the main control board (for example, main control board M) side, The main control board that receives the command may be configured to output a signal.

Next, it is a security system signal; illegal entry into each prize hole targeted for prize ball payout (for example, a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time, a ball detection sensor continues to be ON for a predetermined time or more) , The number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the special game is equal to or more than a predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, the number of balls exceeds the design value during a certain game valid period, etc.) The signal that outputs is: After detecting one entry with the switch for detecting the entry into each winning opening, the event that one entry is detected again within the period set for each winning opening is totaled and determined. 1. If it occurs more than once, and 2. 2. A switch for detecting a ball entering each winning opening, if the ball continues to be detected for a predetermined period, and 3. During the execution of a certain special game (for example, 16 round jackpot), when the number of balls detected by the ball entrance sensor to the special winning opening exceeds the prescribed number (for example, 160) during the period, When any one of 1 to 3 is satisfied; an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then an OFF signal is output for 0.2 seconds. When the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, in the case of the above 3, it is preferable that the prescribed number is different according to the execution content of the special game (Example 1: When the maximum round number is 10, the prescribed number=100). Example 2: The above 3 is not applied when the special winning opening is only opened shortly).

Next, it is a security system signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and the fraud that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, fraudulent prize... During a period other than the period during which it can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering the special winning opening (attacker) are detected, or the normal electric accessory cannot be opened. During the period, a predetermined number (5) or more of balls entering the ordinary electric accessory were detected. Radio sensor error: A sensor that receives radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave, or the sensor is not connected. Board surface switch error: The proximity sensor provided on the game board surface detects the approach of an object. Magnet sensor error: A signal that outputs that the sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism, or that the sensor is not connected, etc. is performed; 1. Any timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. 2. When the fraudulent act (illegal winning 1, radio wave sensor error) is detected; When any one of 1 to 3 is satisfied at the time of detecting the illegal activity (board surface switch error, magnet sensor error); in the case of 1, an ON signal is output for the first period (30 seconds). In the case of 2, the ON signal is output for the second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, the ON signal is output for the third period (during each fraud detection). It is a signal. When the output periods overlap, all the output periods are overlapped and the output of the ON signal is maintained until all the output periods expire. Further, the output period may be different between the case 1 and the case 2.

Next, it is a signal of the security system; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine, and the misconduct that can be detected in the gaming machine {for example, an abnormal winning error... a big winning opening (attacker) During the period other than the period during which the special electric auditors can be opened (when the special electric auditors are operating), the normal electric auditors cannot open the ball, which is detected in the special winning opening (attacker). During the period except the period), the detection of a ball entering a normal electric accessory, etc. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism. Ejection error: The number of balls detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering each ball entrance for which the prize balls are to be paid out, and the switch for confirming the ball that is located downstream of the switch (particularly the figure Although not shown, it is a switch through which the game ball entering each entrance passes, and is detected by one or more switches different from the switch for detecting the entrance into each entrance). The signal that outputs that the difference from the number of entered balls exceeds a predetermined number (100), etc. is performed; 1. Any timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. 2. When the illegal activity (abnormal prize winning error, magnet sensor error) is detected, and When the illegal action (ejection error) is detected; in the cases 1 and 2, the ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then the OFF signal is output for 0.2 seconds. In this case, it is a signal that outputs an ON signal until the next 1 is satisfied. When the output periods are overlapped (other than the above 3), the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, even in the output period according to the above 1 and 2, the output of the ON signal is maintained at the time when the output timing according to the above 3 is reached, and during the output period according to 3 above, the output according to 1 and 2 above is performed. Even when the timing comes, the output of the ON signal is maintained.

Next, it is a signal of the winning detection system; the signal that outputs the number of times of ball entry to each starting opening is targeted for all the starting openings related to the symbol variation that triggers the opening of the special winning opening (attacker); When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering the 1 main game starting port, and the 2nd main game starting port (one in which the electric accessory is mounted, the electric accessory) When one of the balls is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering the one that is not mounted (for example, when the first main game start flag is turned off→on in step 2206, Alternatively, in step 2226, when the second main game start flag is turned from OFF to ON); it is a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. When the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when an illegal entry into the second main game starting opening (where the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied upon the entry of the entry.

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 to 47.

First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process to be described later with the main control board M. Next, at step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start/motor drive start) described later. Next, at step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout) which will be described later. Next, at step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a later-described motor error time process, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, with reference to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize-ball payout control board KH of the gaming machine in the present embodiment controls transmission/reception of commands/information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. A transmission/reception control means 3100 for controlling, an error control means 3200 for controlling an error related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls upon receiving a prize ball payout command or a ball rental command. And a payout control unit 3300 that executes the payout process. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the transmission/reception control unit 3100 receives the information (for example, a command or a signal) from the main control board M or the card unit R and controls the reception control unit 3110, and transmits the information to the main control board M or the card unit R. And a transmission control unit 3120 that manages the control.

Here, the reception control unit 3110 further includes a main-side reception control unit 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further has a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 in which error information relating to a payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side is temporarily stored.

Next, the error control means 3200 detects an abnormal operation of the payout motor and an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on/off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Error control means 3230 at the time of detection of a payout motor operation abnormality, which controls error control at the time, error control means 3240 at the time of detection of a payout abnormality, which controls error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and error when a ball path abnormality is detected Error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality that controls the control, error control means 3260 at the time of detecting a payout motor abnormality that controls the error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. A pay-out stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 that controls error control when a ball-clogging error occurs, and a ball-clogging error occurrence timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball-clogging error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10. The payout count sensor KE10s further includes a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control unit 3230 further includes an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes payout interval extension control means 3251 for executing time extension processing of the payout interval relating to prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control unit 3300 has a payout process related information temporary storage unit 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 is a payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing a state related to payout (for example, whether or not a payout is in progress and whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred). During the payout process, the payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. In the meantime, the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator, and a predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation) It further has a ball passage waiting timer 3315 for measuring time/motor pause time) and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the increment type timer is used. It is also possible to use a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the error control processing at the time of abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, in step 4110, the error control unit 3200 executes a payout motor operation abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control unit 3200 executes a payout abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes a ball path abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes a payout motor abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an after-payment stop abnormality detection error control process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described below is detected, and to flag an error occurrence when the number of occurrences of the abnormality is greater than or equal to a threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the situation that the prize ball payout control substrate KH side is not executing the prize ball payout process. This is a flag that is turned on when the operation is performed (abnormality of payout motor operation). If Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 increments the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 by 1. Next, at step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. To do. If Yes in step 4114, in step 4115 the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is ON. If Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control unit 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage unit 3121, and the next process ( The process proceeds to the payout abnormality detection error control process of step 4120). Even if No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection of step 4120).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the payout abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of payouts of excessive game balls due to the abnormality when a payout abnormality described below is detected, and when the count is equal to or greater than a threshold value, This is to turn on the flag indicating that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, when the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out based on a command transmitted from the main control board M side, and an excessive game ball payout is detected (payout) This is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). If Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the number of excess payouts temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and stores the excess payout number in the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 25). If Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the process proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or step 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be eliminated only by turning on the power again, but this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the error may be eliminated by pressing the error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is ON. If Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 sets an overpayment error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as payout related error information, and the next process (step 4140). Error control processing at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ball path abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to detect an abnormality in a ball path, which will be described later, (1) Abnormality in which no game ball exists (ball out) in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10. Or, whether or not there is a small amount of game balls present in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball shortage) has occurred, and when an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality has been detected, , Turning on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. Further, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to an out-of-balls abnormality or an out-of-balls abnormality is detected, a waiting time until the out-of-balls abnormality or the out-of-balls abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to produce. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag indicates that the motor drive is operating normally when the predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) are completed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Under a situation where it is determined that the payout is being made, the flag is turned on when a situation in which the payout amount is less than the predetermined number is detected. If Yes in step 4141, in step 4142 the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for occurrence of a ball out abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, the occurrence condition of the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example of a condition in which an out-of-balls abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, and a ball flow path immediately above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball paths are There is an example in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of (presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, a condition in which a ball shortage abnormality has occurred is given. If Yes in step 4143, in step 4144 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or step 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. If Yes in step 4151, in step 4152 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the condition for eliminating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, there is no particular limitation on the condition for eliminating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality, and an example of the condition where the abnormality is eliminated when the occurrence condition of the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality described above becomes unsatisfied Can be mentioned. If Yes in step 4152, in step 4153 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 causes the excitation timing during normal operation (for example, 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms to continuously excite a predetermined number of payout operations at one speed) and balls. A passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detecting the payout motor abnormality in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball becomes relatively slower than in the normal operation. After the change, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detecting the payout motor abnormality in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of payout motor abnormality detection in step 4170). Here, although the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, for example, after performing a payout operation for one ball at a speed of 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms, waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) An example can be given in which the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the sphere passage waiting time to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error and to retry the payout motor (the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10) when a payout motor abnormality described later is detected. It is to execute the switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not normally operating due to an external factor such as a ball bun. If Yes in step 4171, in step 4172 the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, at step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets a payout motor error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and for providing a motor error elimination waiting time within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4179. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps in the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example in which it is the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms in the retry operation described later can be given. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control unit 3261 causes the excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and the one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control unit 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation executing flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190). To do. Even if No in step 4177 or step 4178, the processing shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of the withdrawal stop abnormality detection in step 4190).

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the payout stop abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to fatally affect the continuation of the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormality relating to the continuation of the prize-ball payout process is a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH, a communication abnormality between the card unit R and the prize-ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is switched from off to on. If Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 sets the error duration time (for example, 120 seconds) to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and starts the operation. The procedure moves to Step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. If Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-3, the process moves to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passage error detection flag is switched from OFF to ON. If Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 sets the error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and starts the operation. The procedure moves to Step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. If Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns off the switch non-passage error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and then in step 4193-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-3, the process moves to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not the error cancel switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 has a flag relating to an error including the pressing of the error cancellation switch KH3a in the error cancellation condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, the payout motor error flag, the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 41944-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, at step 4194-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. If Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 causes the sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, no input from the count sensor or a constant input value for a predetermined time or more). Yes, etc.) is detected. If Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the step 4196- Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the pay-out stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality is detected. If Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the tray full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a tray full command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a stoppage due to payment turns off the tray full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 transmits a pan full cancellation command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, at step 4197-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a stoppage requiring payment turns on the CR unit unconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and then in step 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detection of a stop due payment abnormality turns off the CR unit non-connection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and then in step 4198. Move to -1.

Next, at step 4198-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to refer to a part of the error relating to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). Error, payout motor operation error, payout operation incomplete game ball detection, payout motor error, switch non-passage error) It is determined whether or not all flags are off.

If Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 to check the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the tray full. It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit non-connection error flag are off. If Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). When the process is temporarily stopped, the payout operation is restarted) and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then Process (process of step 4200).

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information receiving process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is an information reception process from the main control board M (and a process of setting the number of prize balls paid out accordingly), and the second half of the flow is an information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, in the first half, the information reception process from the main control board M (and the accompanying process of setting the number of paid prize balls) will be described. First, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 causes the payout state flag temporary storage means. 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize-ball paying-out flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in a driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, the motor pause time). It is a flag that turns on when it is in the middle). If Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main-side reception control means 3111 refers to the main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the prize ball payout number to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize ball payout. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). Thus, the process for setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed is completed. Even if No in Steps 4205 and 4210, the process moves to the next process (Step 4225).

Next, the information transmission process to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control unit 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 to determine whether or not the payout related error transmission flag is ON. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" is used when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. The flag is turned on and turned off after the error notification is given to the main control board M side. If Yes in step 4225, in step 4230 the error control unit 3200 turns off the payout related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout related error information set in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process moves to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the “prize ball payout completion flag” is a flag that is turned on when the payout control means 3300 determines that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245 the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the prize ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (start prize ball payout)・When starting motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (prize ball payout start/motor drive start)}. This is the end of the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start/motor drive start) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. Here, the process is a process at a previous stage of executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of motor drive steps and the like are received in response to reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. This is the process of setting. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize-ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 of FIG. 43) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in steps 4310 and 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. To do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3). In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so as to pay out a predetermined number, and then proceeds to step 432. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the prize ball payout number set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, Moving to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control unit 3300 sets the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation (that is, the payout number planned in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, at step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the excited stator position identification counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position during the payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control unit 3300 causes the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) related to the stepping motor operation and the normal operation one-step switching speed (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, at step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time/motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, at step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation execution flag. Here, the retry operation in-execution flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor-driving flag, and performs the next process {step 4400 prize ball payout control process (motor drive end/prize When the ball payout ends)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, the motor has already been driven, and therefore the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (when motor driving ends/prize ball payout end)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4345, at step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the award ball payout continuation flag is a case where the award ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and the ball passing waiting time/motor rest time has elapsed ( The detailed condition will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the time of motor drive end/prize ball payout end)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0 (that is, whether all of the planned payout numbers in the present unit payout operation have been paid out. Whether or not) is determined. If Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is ON, the process of setting the motor driving step number and the like is executed again without receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M as a trigger. When it is determined that not all of the planned number of payouts due to the current unit payout operation have been paid out, an abnormal occurrence that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error is detected.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of ending the motor drive/at the time of paying out the prize ball) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. Here, this process is a termination process when all the scheduled driving ends of the motors have been executed in the previous process (step 4300), or when all the scheduled prize payouts have been executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed in steps 4402 to 4419, the game ball detection process is executed in steps 4420 to 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed in steps 4430 to 4462.

First, the motor drive end processing will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 to determine whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. It is determined whether all the step numbers in the current unit payout operation set in step 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 4416, in step 4417 the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process moves to step 4418. Next, at step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the resting state of the stepping motor (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and then continuously excited to the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process moves to step 4420. This is the end of the motor drive end process.

Next, the game ball detection process will be described. First, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. If Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. Even if No in step 4420, the process moves to step 4430. Here, in the present example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time a ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and detection of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of entered balls may be subtracted. This is the end of the game ball detection process.

Next, the prize ball payout end process will be described. First, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the number of game balls corresponding to the payout is detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the payout incomplete game ball detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, if No in step 4431, the process moves to step 4435.

Next, in step 4435 and step 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the prize ball payout flag and turns on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. If Yes in step 4441, in step 4442 the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and based on the count value, the number of overpayments (for example, if the counter value is "-3", the number of overpayments is "3"). Is temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even when No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the following process (the prize ball payout control process of step 4500) is performed. (When executing motor drive)}. In this example, the overpayment is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the driving of the motor related to the payout is completed. Detection of excess payout (value of payout counter 3312 is less than 0 when a predetermined time (for example, a detection waiting time sufficient for the gaming balls paid out by the drive to be detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed. (Determination of whether or not) is executed (that is, the overpayment is an unexpected situation in which the number of game balls exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out). It means that it occurred, and this unexpected situation that is extremely unlikely to occur by design means that there is a problem in one of the payout mechanisms or that a fraudulent act occurred while performing the payout operation. It means that it was likely done).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control unit 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Even if the ball passage waiting time of time has elapsed, if the number of game balls related to the payout operation is not detected, it is determined that a switch non-passage error has occurred immediately. There is no limitation, and it may be configured to determine that the switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in steps 4460 and 4462, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. The process is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 2400 (during motor drive)}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, in the case where the prize ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal is received from the payout count sensor KE10s. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472 the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor drive)}.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (during motor drive execution) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 44) and corresponds to the predetermined step counter number. It is a flag that turns off when all the excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 in step 4510. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (1 increment) the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j) in the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, at step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excited stator position identification counter value (j) in the excited stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. ..

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (out-of-step phenomenon due to ball glaze or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence/absence of a detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is not rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. If Yes in step 4555, in step 4560 the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next processing (motor error time processing in step 4600). Even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (motor error time process in step 4600). If No in step 4555, in step 4565 the error control unit 3200 stores the error flag temporarily. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of motor error according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the rest state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 46, whether or not the motor is present at a predetermined rotation position is detected at a predetermined detection timing, and if the motor is not at the predetermined rotation position, a step out or the like is performed. The motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, at step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control unit 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 and shifts to the next process (error detection error control process of step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value has been cleared, the motor drive shifts to the idle state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 45). 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at abnormality detection in step 4100).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 54, the control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 48 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 7D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after a reset such as power-on of the gaming machine. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPU SC of the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received -> the RAM on the sub-control board S side is initialized, when various information commands are received -> performance related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub-control board S side). After that, the process proceeds to the loop process of repeatedly executing (f) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main controller SM. Here, when (f) is executed, the CPU SC of the sub control board S first executes an instruction image display control process described later in step 2100, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pending information management process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2800, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repeating process routine. To do.

As described above, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6E is a process at the time of interruption of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM. In the example, it is the processing flow (e) when it is connected to the NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control section SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the instruction image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the non-time shortened game state. If Yes in step 2104, the process moves to step 2108. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102 or step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S measures the left hitting instruction counter HSc (the entrance into the entrance which is easy to enter when the right hit is executed). It is a counter that does, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the left hit is not executed in the situation where the game should be advanced by the left hit, and the left hit instruction image is displayed.) The counter value of is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the auxiliary game starting opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the left-hand hit instruction counter HSc. Next, in step 2112, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the leftward instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). If Yes in step 2112, in step 2114, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the left-handing instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2115, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the left-hand hit instruction counter HSc to zero, and proceeds to the processing of step 2116. On the other hand, if No in step 2108 or step 2112, the process proceeds to step 2116. Here, the lower right part of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the uppermost part is an image diagram of the left-handed instruction image. The left-handed instruction image is an image that is displayed on the effect display device SG and urges the player to perform left-handedness, which is the situation of the game in which left-handedness should be performed, that is, the special game is not executed and the non-time saving is performed. In the game state, when it is determined that the right-handed stroke is being performed (three balls have entered the auxiliary game starting opening H10), the left-handed instruction image is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds). In addition, when entering the auxiliary game starting opening H10, 1 is added to the counter value of the left hitting instruction counter HSc, but when entering the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the left hitting instruction counter HSc is increased or decreased. It is configured not to.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2116, the process moves to step 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the non-time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a counter for measuring a right-handed instruction counter MSc (a counter for measuring the entrance to the entrance that is easy to enter when left-handed execution is performed, When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that right hitting is not executed in the situation where the game should be progressed by right hitting, and the right hitting instruction image is displayed). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2118, the process moves to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first main game starting opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2122, in step 2124, the CPU SC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the right-handing instruction counter MSc. Next, in step 2126, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right-handing instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). If Yes in step 2126, in step 2128, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the right-handing instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2129, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the right-hand hitting instruction counter MSc to zero, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in Steps 2122 and 2126, the process moves to the next process (process in Step 2400). Here, the lower right part of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the second row is an image diagram of the right-pointing instruction image. The right-handing instruction image is an image that is displayed on the effect display device SG and urges the player to execute right-handing. The right-handing instruction image is the status of the game in which the right-handing should be executed. Then, when it is determined that a left-handed stroke is being executed (when three balls have entered the first main game starting opening A10), a right-handed instruction image is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds). The bottom row is an image diagram of the time-saving middle-right hitting image, and the game progresses by right-handing in the time-reducing game state, so the time-saving middle-right hitting image is continuously displayed in the time-reducing game state. (It will continue to be displayed while the special game is running). It should be noted that the display areas on the effect display device SG of the time saving medium right hitting image and the right hitting instruction image are configured not to overlap with each other, and the size of the display area is larger than that of the time saving middle right hitting image. Is larger (the left-hand striking instruction image and the right-hand striking instruction image are displayed in a relatively large display area for the purpose of warning).

Thus, in the present embodiment, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the player is hitting right in the non-time shortened game state, when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the sub control board S The CPUSC is configured to count the number of passages and display a left-handing instruction image (for example, "left-handed" display) when the number of passages reaches a predetermined value (three balls in this example). .. Further, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the player is hitting right in the non-time shortened game state, when the game ball passes through the right general winning opening P20, the CPUSC of the sub control board S counts the number of passages. First, the right-handing instruction image (for example, the image “right-handing”) is not displayed. Further, for example, in the case of a left-handed state during a special game or in a time-reduced game state, when a game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S counts the number of entered balls. When the number of ball hits reaches a predetermined value (three balls in this example), a right hitting instruction image (for example, an image called “right hitting”) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the left-handed instruction image (for example, an image called “left-handed”) or the right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called “right-handed”) may be referred to as a launch instruction effect. With this configuration, when the player mistakenly executes a right-handed stroke in a game situation where the left-handed game is to be performed (a special game is not being executed and the game is in a non-time-reduced game state), the assistance is provided. When the game ball that has passed through the game starting opening H10 enters the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the right-handing instruction counter MSc is increased by 2 by the firing of one game ball, and even for unintentional right-handing. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the display relating to the alerting at an unintended frequency such that the left-handed instruction image is frequently displayed. In this example, the left hitting instruction image can be displayed every time the left hitting counter value reaches a multiple of a predetermined value (3 in this example). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed counter value is left-handed when the left-handed counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example). The instruction image is displayed {when the right-handing counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example), the right-handing instruction image is displayed}, and the value is double or triple the predetermined value (3 in this example). When the counter value is reached, a new left-handing instruction image (right-handing instruction image) may not be displayed. The left-handing instruction image (right-handing instruction image) is erased within a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) from the start of display, but the invention is not limited to this. ) Is displayed, it is determined that left-handed (right-handed) has been executed (for example, when it is determined that left-handed has been executed, if a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10, When it is determined that a right-handed stroke has been executed, a left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction) is given when a game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10, or when the game state changes. The image may be erased.

Here, in the situation in which the "left hitting instruction image" should be displayed, it is possible that the hit balls are dispersedly launched in both the right side area and the left side area, and the game ball accidentally passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10. To be Therefore, when the player wins the first main game starting opening A10 or the left general winning opening P10 arranged on the left side of the game area within the predetermined period, in other words, the game is executed by left-handed striking within the predetermined period. If it is possible to determine that the predetermined value is changed (subtracted) or initialized, the period until the left-hand hit instruction image is notified is extended, or the notification method (notification mode) is changed (for example, , Voice notification is not performed, warning with small display is changed), and the like. Although the same processing may be executed when the "right-handed instruction image" is displayed, in the gaming state in which the "right-handed instruction image" can be displayed, it is extremely difficult for the player to perform left-handed operation. In some cases, the specification may be profitable, and in such a specification, when the "right-hand instruction image" is displayed, the period until notification is extended or the notification method (notification mode) is changed. It is desirable not to do.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command (new hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) relating to a new hold occurrence from the main control substrate M side. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter value (in the present example, maximum four for the first main game and maximum four for the second main game). Add "1". Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the suspension information (random number value or the like) transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and proceeds to step 2418. ..

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2410, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPU SC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing suspension counter value. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the hold information (random number value or the like) related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub-control board S and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2416, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2418. Even if No in step 2410, the process proceeds to step 2418.

Next, in step 2418, the CPU MC of the main control board M lights and displays the same number of holding display images as the drawing holding counter value on the effect display device SG, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2700). To do.

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table to decorate it. Stop symbol of the symbol {For example, if the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, it is a flat pattern such as "7/7/7", if it is a lost symbol, "1/3/5" And the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2712, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800). Even if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2800).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. First, in step 2802, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2806, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2809, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the mounting variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. Even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to step 2810.

Next, in step 2810, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2810, in step 2811 the CPU SC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Or not. If Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the variation of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG (sub-sub control in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). (Sent to the department SS side), and proceeds to step 2832.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays the decorative pattern based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying a stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG (display command transmission control of step 2999). In the processing, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2816, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S It is determined whether or not the reach timing of the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2824, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the image display related to the notice image or the reach image on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side) and the process proceeds to step 2832. Even if No in step 2824, the process proceeds to step 2832.

Next, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the information that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not). If Yes in step 2832, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG (sub-sub by the display command transmission control process of step 2999). (Sent to the control unit SS side). Next, in step 2836, the CPU SC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero-clears) the mounting variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2838, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol variation flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900). Even if No in step 2810 or step 2832, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. First, in step 2902, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2904, in step 2912, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag. Next, in step 2914, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S performs big hit start display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit), and proceeds to step 2920. Even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to step 2920.

Next, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds, the number of winning prizes, and the number of prize balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side. Command (which may be appropriately executed as needed based on the game play, the type of jackpot, etc.) is set. Next, in step 3050, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a special game effect display control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2926, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit). Next, in step 2929, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the number-of-balls counter NKc (a counter for measuring the number of balls to the right general winning opening P20 during the special game) to zero. Next, in step 2930, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2999). Even if No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a special game effect display control process related to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the right general winning opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, right general winning a prize entrance ball effect (when the game ball enters the right general award entrance P20 during the execution of the special game, the effect display device) This is an effect that is displayed in SG, for example, "+2 GET!" is displayed), and a command to display by adding a predetermined number (two balls in this example) to the number of prize balls is set. Here, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged upstream of the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20, so the first big winning opening C10 is executed during execution of the special game. And, the game ball shot toward the second big winning opening C20 (the game ball shot by hitting to the right) is placed on the right general winning opening P20 before entering the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20. You will be able to enter the ball. With this configuration, in addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game, the right general winning opening P20 is entered. As a result, more game balls can be acquired, and the number of game balls that can be acquired by executing the special game can be increased.

Next, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the incoming ball number counter NKc, and proceeds to the processing of step 3058. Even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to step 3058. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the incoming ball number counter NKc has reached a predetermined value (5 balls in this example). If Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table (see FIG. 55), and determines the lighting mode based on the jackpot pattern that is stopped. Then, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is turned on in the determined lighting mode, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2926). Even if No in step 3058, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2926). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during the special game, the right general winning opening winning effect is displayed on the effect display device SG (for example, “+2 GET”). If the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 at a predetermined value (in this example, 5 balls), it is for the right general winning opening in a lighting mode based on the jackpot pattern that is stopped. It is configured to turn on the lamp LP10. It should be noted that the right general winning opening winning effect executed when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 is not only displayed on the effect display device SG, but is also "GET!" by the sound from the speaker D24. May be output, or may be configured to display "+2 GET!" on the screen and simultaneously output "GET!" by voice. Further, a plurality of levels of the volume of the sound from the speaker D24 may be provided so that the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game can be suggested by the volume level (when the volume is high). There is a higher expectation of transition to the probability variation game state than when the volume is low, or "GET!" which is the voice that should be originally output is not output (no output itself/output silent). Probability of transition to probability variation game state is relatively high).

Next, FIG. 55 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table. In the same figure, the probability variation big hit symbol stop time table which is referred to when the probability jackpot symbol that is stopped will shift to the probability variation game state (in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B) And, it consists of the non-probability variation big hit symbol stop time table which is referred to when the jackpot symbol in the stop is a non-probability variation jackpot symbol (4A, 4B in this example) that will shift to the non-stochastic variation game state It There are five types of display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" as the lighting modes of the right general winning opening lamp LP10, and the probability after the jackpot is over. It is "white->blue->green->red->rainbow-colored" in descending order of the degree of expectation of transition to the variable gaming state. In addition, since "rainbow color" is not selected as a lighting mode when shifting to the non-probability variation game state after the big hit ends, when the right general winning a prize lamp LP10 lights up in the rainbow color, after the big hit end It becomes almost deterministic to shift to the probability variation game state. The lighting mode of the right general winning a prize lamp LP10 is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or the allocation of the number is changed. Further, when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the right general winning opening P20 during the big hit, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be turned on at the end timing of the big hit, or once. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be turned on a plurality of times during the big hit. Furthermore, even in the same lighting mode, the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation game state is changed depending on the transition timing of the lighting mode. Specifically, even in the same "red" mode, it changes to the "red" mode at a later timing. It may be set so that the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation game state is higher than the case where it is changing in the form of "red" at the earlier timing (for example, the allocation of the number is set as such), With this configuration, even if the mode does not change at first and remains “white”, if the mode changes to “red” afterwards, the degree of expectation is higher than if the first mode of change was “red”. Therefore, a sense of expectation can be continuously imparted. Of course, conversely, it is possible to set the reliability to be higher when the change is made at an early timing, and in this case, it is possible to expect a larger change at an early timing.

Next, FIG. 56 is an operation diagram relating to the first (second) special winning opening and the right general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is installed on the upstream side of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20). Here, when the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is open, the game ball flown out from the right-handed route outlet D50 is the first big winning opening C10 (or It is configured such that the case of entering the two major winning openings C20) is relatively larger than the case of entering the right general winning openings P20.

First, as shown on the left side of the figure, a right hit is executed during execution of a special game, and the game ball discharged from the right hit route outlet D50 flows down between the game nails provided on the game board D35. Then, the player enters the first special winning opening C10 which is in an open state. When the player enters the first big winning opening C10, the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) is paid out.

Further, as shown in the right side of the figure, for example, during execution of a special game, the game ball discharged from the right-handed route outlet D50 hits a game nail provided on the game board D35 and changes its direction. By rolling, it enters the right general winning opening P20. When the player enters the right general winning opening P20, the number of prize balls (two in this example) is paid out. Thus, by arranging the right general winning opening P20 upstream of the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening during the execution of the special game. When a right-handed game progresses aiming to enter C20, the game ball shot by the right-handing can enter the right general winning opening P20 and thus can be obtained as a special game ball. The number can be increased. In addition, by arranging a molded product (molded with a resin or the like) instead of the game nail provided near the right general winning opening P20, it is configured to adjust the easiness of entering the right general winning opening P20. May be.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, when the gaming ball launched by right-handing flows out from the right-handing route outlet D50, Depending on the rolling direction of the game ball, the game ball may also enter the right general prize hole P20 while ensuring the ease of entering the 1st prize hole C10 (or the 2nd prize hole C20). That is, before the game ball enters the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20), the right general winning opening P20 can be entered. Therefore, the number of game balls acquired by the player during the execution period of the special game is increased. Therefore, the player's interest in entering the right general winning opening P20 is increased, and as a result, the interest of the special game is enhanced. Further, by entering a predetermined number (five balls in this example) into the right general winning opening P20 during the special game, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is turned on, and depending on the lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. , It is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game. With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of ball game balls enter the right general winning opening P20 during execution of the special game, and then the right general winning opening lamp LP10 lights up in "rainbow color". Is highly entertaining because the player will be delighted by two highly profitable events, that is, the number of game balls acquired by the special game has increased and that the game will shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game ends. A gaming machine can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement relationship between the auxiliary game starting opening H10 and the right general winning opening P20 is, as illustrated in FIG. 1, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged downstream of the auxiliary game starting opening H10. It was configured. As a result, it is possible to configure one game ball to obtain two auxiliary game random numbers. The right general winning opening P20 may be arranged upstream of the auxiliary game starting opening H10. With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain one auxiliary game random number with one game ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 refers to the right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, and the jackpot pattern is stopped. Although it is configured to determine the lighting mode based on, the display is not only based on the difference in color of the liquid crystal, LED, etc., but also based on whether the jackpot design in stop is a probability jackpot design or an indeterminate jackpot design. You may comprise so that the display mode displayed on apparatus SG may be determined. For example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation according to the type of characters, such as "Chance→Atsui!→Gekiatsu!!", in descending order of the degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, or the special game. Probability fluctuation after completion Transition to game state In descending order of expectation, type of character and size of character (display: chance (small) → hot! (medium) → gekiatsu!! (large)) The degree of expectation may be suggested by the size of the area. Further, the effect sound such as the voice output from the speaker D24 may be determined on the basis of whether the jackpot design in stop is a probability variation jackpot design or a non-determination variation jackpot design. For example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation according to the type of voice, such as "chance → hot! → gekiatsu!!" In addition to the probability change to the game state after the end of the special game, the volume is changed from low expectations to "chance (small volume) → hot! (medium volume) → gekiatsu!! (large volume)". In addition, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the type of sound and the volume. Furthermore, the above-described lighting, display, display size, voice, and volume may be combined. For example, the transition to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game is changed from the one with low expectation to the flashing speed "slow → a little faster → faster", and at the same time the voice and volume from the one with low expectation to "chance )→Atsui! (medium volume)→Gekiatsu!! (high volume)” may be output. As a result, the player is more interested in entering the right general winning opening P20, and as a result, the interest of the special game is further enhanced. As described in the item of the lighting mode of the right general winning a prize lamp LP10, even if the final mode is the same, the degree of expectation can be changed depending on the change timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of award balls paid out when the game ball is won in the left general winning opening P10 is three, and the number of award balls paid out when the game ball is won in the right general award opening P20 is two balls. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls are won in the left general prize hole P10 is 3 or more (here, the minimum prize ball payout number of the left general prize port P10 is the "standard prize ball"). The number of payouts may be referred to as "the number of payouts"), and the number of payouts of award balls when a game ball is won in the right general winning opening P20 may be configured to be at least one less than the number of reference award balls. For example, if the number of prize balls paid out from the left general prize hole P10 (the number of reference prize balls paid out) is 3, the number of prize balls paid out from the right general prize port P20 may be 2 balls or 1 ball. Further, if the number of payout balls of the left general winning opening P10 is five, the number of payout of prize balls of the right general winning opening P20 may be two or one. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out of the right general prize hole P20 as compared with the number of prize ball payouts of the left general prize hole P10. In this way, by making it possible to change the number of prize balls paid out of the left general prize hole P10 and the right general prize port P20, it becomes easy to adjust the number of prize balls paid out during the special game. Further, by configuring the winning opening with a relatively small number of prize balls such as the right general winning opening P20, it becomes easy to finely adjust the payout rate of the gaming machine, and the position of the right general winning opening P20. It becomes easy to design the gaming machine with the optimal payout rate by adjusting the above.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is configured to be installed on the upstream side of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), and when a right hit is made during the special game, When the ball passes through the right-handed route MR10 and flows out from the right-handed route outlet D50, before the game ball reaches the vicinity of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20 However, the arrangement relationship between the right general winning opening P20 and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is not limited to this. Therefore, as such a different aspect, the points of change from the present embodiment will be mainly described below as a first modification of the present embodiment.

First, FIG. 57 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the first modification from the present embodiment. Only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail. First, the right general winning opening P20 in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment is different from the present embodiment, and the right general winning opening P20 is on the downstream side of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). It is a configuration installed in. Here, when the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is open, the game ball flown out from the right-handed route outlet D50 is the first big winning opening C10 (or It is configured such that the case of entering the two major winning openings C20) is relatively larger than the case of entering the right general winning openings P20.

Next, FIG. 58 is an operation diagram relating to the first (second) special winning opening and the right general winning opening in Modification 1 of the present embodiment.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is installed downstream of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20).

First, as shown in the left side of the figure, for example, during execution of a special game, the game ball discharged from the right-handed route outlet D50 flows down between the game nails provided on the game board D35 and is opened. Enter the first special winning opening C10 which is in a state. When the player enters the first big winning opening C10, the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) is paid out.

Next, as shown on the right side of the figure, for example, during execution of a special game, the game ball discharged from the right-handed route outlet D50 is in the closed state, the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning). In some cases, it may flow down downstream by passing through the mouth C20) and enter the right general winning opening P20. When the player enters the right general winning opening P20, the number of prize balls (two in this example) is paid out. Further, by providing a molded product instead of the game nail provided on the game board D35, it becomes possible to adjust the easiness of entering the right general winning opening P20. In this way, by providing the right general winning opening P20 on the downstream side of the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is closed. In such a case, even if a game ball does not enter the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20, the right general winning opening P20 can be entered thereafter.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, when the gaming ball launched by right-handing flows out from the right-handing route outlet D50, When the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is open, the game ball enters the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), and the first big winning. When the mouth C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed, the game ball can pass through as it is and enter the right general winning opening P20. Therefore, it is more difficult to enter the right general winning opening P20 than the case where the right general winning opening P20 is installed upstream of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) {right When the general winning opening P20 is installed on the upstream side of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), all the game balls flown out from the right-handed route outlet D50 are right general winnings. While flowing down in the vicinity of the mouth P20, when the right general winning opening P20 is installed downstream of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), it flows out from the right striking route outlet D50. Of the played game balls, only the game balls that have not entered the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) flow down near the right general winning opening P20}. Therefore, for the player, while increasing the interest in entering the right general winning opening P20 (without giving a disadvantage), as a game, the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) Is open and the right general winning opening P20 enters the right general winning opening P20 during execution of the special game as compared to the case where the right general winning opening P20 is installed upstream of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). Since it becomes difficult to play the ball, it is possible to suppress the influence on the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the special game is executed.

As with the gaming machine in this example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10 and a right general winning opening P20 are provided as entrance openings from which a random number on the auxiliary gaming side that can enter when right-handed execution is performed can be obtained. In such a case, it is possible to design an appropriate game machine by adjusting the installation position of the auxiliary game starting opening H10 and the right general winning opening P20 and the easiness of entering the ball (for example, adjusting by molding). .. As an example, by relatively increasing the ratio of balls entering the auxiliary game starting port H10, the base in the time-reduced game state (the number of prize balls with respect to the total number of game balls shot in a situation where a big hit is not executed) Ratio) can be increased. In addition, by relatively increasing the ratio of entering the right general winning opening P20, it becomes easy to design the period of staying in the time-reduced gaming state for a long period of time.

In addition, in this example, the configuration having two special winning openings is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described configuration can be applied to a gaming machine having one special winning opening. Further, as a configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, a special winning opening (one of the two special winning openings may be provided, or only one special winning opening may be provided. ) Is provided with a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and by passing through the specific area, a big jackpot is executed (by entering a specific area while a small hit is being executed, a big jackpot is executed after the small hit is finished) , Whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit (or small hit), or whether to shift to the time shortening game state after the big hit (or small hit), etc. Good.

<<Regarding Outlet Design Conditions of this Embodiment>>
Although the present embodiment and the modified examples thereof have been described above, various designs are made so that the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment does not have an excessive payout performance, and in the following, this point will be supplementarily described. explain. It should be noted that the following configurations are applicable not only to the above-described embodiments but also to all the embodiments described later.

<Short throw performance>
The total number of game balls obtained when the game balls are fired for one hour continuously according to the firing speed and the firing intensity at which the most game balls are expected to be obtained is the total number of the game balls fired 3 The payout is designed to exceed one-third (33%) and less than twice (200%). In this example, 100 game balls can be shot in one minute (6000 game balls can be shot in one hour), so the total number of game balls acquired in one hour is 6000×0.33 by design. =1980 balls are exceeded, and the ball is designed to be less than 6000×2=12,000 balls. Specifically, the number of winnings to the main game starting port per hour (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10), the main game symbol display device (eg, the first main game symbol display) Device A20, the number of times the second main game symbol display device B20) actuated (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol), the probability of hitting the main game symbol (big hit probability), the special game (sometimes called big hit game, big hit) , Probability fluctuation game state or electric support game state (time to open the winning opening related to the ordinary electric auditors, time to the opening, the number of times such as opening and the combination of symbols that the ordinary electric auditors will operate A transition probability to a state in which the displayed probability is changed so that winning can be easily performed, an ending condition, and the like are set.

More specifically, in the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state), the winning rate to the main game starting opening is 5.8 per minute, and the number of fluctuations of the main gaming symbol is within 1 minute. 5.7 times, big hit probability 1/319, average number of special games (big hit games) won 1500, probability change rate is 60% (for example, 60% of special games and probability change games after special games end ), the electric support game is in the probability variation game state, and when the game state after the special game is the non-probability variation game state, it is set until the main game symbol variation is performed 100 times. In the probability variation game state (executed at the same time as the electric support game), the winning rate to the main game starting opening is 40 per minute (1 prize ball), and the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol is 40 per minute. .0 times, the jackpot probability is set to 1/159.8, in the electric support game (in the case of non-stochastic fluctuation game state), the winning rate to the main game starting opening is 40 pieces per minute, fluctuation of the main game symbol The number of times is set to 40 times per minute. In this example, the average number of game balls acquired and the probability variation ratio of the special game (big hit game) are set to be constant regardless of the game state.

<Medium time payout performance 1>
The total number of game balls to be acquired is 2/5 of the total number of game balls to be fired when the game balls are continuously fired for 4 hours and the most number of game balls is expected to be obtained at a firing speed and a firing intensity. The payout is designed to exceed (40%) and less than three-half (150%). In this example, 100 game balls can be shot in 1 minute (24000 game balls can be shot in 4 hours), so the total number of game balls acquired in 4 hours is 24000×0.4. =9600 balls and less than 24000×1.5=36000 balls. Specifically, the number of winnings to the main game starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) per hour, main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, first) 2 main game symbol display device B20) the number of times of operation (the number of variations of the main game symbol), the probability of hitting the main game symbol (big hit probability), the content of the special game (big hit game), the probability variation game state and the electric support game state ( The time such as opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory, the time until opening, the number of times such as opening, and the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) will be activated The transition probability of changing the probability that the combination is displayed to a state in which the winning is facilitated, the ending condition, and the like are set.

<Medium time payout performance 2>
The total number of game balls to be acquired is ½ of the total number of game balls to be fired when the game balls are continuously fired for 10 hours and the most number of game balls is expected to be obtained at the expected firing speed and firing intensity. The payout is designed to exceed 4/3 and less than 4/3 (about 133%). In this example, 100 game balls can be shot in one minute (60,000 game balls can be shot in 10 hours), so the total number of game balls acquired in 10 hours is 60,000/2=30000 by design. The ball is designed to exceed the number of balls and less than 60,000×1.34=80,400 balls. Specifically, the number of winnings to the main game starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) per hour, main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, first) 2 main game symbol display device B20) the number of times of operation (the number of variations of the main game symbol), the probability of hitting the main game symbol (big hit probability), the content of the special game (big hit game), the probability variation game state and the electric support game state ( The time such as opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory, the time until opening, the number of times such as opening, and the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) will be activated The transition probability of changing the probability that the combination is displayed to a state in which the winning is facilitated, the ending condition, and the like are set.

The winning rate to the main game starting port, the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol, the big hit probability, the average number of game balls acquired for special games (big hit games), the probability change rate and the transition/end ratio of the electric support game are as described above. , The number of prize balls at the main game start opening and general prize opening of the gaming machine is set to two and three, respectively, so that the total number of game balls to be acquired does not fall below one half of the total number of game balls fired. Has been done. Here, when deciding whether or not to shift to the special game, which is the core of the payout performance, because an electronic lottery is executed, the frequency of shifting to the special game over the design value in a specific 10 hours. It is assumed that the value is low. Therefore, even in such a case, the number of prize balls and the prize ratio of the general winning opening are designed so that a certain number of prize balls can be obtained (for example, 18,000 per 10 hours), and the number of game balls consumed per day can be calculated. It becomes possible to set it within a certain range, and it is possible to make a user-friendly gaming machine.

<ball output performance related to accessory>
In this example, the special winning opening (first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, etc.) that functions as a special electric winning combination, and the ordinary electric winning (book In the example, to the winning opening (in the present example, the second main game starting opening B10) that functions as the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) and the normal electric accessory is attached when the normal electric accessory is opened. Winning corresponds to winning at the winning opening, which is facilitated by the operation of the winning character. In order to keep the gambling property of the gaming machine to a certain degree, in this example, the number of game balls that can be obtained by these role objects is 70% of all the number of game balls that can be obtained, and the game balls that can be obtained by a big hit. The payout is designed to be 60% of the total number of game balls that can be acquired.

In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls to be obtained due to actuation of a winning character is sometimes referred to as a winning character ratio, and the winning character ratio is the number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening with respect to all the prize balls paid out. And the prize-winning opening (in this example, the second main game starting opening B10) provided with an ordinary electric accessory is the proportion of the number of prize balls paid out. In this example, the first main game starting opening A10 and The second main game starting opening B10 and the first big winning opening C10 (for the total number of prize balls paid out of the two main game starting openings B10, the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20) and the general winning openings It is the ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out with the second big winning opening C20).

In addition, the ratio of things due to the actuation of the accessory when the accessory is operated continuously is sometimes referred to as the continuous accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio is the large winning opening for all prize balls paid out. This is the proportion of the number of prize balls paid out by the player. In this example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20), and the general winning opening. The ratio of the number of payouts of the first prize hole C10 (the second prize hole C20) to the total number of prize ball payouts. More strictly, since the continuous accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening when the condition device operation flag is turned on to the total number of prize balls paid out, In the case of calculating the continuous accessory ratio as described above, if two ring buffers for storing the number of prize balls paid out of the special winning opening are provided, and one of the ring buffers has the condition device operation flag turned on. The number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening (the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit) is stored in the other ring buffer, and the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning hole when the condition device operation flag is off (by the small hit) The continuous winning character ratio may be calculated (stored) by storing the number of prize balls paid out.

In addition, as described above, in order to suppress the proportion of the number of game balls to be acquired due to the operation of the accessory, in this example in which the special electric accessory is installed, only one normal electric accessory is installed. I keep it in. By the way, in this example, the operation trigger of the ordinary electric accessory (in this example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is the entry into the auxiliary game starting opening H10 having the shape of a gate. It can also be configured to operate by winning the prize of other prizes (other than the special winning opening) such as a mechanical tulip. Needless to say, the relationship with the winning opening, which is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, is set to be one-to-one without changing depending on the gaming state.

(Second embodiment)
Next, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

The limited frequency means that the type and/or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and/or the selection rate.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be zero-cleared. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment further includes a timer MP11t-H for auxiliary game symbol variation management capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the driving (opening) time of the electric winning accessory B11d at the second main starting opening B10. Have Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment has a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number and a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variation game in which the probability of a lottery for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reducing game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point to.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time. Shortening function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also shortened relatively, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the second embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has, for example, a function of performing a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability varying game or a time-reducing game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time there is a change in the symbol. Good (so-called, in the case of Pachinko machines with a falling lottery function).

Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the production controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stop display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can perform stop display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first/second main game common peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (big hit). And has the second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Here, the design variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the production stage. Further, the number-of-games-counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times the jackpot is continuously won during the specific game that is being continued.

Next, the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is configured to manage the progress status of the hold prefetching effect when the hold prefetching effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device that is controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserve ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short-time flag), and the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the acquired state. A stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and the main control board It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in the present example, the stop symbol "D0, D1, D2" is present, and the stop symbol which is the winning symbol is "D1, D2", which is caused by the stop of each. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (0.2 seconds open→closed) and stopped. When the design is "D2", the release mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 5.0 seconds, close) (longest open). Also, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second opened → 1 second closed → 1 second opened → 1 second closed → 1 second opened → closed) and stopped When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open→0.8 seconds closed→4.0 seconds open→closed). Incidentally, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short-time flag), the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1, D2 in this example). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the hit pattern on the auxiliary game side, open mode (for example, in the case of hit pattern "D1", open for 1 second → close for 1 second) →Open for 1 second →Close for 1 second →Open for 1 second →Open mode to be closed, in the case of winning pattern "D2", 0.2 seconds open, 0.8 seconds closed, 5 seconds open) Then, the predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d is started. The release start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In the second embodiment, when the main game short-time flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is kept open for the longest time. It is configured.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has been reached. If Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric auditors role object B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 and sets the electric officers open flag. Turn off. Next, in step 1248, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command for ending the longest opening of the electric accessory to the sub side, which is information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is completed. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

In addition, if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, and if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not being changed, and the condition that the main game symbol is held is present. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variable start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPU MC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number relating to the present symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read out, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol win/win lottery based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, winning lottery random number). To do.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game symbol win/win lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols relating to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Next, in step 1411, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the normal game state (non-probability variation/non-time shortened game state), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the main game symbol winning/winning lottery result and the first Main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, variation mode random number) determines the variation mode of the main game symbol, these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, Go to step 1414.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the probability variation game state, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency variation mode determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1413, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1, and proceeds to step 1414. Further, the process of step 1413 may be configured to be executed immediately after the result of step 1420 becomes Yes (timing at which the variation time ends).

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M, and A command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM side Sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (symbol fixed display instruction command) indicating that the symbol variation is finished to the command transmission for transmitting to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) stop the variable display of the main game symbol on, display control the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Incidentally, in this example, it is configured to shift to a specific game state (probability variation game state with limited number of times and time shortening game state processing) after the end of the special game related to all the big hit symbols. Next, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1420, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is within the first step range (80≧G>50). If Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery, and the next process (step 1413)).

Here, FIG. 62 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80≧G>50). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. It should be noted that, as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 1, the same table is referred to regardless of the number of reserved balls.

On the other hand, if No in step 1452, in step 1456, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is within the second stage range (50≧G>10). Or not. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game side random number, the winning/winning lottery result, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol. ) Is determined and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413).

Here, FIG. 62 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50≧G>10). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. It should be noted that, when compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved ball.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1456, in other words, when the limited frequency counter value G is within the range of the third stage (10≧G), in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game side random number. Based on the result of the lottery, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413).

Here, FIG. 62 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the second embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is in a predetermined range (10≧G). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the winning/losing lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

The content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, at a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of holdings (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If not so configured, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holdings, and the second main game side, when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more, the number of holdings It is desirable to configure so that the variation time is relatively shorter than when the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

In the second embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that limited frequency table 1→limited frequency table 2→limited frequency table 3 is switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). There is no limitation, and no matter how many kinds of limited frequency tables are used, there is no problem even if the order of the referenced tables is changed. In addition, it has two tables, the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referred to is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1→the limited frequency table 2→the limited frequency table 1 as a three-step ST mode. Good.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c by 1. If Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag in step 1508, and proceeds to step 1510. Even if No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550). Even if No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag/main game short time flag/auxiliary game short time flag). Next, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

In this way, the accessory continuous operation device (also sometimes referred to as a special game transition permission flag or a big hit flag) is configured to have only one, and even if an unexpected situation such as noise occurs, The special game transfer permission flag is increased so that the operation (major jackpot) of the duplicate accessory continuous operation devices does not occur. Further, although the flag is an operating condition of the big hit process (operating condition of the special winning opening), it is not used as a condition for facilitating the operation of the variable winning device other than the special winning opening. In addition, when the trigger of the accessory continuous operation device occurs (for example, when the condition device operation flag is turned on), the accessory continuous operation device is immediately activated (the special game transition permission flag is immediately turned on. Is configured). It should be noted that the operation of the accessory continuous operating device means that the accessory continuous operating device starts when the operation trigger of the accessory continuous operating device occurs (for example, when the big hit starts and when the big hit symbol stops). After the state where the special winning opening relating to the special electric auditors related to is continuously opened (for example, during the execution of the big hit), until the state ends (for example, when the big hit ends Up to).

Further, as described above, in this example, the accessory continuous operation device operates (special operation only when the condition device operation flag is turned on (for example, when the process of step 1550 of FIG. 30 in the present embodiment is executed). The game transition permission flag is turned on), but the game ball wins a specific winning opening other than the special winning opening, or a specific gate (excluding the gate provided inside the special winning opening). Alternatively, the flag can be set (the special game transition permission flag is turned on) when a specific area within a specific winning opening other than the special winning opening is passed (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10). It has a "specific gate" (also referred to as a character continuous operation gate) that is also used as a jackpot, and because the jackpot pattern has stopped, entering the game ball into the character continuous operation gate becomes effective, and then the combination By entering the game ball into the continuous operation gate, the big hit starts). By the way, the “specification” described as the above condition is determined as a characteristic of one gaming machine, and is preferably set and set so as not to change depending on each game. It is also possible to set a plurality of specific areas in advance.

Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73, a control process executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 66 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 7D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after a reset such as power-on of the gaming machine. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPU SC of the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received → Initializing the RAM on the sub side, when various information commands are received → The performance related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub side). After that, the process proceeds to the loop process of repeatedly executing (f) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main controller SM. Here, when (f) is executed, first, in step 2050, the CPU SC of the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute the decision process. Next, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pending information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a display command transmission control process (sends the command set by these series of sub-routines to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and ends this repeating process routine. To do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2050 to S2900) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 7E is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control section SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state have been entered). If Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the specific game execution flag, and proceeds to step 2066.

Here, the specific game in-execution flag is a flag indicating that it is in a specific game (for example, a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state, so-called ST) state, and is turned on when the start of the specific game is triggered. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to be turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2052, in step 2058, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, referring to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, or staying there. It is determined whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of times of ST)}. If Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the CPU SC of the sub control substrate S resets (zero-clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the specific game in-execution flag. Next, in step 2064, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a consecutive game number counter SM23c2 (a counter that counts the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the process of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (cleared to zero), and the process proceeds to step 2066. Even if No in step 2058, the process proceeds to step 2066.

Next, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2066, in step 2068, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is newly stopped. If Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S increments the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c by 1, and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, if No in step 2068, the process of step 2070 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2072.

Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a value within the first range (1 to 30). If Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a “short production stage” as a stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the next process (step 2100). Process).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2072, in step 2076, the CPU SC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the "long production stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stores it in the RAM area), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). ..

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2076, in step 2080, the CPU SC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and determines whether the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. If Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a “fixed effect stage” as a stay stage (temporary storage in the RAM area), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). .. Even if No in Steps 2066 and 2080 (for example, when the specific game is not in progress), the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 2100).

In the second embodiment, the third stage (fixed production stage) has only one mode (5 seconds in this example) and one type of production content (pre-reading in this example) regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display contents are different at the time of non-prefetching, the system is a fixed time effect only), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of effect contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long effect stage). As a tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the effect content is “second stage>first stage>third stage”.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the effect contents based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol variations during the specific game.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening start command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game starting opening electric auditors' prize B11d is started, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the electric auditors longest opening flag. It is turned on and the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2106, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d is completed, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the electric auditors product longest opening flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

Here, the electric accessory longest open flag is a period during which the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the open mode in which the time for which it continues to be opened at one time is the longest (longest open). It is a flag that is turned on, and the hold that occurred when the electric accessory longest opening flag is on is used to determine that the hold is based on the entry of the longest opening gaming ball. It is a flag. In the second embodiment, the electric accessory longest-opening flag is turned on only during a non-time shortening game.

Next, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new hold occurrence command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is received from the main control substrate M side. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter (in this example, maximum four for the first main game and maximum four for the second main game). 1” is added (incremented). Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the hold information (especially, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, the winning or winning lottery The random number/symbol lottery/variation mode lottery) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the electric accessory longest open flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the new sub control board S is the hold of the second main game side. .. If Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates in the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S that the hold occurred when the electric accessory was opened for the longest time. Information is added, and the process proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, if No in step 2116 or step 2118, the process of step 2120 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S preliminarily determines the success/failure result of each suspension based on the suspension information (especially, the random selection random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a winning (big hit) holding among the holdings consumed before the new holding based on the preliminary determination result. judge. If Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, the CPU SC of the sub control board S executes a prefetching effect execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, if No in step 2124, the process of step 2150 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2142. Next, in step 2142, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS to suspend the drawing on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12 and the second hold display section SG13). The same number of hold display lamps as the counter value are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2130, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the CPU SC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2134, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the pending information related to the symbol variation, and the remaining pending information.

Next, in step 2136, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the exhausted hold is the hold that occurred when the electric auditors object was opened for the longest time. If Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the longest-opening holding effect permission flag, and proceeds to step 2140. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2136, the process of step 2138 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2140. In addition, the production for holding at the time of longest opening occurs only when the symbol related to the entry changes when the ball enters the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d at the time of opening the longest electric accessory (or occurs). It is an effect, and examples thereof include a change in the hold display mode and a change in the selected effect content (change in the background and advance notice content).

Next, in step 2140, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2142. In addition, in the case of No in step 2130, the process of steps 2132 to 2140 is not executed, the process proceeds to step 2142, the hold display process is executed, and then the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). To do.

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the newly generated hold is the second main game side hold. If Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored) is the “long production stage”.

If Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold information (especially, variation mode determination random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, the new hold. Predetermine the fluctuation time of. Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has been determined that the new suspension change time will be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more. Here, when the variation time is pre-determined, for example, when the new variation variation random number value is 900 to 1023, the variation time is 10 seconds or more irrespective of the number of new retention pending times. It can be determined (see FIG. 26).

If Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold (for example, based on a win/loss lottery random number). If Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the prefetching effect lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins in step 2166 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but the probability is lower than the winning probability in step 2164). The prefetching effect lottery is performed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2168, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored in the RAM area) is the “fixed production stage”. If Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold (for example, it is determined based on a winning/winning lottery random number). If Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, ¼), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins in step 2174 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but the probability is lower than the winning probability in step 2172). The pre-reading effect lottery is performed and the process proceeds to step 2176.

Next, in step 2176, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the prefetching effect lottery (lottery of any one of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, and step 2174) is won. If Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the number of holdings temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the holding (trigger holding) won in the lottery is exhausted. The number Ha (0 to 4 times) of fluctuation stop of the main game symbol until it is derived. Next, in step 2180, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and based on the counter value, derives the variable stop count Hb of the main game symbol until the end of the current stay stage. ..

Here, the fluctuation stop count Hb also includes the fluctuation stop count of the symbol currently displayed in a variable manner. Further, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is determined at the start of the change, as will be described later. Therefore, when the symbol is changing, the look-ahead effect can be executed from the next change in which the changing symbol is stopped. is there.

Next, in step 2182, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the number of pre-reading effects (in this example, Ha) is the minimum number of pre-reading effects (the minimum number of times for executing effective pre-reading effects. (2 times) or more. If Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S satisfies the relationship Ha≦Hb that the derived Ha and Hb satisfy (the prefetch effect ends during the current stay stage). Or not. If Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets Ha in the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2142). In addition, even when it is No in any of step 2152, step 2154, step 2160, step 2168, step 2176, step 2182, and step 2184, it transfers to the following process (process of step 2142).

In this way, by configuring the prefetching effect not to be executed when the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations does not end during the current stay stage (in particular, step 2184), the table switching and the prefetching effect are executed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused and is confused. In the second embodiment, after executing the prefetching effect lottery, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect is determined according to the determination whether to cross the stay stage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetching effect is related. The order of the processing may be changed as appropriate, and for example, the prefetch effect lottery may be executed after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed (that is, when the stay stage is planned to be straddled). , In the first place, it is meant to include a configuration in which the prefetching effect lottery itself is not executed).

The look-ahead effect in this example may be an effect that occurs even in a change related to trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the look-ahead effect over a plurality of changes may include a change related to the trigger hold. For example, effects of the same aspect or effects of the same system may be effects that occur from a change before the change related to trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the end of the look-ahead effect over a plurality of variations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the look-ahead effect can be executed. When the look-ahead effect over a plurality of changes straddles the end (or changeover) of the stay stage, the expectation that a big hit in any change related to the look-ahead effect does not cross the end (or changeover) of the stay stage. It may be configured to be relatively higher than when performing the effect. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention in terms of whether or not the look-ahead effect is generated across the end (or changeover) of the stay stage (and effect), and the interest of the game is increased. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations can be executed even after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, when the pre-reading effect can be executed, the pre-reading effect is until the final change when the current stay stage ends. It may be configured to end (interrupt) with. Further, when the pre-reading effect is interrupted, a pre-reading effect different from the interrupted pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading effect or other effects suitable for the effect on the stay stage after the switching) is configured to be executed instead. May be. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the current stay stage not to end (or switch) at least in appearance until the look-ahead effect for a plurality of variations is ended.

Further, in a certain stay stage, a look-ahead effect that notifies that a high-expectation effect or a variation mode having a long variation time is selected in subsequent changes occurs, and the high-expectation effect or the high-expectation effect is generated in the certain stay stage. When the variation mode having a long variation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or the variation mode having a long variation time may be selected in the next stay stage. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the look-ahead effect in the next stay stage is an effect suitable for the next stay stage.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, if the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7,7,7" etc. , If the pattern is a lost symbol, then a variation such as “1/3/5”} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes an effect content determination process described later. Next, in step 2208, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Even if No in step 2202, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the effect contents determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest-opening holding effect permission flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPU SC of the sub control board S, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, the effect content determination table SM25ta {especially, the normal time table (the longest open hold effect permission flag OFF}). }, the effect contents are determined and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest-opening hold effect permission flag. Next, in step 2260, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the longest-opening hold effect execution flag. Next, in step 2262, the CPU SC of the sub control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {especially, the normal time table (longest open time hold effect permission flag on})} based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. To determine the contents of the effect, and shift to the next process (the process of step 2208).

Here, FIG. 72 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal time production content determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the production in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and as shown in the figure, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. One effect content is determined from a plurality of effect content candidates. When the longest opening hold effect permission flag is turned on, the same effect as that during the "long effect stage" stay is determined (the longest hold effect effect flag is set. When it is "OFF", the player can easily recognize that it is the fluctuation related to the hold that occurred at the longest opening time because the effect during the "long production stage" stay does not occur during the non-time shortening game. it can). In addition, this example is merely an example, and the production content, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited thereto, and for example, the variation mode (and the winning/winning lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number are used for rendering. It may be configured to determine the content (may be configured to be able to execute different effects when the variation mode on the main game side is the same).

Returning to the description of the flowchart, on the other hand, if No in step 2252, that is, if the current game state is the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the counter concerned It is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (a situation in which the prefetch effect is executed). If Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S subtracts 1 from the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set is the “long production stage”. If Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the prefetch effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “At the time of the start of fluctuation, “... in XX times...!” of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. A command for displaying the effect of counting down the value) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2274.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, in the case of executing the prefetching effect in the "fixed effect stage", in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the winning or hitting stage when the "fixed effect stage" changes. The content of the effect is determined as a look-ahead effect for the stage (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the jackpot expectation degree), and the process proceeds to step 2274. Even if No in step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

Next, in step 2274, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta (particularly, a table for a specific game) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol and the currently set stay stage. To determine the contents of the effect, and shift to the next process (the process of step 2208).

Here, the specific game effect content determination table of FIG. 72 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (80 STs in this example), As described above, the effect contents are configured to be switched depending on the stay stage (the number of fluctuations during ST) that is set (corresponding to the changing mode/changing time of the main game symbol, the effect contents are also switched. Is configured). Explaining with an example of the effect contents, the fixed time effect which is the effect selected in the “fixed effect stage” is, as shown in the image diagram in the lower part of the figure, first, the variation of the decorative design is started, and the design is changed. At the time when the image related to the change is displayed for 1 second, the effect in the winning/defying stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect in the winning or rejecting stage is an image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB when the prefetching effect is not executed. After the effect is displayed, the operation of the sub input button SB is performed, or further 1 second. Is passed, the display shifts to the effect display at the hit/notification stage. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect in the hit/damage stage is an effect in which the display color of the background image is changed, which is determined in the process of step 2268 (that is, an effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB does not occur). ), and when 1 second elapses after the performance display, the display shifts to the performance display at the success/failure notification stage. Next, in the hit/not-notice stage, an effect is given to inform the player whether the variation is a hit or a loss. When the prefetching effect continues, the execution state of the prefetching effect (in this example, the display color of the background image) may be continued until the end of the prefetching effect. For example, when a predetermined time elapses, an image for notifying the result of the change is displayed. In addition, this example is merely an example, and the production content, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited thereto, and for example, the variation mode (and the winning/winning lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number are used for rendering. It may be configured to determine the content (may be configured to be able to execute different effects when the variation mode on the main game side is the same). In addition, although not particularly shown in this example, a dedicated effect (for example, super battle reach, special battle reach, etc.) at any of the stay stages during the specific game is executed even when the first main game side is playing the hold. It may be configured to obtain. In addition, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed under a situation where it is difficult to secure the effect execution scale (for example, during the stay in the “short effect stage” in this example). It is suitable.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 66. First, in step 2402, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit (a big hit in a non-probability variation/non-time reduction game state). If Yes in step 2406, the process moves to step 2410. On the other hand, if No in step 2406 (first hit), in step 2408 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest-opening hold effect execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when N=first hit, in step 2409, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest-opening hold effect production execution flag, and proceeds to step 2410.

Next, in step 2410, the CPU SC of the sub control board S adds 1 (increments) to the value of the consecutive game number counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag and displays a big hit start on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit). , And proceeds to step 2416. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game performance and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.). Next, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the jackpot in execution is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 10R jackpot and the jackpot according to the 7A/7B symbol). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the ending effect {predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive holiday games during a specific game, the total number of coins obtained during consecutive holiday games, multiple types of identification A command relating to the display of the effect during the special game or the specific game, which is displayed only when the conditions are one or a plurality of combinations such as all effects are generated, is set, and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 2418 or step 2420, in step 2424, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command relating to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

With such a configuration, based on the number of consecutive wins of the big hit (not counting the first hit), it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit execution a special effect, and the second main game starting opening When a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by entering a ball during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is a first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive games, so the second main game starting opening electric role It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold that occurs during the longest opening of the object B11d. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as the ending effect generation conditions, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in the specific effect). , Etc.) may be regarded as being satisfied.

Next, in step 2426, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit). Next, in step 2430, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900). Even if No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, the operation of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing the prefetching effect during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, a specific game is finished without winning the big hit.

First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, after the reserve balls of the first main game side are exhausted and the number of reserve balls of the second main game side becomes four under the condition of probability change game state and time shortening game state , The fluctuation of the second main game symbol will start. Next, at the timing of 2 in the drawing, the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage shifts when the main game symbol changes 30 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger hold that can trigger the execution of the prefetching effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger hold is exhausted is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long effect stage is 40 (Ha≦Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first variation of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the variation.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol relating to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long production stage has a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus has a change time of 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the look-ahead effect is ended when the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold is ended.

Next, at timing 7 in the figure, the trigger preserving that can be the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is generated, and thus it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger hold is exhausted is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 1 (Ha>Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will not be done. Next, at the timing of 8 in the drawing, the long game stage ends and the process shifts to the fixed game stage when the main game symbol changes 70 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed due to the occurrence of the trigger hold that can be the trigger for executing the prefetching effect. At this timing, the number Ha of fluctuation stops until the trigger hold is exhausted is 2 and the number Hb of fluctuation stops until the fixed effect stage is 10 is (Ha≦Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first variation of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the variation. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the look-ahead effect is ended when the fluctuation of the main game symbol relating to the trigger hold is ended. Since the pre-reading effect is the pre-reading effect on the fixed effect stage, the variation time related to the trigger hold is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing 12 in the figure, the fixed performance stage ends and the specific game ends as a result of the main game symbol having changed 80 times after the special game.

Next, the operation of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the long production stage is finished without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, under the situation of probability variation game state and time shortening game state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol which is the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of loss, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of holdings. .. In this case, the content of the table surrounded by the dotted line in the limited frequency table 1 is X. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is reduced from two to one.

Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the second variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. At the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to this timing, the first main game side has one hold, and at the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to the timing 1 in the figure, the first main game side has the hold. Although there is one, the table content to be referred to is X regardless of the number of reservations.

Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the third variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserve balls on the second main game side is reduced from 3 to 2. At the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the present timing, the second main game side has three holds, and at the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the timing 3 in the figure, the second main game side has the hold. Although there is one, the table content to be referred to is X regardless of the number of reservations.

As described above, in this example, at the time of the short performance stage, regardless of whether it is the fluctuation of the first main game side or the fluctuation of the second main game side, and regardless of the number of holdings, the fluctuation mode is determined. The contents of the referenced tables are the same.

Next, at the timing 5 in the figure, the variation of the main game symbol, which is the 30th variation in the specific game, is finished, so the short production stage ends and the production stage is switched to the long production stage. Next, at the timing 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 31st variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Z. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one. Next, at the timing 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 32nd variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Y. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is changed from 1 to 0. At the start of fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to this timing, the second main game side has one hold, and at the start of fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to timing 6 in the figure, the second main game side does not hold. Since the number is two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of reservations (Y and Z).

Next, at the timing 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the 33rd variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Z. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the 34th variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Y. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is reduced from 1 to 0. At the start of fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to this timing, the first main game side has a hold of 1, and at the start of fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to timing 8 in the figure, the first main game side has a hold. Since the number is two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of reservations (Y and Z).

As described above, in this example, the contents of the tables referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long production stage. However, the contents of the table referred to when the variation mode is determined may be different when the numbers of holding are different.

The contents of the table at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game are not limited to this, and an example of the action will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the long production stage is finished without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the second variation in the specific game, is started. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether or not the first main game side is held at the time of loss. The case where there is a hold on the first main game side is X'. When there is no hold on the first main game side, Y'is set. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X'because there is a hold on the first main game side. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the fourth variation in the specific game, is started. Due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Y'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one.

As described above, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode on the second main game side during the short effect stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not the first main game side is on hold.

Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, the variation of the main game symbol, which is the 30th variation in the specific game, is finished, so the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is switched to. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 32nd variation in the specific game is started, and at the timing of 6 in the figure, the 35th variation of the specific main game that is the second main game. The fluctuation of the design is started. At the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol at the timing of 5 in the figure, while there is one hold on the first main game side, the fluctuation start of the second main gaming symbol at the timing of 6 in the figure At the time, the number of holdings on the first main game side is 0, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is 10 seconds. ing.

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol in the game during the probability fluctuation game state with limited number of times (and the time shortening game state) It is configured such that, when the number of times reaches a predetermined number, the selected variation mode (variation time) candidates are different (switched). Also, by changing the effect contents in accordance with the change of the variation mode, if the aspect of the effect is different according to the progress of the game in the specific game {probability variation game state with limited number of times (and time shortening game state)} It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(First modification from the second embodiment)
Further, although not particularly shown in this example, if there is a big hit hold (especially, the second main game hold) at the end of the special game, by performing a special effect, the big hit , It is possible to produce in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a modification example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the modification points from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are Step 1636 (Mod 1) to Step 1800 (Mod 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is over, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration execution permission flag in step 1636 (1st variation), and proceeds to step 1638 (1st variation). Next, in step 1638 (1st variation), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1638 (1st variation), in step 1800 (1st variation), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ending demo time control process described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1997). .. Even if No in step 1638 (1st variant), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 77 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the long demo time jackpot symbol (7A, 7B in this example). If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a long time (for example, 10 seconds) to the end demo time timer (the main timer for measuring the end demo time of the special game). After setting and starting, the process proceeds to step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, when the stop symbol is the short demo time big hit symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demo time timer. A short time (for example, 3 seconds) is set and started, and the process proceeds to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side and a command relating to the determined end demo time information (step 1999 by the control command transmission process, the sub main control unit SM). Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration in progress flag, and proceeds to step 1814. Even if No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the end demo execution flag. Next, in step 1818, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the end demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1650, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned game state determination process after the end of the special game, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1814, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 66 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are Step 2480 (Mod 1) to Step 2600 (Mod 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration effect and the end demo extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in step 2480 (variation 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the end demo time is a long time (10 seconds). If Yes in step 2480 (variant 1), in step 2482 (variant 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the demo time display timer to a long time (for example, 10 seconds) and starts, and then proceeds to step 2486 (variant 1). Change to 1). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (1st variation), in step 2484 (1st variation), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the demo time display timer to a short time (for example, 3 seconds), and then starts. It shifts to 2486 (Mod 1).

Next, in step 2486 (1st variation), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying an end demo image (for example, an image informing of the number of game balls acquired, the number of consecutive games, etc.) (step 2900). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process). Next, in step 2488 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the end demo display flag, and proceeds to step 2490 (variation 1). Even if No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to step 2490 (variation 1).

By changing as described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the special game ends, the end demonstration effect for notifying the result of the special game and the like can be executed and the end of the demonstration effect. Later (after the end of the special game), a predetermined period after the change of the main game symbol (specific game) (when there is a big jackpot hold, until just before the end of the jackpot fluctuation, if there is no jackpot hold, to the present hold At the end of the special game, by displaying an effect that is substantially the same as the demonstration effect (for example, continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game even while the main game symbol is changing) When there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is configured that the image substantially the same as the demonstration effect is displayed until just before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold, so for the player After the end of the special game, it suddenly becomes the next big hit without changing during the specific game and recognizes that the special game has started again, which is a novel production and improves the enjoyment of the game. Is possible. In addition, by changing the execution time of the end demo effect depending on the main game symbol that was won for the jackpot, the player can perform the end demo effect and the same effect as the end demo effect while the main game symbol is changing. Indistinguishable from each other, the interest of the game will be enhanced.

Next, in step 2490 (1st variation), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the end demo display flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2490 (variant 1), in step 2492 (variant 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the demo time display timer (timer on the sub side for measuring the end demo time of the special game) value. It is determined whether it is 0 or not. If Yes in step 2492 (variant 1), in step 2600 (variant 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes an ending demo extension effect execution process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). To do. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2490 (modification 1) or step 2492 (modification 1), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900).

(Third Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, after the special game ends, the probability variation game state with a limited number of times is always entered, and the entertainment in the probability variation game state is switched step by step to entertain the interest of the game. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, it is not possible to fuel the player's expectation in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state depending on the big hit symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, the game machine according to the third embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter, inside the second special winning opening C20. In addition, the game machine according to the third embodiment is configured such that a game ball enters a specific area C22 during execution of a special game, thereby shifting to a probability variation game arcade state after the end of the special game (so-called ball game. Machine).

First, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1408 (second), step 1412-1 (second) and step 1412-2 (second), the purpose of which is non-stochastic variation game state and time. The variation mode in the shortened game state is different from that shown in the second embodiment. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the main game side random number/win/win lottery result. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process moves to step 1411 and the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1411, that is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game based on the main game side random number/win/win lottery result. The variation mode of the symbol is determined. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as in the second embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

Here, FIG. 81 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that the combination of the main game symbols, which is a big hit, is different, and that a table to be referred to in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbol that the special game in which the game ball easily enters the specific area is executed is "5A/7A/3B/5B/7B" and is specified. The main game symbol in which the special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter the area is executed is "2A".

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 77 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), the purpose of which is a sorting game (a unit for opening the second special winning opening C20 having a specific area). Game). That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or if the special game execution flag is on, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M currently It is determined whether the round to be executed is the distribution game execution round (second R, 4R in this example). If Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (second), the process moves to step 1612, and the same processing as in the second embodiment is executed.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 82 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution game in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPU MC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot pattern that opens for a time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B/5A/5B/7A/7B). If Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPU MC of the main control board M defines a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds and specifying as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). An opening pattern designed so that the entry into the area C22 is definite is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, when the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -(For example, an opening pattern designed to make the non-ball entry into the specific area C22 definite for 0.1 second opening), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In addition, in the third embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A/7A", and the proportion selected at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", and the second main game. The long open design on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is larger than the big hit on the first main game side. In the jackpot of, the ratio of the second big winning opening C20 being long open in the distribution game execution round is high, that is, the game ball is easily inserted into the specific area C22 during the big hit.

Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process moves to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1866, at step 1868, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process moves to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game in-execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag and shifts to step 1878. Even if No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the distribution game execution round), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 82 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second) and step 1686 (second), the purpose of which is the third embodiment. In the distribution game executed in the form, it is to change the upper limit value of the number of times of change in the probability change game state and the number of times of change in the time shortening game state depending on whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22. That is, when executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation shift reservation flag. Next, in steps 1652 and 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c, and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter MN52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c and moves to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as in the second embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to set a predetermined number B (in this example, 50 times, but Is not limited. A value equal to or less than the predetermined number of times A is preferable.), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the third embodiment, it is configured to shift to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game regardless of whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game. Further, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-reduced game state after the special game is the same as the predetermined number of times A in the probability fluctuation game state. (80 times in this example), and if there is no game ball entering the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time shortening game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (small. ) The number of times is a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). As a result, even if the special area C22 is not passed during the special game in which it is easy to enter the specific area C22, it is possible to provide a certain advantageous period and the special area C22 is not passed. It can be expected that deteriorating the interest of the people will be suppressed. In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time shortening game state, in the time shortening game state of a predetermined number of times A, there are three limited frequency tables (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3). The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time shortened game state of the predetermined number of times B, and the table of different effect contents is also referred to. It should be noted that the configuration is applied to the case where the big hit symbols that have triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same big hit symbol, the special game is executed). The number of times saved depends on whether or not the player enters the specific area C22). In addition, this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time-reducing game may be determined based on the symbol at the time of a big hit (for example, during a special game). If the ball is not entered into the specific area C22, the maximum number of fluctuations in the time-reducing game is determined by the jackpot pattern, etc.).

Next, FIG. 85 is an example of an effect content determination table in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table that is referred to in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state, which is illustrated in the lower right part of the figure. In the third embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game does not become the probability variation game state but the non-probability variation/time shortening game state (50 variations). ). In that case, the content of the effect is determined by referring to the table. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the number of times of change, effect contents, change mode, table configuration, etc. are not limited to these.

As described above, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the special game according to the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the execution of the special game (specific area). In the gaming machine (so-called, Tamakoshi type gaming machine) that does not shift to the probability variation game state without entering the ball, it shifts to the probability variation game state without entering the probability variation game state. Probability production is performed according to the profit aspect of the player by making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state. You can do it. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the sorting game, a special effect (an effect for inspiring whether or not the second special winning opening C20 is opened for a long time, entering a specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect that fuels whether or not a ball is made, an effect that notifies that a ball has been entered into the specific area C22, and the like (the execution mode is not particularly limited, but, for example, In the case of an effect for notifying that the specific area C22 has been entered, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG of the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG are set at the timing (preferably immediately after) the entry of the ball. It is possible to exemplify a configuration in which the notification is executed by an effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable object accessory or light guide plate for effect) (for example, on the effect display device SG. An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable object for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or by irradiating light to the light guide plate, an image is formed on the light guide plate. Make it stand out, etc.)}. In addition, when performing the effect of informing that the ball is entered into the specific area C22, when a special game is won in a specific game state (for example, probability variation game state) or a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) In a special game in which an opening pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 almost definite, such as when a player wins), an image with "V" is displayed conservatively (for example, In a situation where a special game in which the opening pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 almost definite, such as by displaying small, is not executed (the entry into the specific area C22 in the special game) If the opening pattern designed so that the entry into the specific area C22 is substantially definite is executed after that, the entry into the specific area C22 is performed. It is also preferable to execute an effect different from the effect for notifying the effect, whereby the effect can be executed with the priority as required.

Further, in the third embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes in the unit game (round) in which the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state (for example, two types). Although not specifically shown, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or equal to one firing interval of a game ball) and a predetermined time after the first time is opened A second unit game that can be opened (or opened/closed) again for a second time period longer than the first time period after closing the time period. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the completion of the opening operation for the first time when the degree of expectation for probability fluctuation transition is low, It is possible to provide the possibility that the opening operation for the second time, which has a high degree of expectation for the transition to fluctuations, will be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time period is equal to or longer than one firing interval of a game ball or more than (one half of the upper limit winning number of the round)×(game) in order to guarantee a ball entering a specific area. It is more preferable that it is equal to or more than one shot interval of the ball, or more than (upper limit winning number of the round)×(one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

As described above, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the special game according to the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the execution of the special game (specific area). In the gaming machine (so-called, Tamakoshi type gaming machine) that does not shift to the probability variation game state without entering the ball, it shifts to the probability variation game state without entering the probability variation game state. Probability production is performed according to the profit aspect of the player by making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state. You can do it. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the sorting game, a special effect (an effect for inspiring whether or not the second special winning opening C20 is opened for a long time, entering a specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect that fuels whether or not a ball is made, an effect that notifies that a ball has been entered into the specific area C22, and the like (the execution mode is not particularly limited, but, for example, In the case of an effect for notifying that the specific area C22 has been entered, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG of the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG are set at the timing (preferably immediately after) the entry of the ball. It is possible to exemplify a configuration in which the notification is executed by an effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable object accessory or light guide plate for effect) (for example, on the effect display device SG. An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable object for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or by irradiating light to the light guide plate, an image is formed on the light guide plate. Make it stand out, etc.)}.

Further, in the third embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes in the unit game (round) in which the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state (for example, two types). Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit that can be opened for a first time (preferably, an opening time in which one or more game balls can enter but a relatively short time) It has a game and a second unit game that can be opened (or opened/closed) again after being opened for the first time and then closed for a predetermined time and then for a second time longer than the first time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation for the first time period when the probability of transition to the probability variation game state is low is completed. , It is possible to give a possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which has a high degree of expectation of transition to the probability variation game state, is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during the special game. In addition, in the second time, it is preferable that a plurality of game balls be easily entered into the second special winning opening C20 in order to ensure entry into the specific area C22. It is more preferable that it is equal to or more than half of the maximum number of winning prizes in a round) x (one shot interval of a game ball) or more, and (maximum number of winning prizes of the round) x (one shot interval of a game ball) or more. It is particularly preferred that there is.

Incidentally, in the gaming machine (so-called ball-making machine) that can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game as in the third embodiment, ( 1) Only one special winning opening is provided, and a normal round (a round in which entry into the specific area C22 is invalid) and a distribution game execution round (entering into the specific area C22) (2) a special winning opening A and a special winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the big winning opening A, and the big winning opening B is executed. At (3) the special winning opening A and the special winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to vertically overlap with each other (the big winning opening B is on top). A regular round is executed at the special winning opening A, a distribution game execution round is executed at the special winning opening B, and entry into the specific area C22 can be effective only during execution of the distribution game execution round. (4) The special winning opening A and the special winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to vertically overlap with each other (the big winning opening B is on the upper side), and the normal winning opening A is a round. The game ball can enter the specific region C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round by executing the distribution game execution round at the special winning opening B (the shielding member is provided and the shielding is performed). When the member is in the open state, it is easy to enter the specific area C22, and when the shielding member is in the closed state, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game and shifts to the probability varying game state after the end of the special game is illustrated, but such a configuration is the first. The configuration is not limited to the three embodiments. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from that of the third embodiment will be referred to as a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, FIG. 86 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is illustrated, that is, the number of prize balls of the first main game starting opening A10 is 3 and the second main game starting opening. The number of prize balls of B10 is 1, the number of prize balls of the first major winning opening C10 is 15, and the number of prize balls of the second major winning opening C20 is 13 balls. Is 10 balls. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the number of prize balls of the second special winning opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls of the first special winning opening C10.

Next, FIG. 87 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process relating to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 24 in the first modification from the third embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the third embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1), and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, step 1411. If the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

In step 1440, after turning on the condition device operation flag, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M indicates that the stop symbol is the limit frequency jackpot symbol (the time after the jackpot is shortened. It is a big hit symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the game state is finished, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7B). If Yes in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), in step 1431-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Set and move to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) of FIG. 87 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first step range (100≧G>21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3, and based on the main game side random number and the win/loss lottery result, the variation mode relating to the main game symbol ( (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1453-1 whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the second stage range (G=21). To do. Incidentally, when the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final variation in the time shortening game state. If Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state. If Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the win/loss result, the variation mode relating to the main game symbol (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). In addition, in the case of No in step 1451-4, it moves to step 1451-2 and refers to the main game table 3 to determine the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol. Thus, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when determining the variation mode in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state The table referred to by is different. In other words, when the game ball in the specific area C22 during the execution of the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" and the case of not entering the ball, the final symbol variation of the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit. The tables to be referred to when determining the variation mode are different. In addition, in the case of No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2 and relates to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery. The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). Further, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, when the above-described big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving counter MP52c is set. Is set 80 times. Since it is configured in this way, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time shortened gaming state and the limited frequency counter value are 0. It will be a bigger situation. By configuring the variation mode of the main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table in such a case, when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, "the symbol" The time transition game state of 80 times of variation → the limited frequency state of 20 symbol variations (non-time reduction game state) will be transited. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time shortening game state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is “limited frequency table A1→limited frequency table A2→limited” in a period of 80 symbol variations Frequency table A3"), and the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is the "limited frequency" for a period of 20 symbol changes after the time shortened game state ends and the non-time shortened game state transitions). Only the table B1”), that is, the limited frequency state may be configured not to cross different gaming states. When the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, the time saving counter MP52c is set to 80 times regardless of whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to "7B". The limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, that is, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the time reduction game state. When the limited frequency counter value is a non-zero big hit, it may be regarded as a big hit in the condominium, and the above-mentioned condominium number counter value may be added (the time shortening game state is Even if it has ended, if you win the big hit in a limited frequency state, you may consider it as a big hit of Renso. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the limit frequency jackpot symbol “7B” is won, if the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game execution related to the “7B”, the hour/hour counter MP52c is displayed. While 80 times is set and the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, when the player does not enter the specific area C22, 50 times is set to the time saving counter MP52c and 70 times is set to the limited frequency counter. It may be configured to. Further, in the case where the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, in the case of not entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined by referring to the limited frequency table (for example, limited frequency table 3) referred to only in the final variation. Note that the contents of the limited frequency table 3 may be configured such that a uniform variation time of 7 seconds is determined regardless of whether the hit or the loss occurs, regardless of the number of holdings. Further, in the case where the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, in the case of not entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game The limited frequency table to be referred to in the final variation, the limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game when the player enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to "7B". The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a case, the effect content and the effect tendency in the final change in the time reduction game state may be the same.

Here, FIG. 89 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are that the combinations of main game symbols that are big hits are different, and that a limited frequency table is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbol that the special game in which the game ball easily enters the specific area is executed is "5A/7A/3B/5B/7B" and is specified. The main game symbol in which the special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter the area is executed is "4A". In addition, when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, the time shifts to the time shortening game state of the symbol fluctuation of 80 times (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the main game table 3). ), when the 80 times of symbol fluctuations are finished, it shifts to a limited frequency state of 20 times of symbol fluctuations (variation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). Incidentally, in the case of the limited frequency state referring to the limited frequency table 2, the variation time of the main game symbol is configured so that a long time that exceeds 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the winning/winning lottery result. In addition, in the final fluctuation of the time shortening game state (80th fluctuation after the end of the big hit) that shifts when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" ends, specified during execution of the "7B". When there is a ball in the area C22, the variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 1. On the other hand, when there is no ball in the specific area C22 during execution of the "7B", The variation mode is determined with reference to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the loss of the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the shortest variation time in the loss of the main game table 3) .. In addition, the final variation in the time-reduced game state is configured so that the limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to, but the final variation in the time-reduced game state is the probability variation game state and the non-probability variation game. The effect contents in the final fluctuation may be different from those in the state, that is, the effect contents in the final fluctuation may be different depending on whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. Good. For example, when referring to the limited frequency table 1 which is a symbol variation for a relatively long time, a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state are ended by the symbol variation or a big hit is played. You may execute the effect.

Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, the changes from the third embodiment are step 1611 (second variation 1), steps 1635-1 (second variation 1) and 1635-2 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1608 After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or when the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executing. It is determined whether or not the round to be executed is the distribution game execution round (the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). If Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and if No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

If it is the final round in the special game in step 1634, in step 1635-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the end demo execution permission flag (when the special game end demo is turned on. The flag indicating that the time is to be started) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. If Yes at step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the procedure proceeds to step 1800 (variation 1), and if No, the procedure proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1997).

Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 90 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is step 1803 (second variation 1), that is, if the end demo execution flag is off in step 1802, step 1803 (second variation 1) The CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 in the special game. If Yes in step 1803 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1806, and if No, the process moves to step 1808. Thus, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the special game end demo time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the special game, is the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value differs depending on whether or not there is a sphere. The condition that the special game end demo time is different is not limited to this, and may be different depending on the game state at the time of a big hit, for example. Specifically, (1) it varies depending on whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-probability variation game state, (2) it differs depending on whether it is a time reduction game state or a non-time reduction game state, ( 3) Probability variation game state and time reduction game state, probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, (4) Probability variation game state and time reduction game state, probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and The non-time-reduced gaming state may be configured to be different in some combinations of.

In addition, in this example, regarding a special game related to a certain big hit symbol, (1) a special game is won in a non-time shortened game state, and a special case when there is a ball entering a specific area C22 during the special game The game end demo time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) Special game end demo time when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game. Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) time shortened special game in the game state, the special game end demo time when there is a ball into the specific area C22 during the special game is the second period ( 1 second), (4) Special game end demo time when the special game is won in the time shortening game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game, the third period (3 seconds) Thus, it may be configured such that “second period<third period<first period”. It should be noted that such a configuration is preferably applied to a special game won in the non-stochastic variation game state and non-time reduction game state or the probability variation game state and time reduction game state. Incidentally, as a specific example of the effect executed at the special game end demo time, in the first period, the effect of notifying that the player will shift to the probability variation game state, forgetting to take out the IC card used for renting game balls Of the attention of, the display of the slogan to prevent sneaking-in, the production of the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer is executed, and in the third period, it is decided that it will shift to the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state. An effect to be informed, an effect related to calling attention to forgetting to take the IC card is executed, and in the second period, an effect to be informed that the stochastic fluctuation game state (state of continuous play) will continue is executed. In this way, the effect to be executed may be configured to be different depending on the length of the special game end demo time. Also, comparing the length of the special game end demo time by situation, the special game end demo time when the non-probability fluctuation game state before the special game starts and the probability fluctuation game state after the special game ends (first hit) Is 10 seconds, after the special game is a non-probability variation, the special game end demo time when the game state and the time shortening game state are 3 seconds, the probability variation game state before the special game starts and the probability variation after the special game ends It may be configured to have a relationship of time values such as a special game end demo time of 1 second when in a game state (continuation of a continuous holiday).

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 66 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2480 (second variation 1) to step 2484 (second variation 1). That is, after turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the special game end command is a long open command (end demo set in step 1810 It is a command related to time information and is a command related to the fact that the end demo time is a long time of 10 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2480 (second variation 1), in step 2482 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S informs that the continuous game continuation image (shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game) For example, a command for displaying "Congratulations! Still continuing!" for a long time (10 seconds in this example) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (second variation 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short opening command, in step 2484 (second variation 1), the condominium end image (probability after completion of special game This is an effect for notifying that the game does not shift to the variable gaming state. For example, a command to display "Matane!" for a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next process (step 2900) Process). The special game end demonstration time is long (10 seconds) and the short time (3 seconds). Shortening the time after the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds) Production mode (production tendency) in the game state and special when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) It is configured to be the same as the production mode (production tendency) in the time-reduced game state after the end of the game.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the third embodiment, the special game end demo time is provided after the final round of the special game is finished, and the special game being executed is specified. By configuring the period of the special game end demonstration time to differ depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly profitable for the player when entering the specific area C22. While performing an effect that celebrates the player of time, if the player does not enter the specific area C22, it is not a high profit for the player, so that the player returns to the normal game after performing an effect for a short time. It can be a game machine with more intonation.

In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, a special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demo time, it is not decided whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game, so the special game start demo time may be changed depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is entered. The periods will not be different. However, the special game start demonstration time may be different depending on the game state when the special game is won, for example, 10 seconds (right to the player when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state). For a relatively long time to execute the effect of promoting hitting, 3 seconds when the special game is won in the non-time shortened gaming state (relative to not execute the effect of prompting the player to execute right hitting) It may be configured to be a short time). In addition, when a special game in which an opening pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 almost definite is executed, a substantial game like "SUPER lucky!" is executed during the special game start demonstration time. The intonation may be enhanced by executing an effect that suggests that the probability variation game state will be entered after the special game ends.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment and the modification example 1 from the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that shifts to the probability varying game state after the special game is finished by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to only the configuration of the third embodiment and the first modification from the third embodiment. Therefore, the configuration having the specific region C22 different from the third embodiment and the modification 1 from the third embodiment is referred to as a modification 2 from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail. I will describe.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the difference from the third embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub side is issued. After setting, in step 1609-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). On the other hand, if Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a start demo time control process described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 93 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the difference from the third embodiment is step 1851-1 (second variation 2), step 1899-1 (second variation 2) to step 1899-7 (second variation 2), that is, step In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution demonstration time flag is off. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 1852, and if No, the process moves to step 1854. In addition, after setting the long open pattern in step 1856, or in step 1858 after setting the short open pattern, in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is It is determined whether or not the first main game symbol (first main game jackpot symbol). If Yes in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the distribution start demo timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second variation)). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in the variable 2). In this example, 10 seconds} are set and started, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variable 2). On the other hand, if No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, if the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2) ), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer in a short time {step 1899-2 (second variation 2), and in this example, 3 Second} is set to start and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command related to the determined distribution start demo time information (a command to the sub side and shakes the special game being executed). Set the command related to the time value of the minute demo time). Next, in step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the flag during the distribution demo time (the flag that starts when the distribution demo time starts). 1899-6 (2nd change 2). Even if No in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demo timer is 0. If Yes in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), in step 1899-7 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time, and proceeds to step 1860. .. If No in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the process moves to the next process (process of step 1634). In this way, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the distribution start demonstration time, which is the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, is second when the jackpot on the first main game side is the big hit. It is longer than when the main game is a big hit.

Next, FIG. 95 is a block diagram of an example of the opening pattern of the special winning opening. The jackpot pattern in the third embodiment, the first main game jackpot symbol is "4A/5A/7A" three types, the second main game jackpot symbol is "4B/5B/7B" three types of jackpot in total of six types It has a design, and there are only two types of opening patterns in one round: “short opening=500 ms opening→closing” and “long opening=30000 ms opening→closing”. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening C10 or the second special winning opening C20) is not limited to this, and the number of types may be increased, or a plurality of openings may be made in one round. An open pattern (for example, “10000 ms open→10000 ms closed→10000 ms open→close”) may be used. Here, in the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is long open only in all rounds (10R) only for the second main game length open big hit, "5B/7B". .. Further, the distribution game execution round in which the second special winning opening C20 is opened is the fourth round, and in the other rounds, the first special winning opening is opened. Also, in all jackpots, the number of rounds executed is four or more, and the distribution game execution round is configured to be executed without fail. In this way, the first main game length open big hit "5A/7A" there is a short open round (2R), while the second main game length open big hit "5B/7B" There is no short-opening round, that is, the number of short-opening rounds is configured such that the number of first main game length open big hits is larger than that of the second main game length open big hits.

Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 2) of FIG. 93 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demonstration in progress flag is off. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the start demo time timer to the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) and starts. Next, in step 3016, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as the special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the second long opening command (the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol is started. Command relating to the effect) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the first main game length open big hit symbol (in this example, 5A and 7A). To do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the first long opening command (the second big winning opening of the first main game jackpot symbol). A command relating to the start of the special game in which C20 is opened long) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in other words, when the big hit symbol in stop is not the first main game long open big hit symbol, that is, in the case of the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example) , In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the first short opening command (the second big winning opening C20 of the first main game jackpot symbol is short opening) A command relating to the start of the special game) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demo time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration in progress flag, and proceeds to step 3120. Even if No in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is zero. If Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration in progress flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, if No in step 3120, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1610).

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 66 in the second modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2403-1 (second variation 2) to step 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2), that is, special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the start demonstration middle flag (when turned on, the special game start demonstration time is started. Flag) is off. If Yes in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to the start demo display timer and sets the timer. To start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the start demonstration flag. Next, in step 2350 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start demonstration effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2). Even if No in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2).

Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. If Yes in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), in step 2403-5 (second variation 2), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the start demonstration flag and moves to step 2412. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the process moves to the next process (process in step 2900).

Further, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demo time information from the main side in step 2403-6 (second variation 2). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the distribution start demo time is long (10 seconds in this example). ) Is determined. In the second modification from the third embodiment, the distribution start demo time, that is, the time value of the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, has two types, a long time and a short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-8 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball at the long distribution start demonstration time. The notification effect (effect in which the player is not definitely notified whether or not the second special winning opening C20 is opened long in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and step 2403-10 (second variation 2) is executed. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-9 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the distribution start demonstration time which is a short time. Easy notification effect (effect that definitely informs the player that the second big winning opening C20 will be opened long in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). To do. Even if No in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). Thus, in the second modification from the third embodiment, in the distribution game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the entry easy unreported effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol. In the execution round, it is configured to execute the easy entry notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to make a difference in which of the easy-to-enter ball notification effect and the easy-to-enter ball notification effect to be executed depending on the game state. For example, in the sorting game execution round related to the long open jackpot (5A, 7A) on the first main game side that is won in the non-time-reduced game state and the non-probability variation game state, the unentered easy entry effect is executed. In the distribution game execution round related to the long open big hit (3B, 5B, 7B) on the second main game side, which is won in the time shortening game state and the probability variation game state, it is configured to execute the easy entry notice production. Good. Further, the ending effect as described above in the second embodiment may be configured to be executed. In such a case, during the special game execution for executing the ending effect, it is not easy to enter the ball. It is preferable that the notification effect and the easy entry notification information are displayed so as not to be noticeable to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to the ending effect having a high difficulty level. Similarly, it is configured to be able to execute an on-hold resort game effect that notifies the player that there is a hold that is a big hit among the on-hold effects that are currently being executed in the special game, and Even if it is executed, it may be configured to display the non-entered ball easy notification effect and the easy entered ball notification effect inconspicuously to the player.

Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game length open big hit symbol ( The second main game length open jackpot design is 3B, 5B and 7B). If Yes in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number (short opening). In the case of a big hit in which there is a round, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. Thus, in the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, the first main winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is a big hit pattern that is a long open in all rounds, the second main game long open big hit pattern In the jackpot according to the above, while notifying the round being executed at the time of executing each round (notifying how many rounds are currently executed), the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning in any round In a big hit with the mouth C20 being short open (or in a big hit having a round with the first big winning opening C10 being short open), the round being executed is not notified at the time of executing each round. When the round being executed is not notified, instead of displaying the notification of the round, an object image (for example, a treasure box, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (eg, a treasure box) is displayed as the first special winning opening C10 or the second. It may be configured to additionally display each time a round in which the special winning opening C20 is opened long is executed. In addition, a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and an effect that guarantees that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open is executed. You may. It should be noted that when performing a special game in which all rounds are long open, the effect may or may not be executed, but if not executed, the number of currently executed rounds is displayed. Is desirable. Incidentally, in a jackpot in which the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is short open in any round (or in a big hit having a round in which the first big winning opening C10 is short open), It may be configured to notify only the number of rounds in which the first special winning opening C10 or the second special winning opening C20 is long open (for example, "1R=long open, 2R=short open, 3R=long". In the case of "open", the third round informs that it is the second round, etc.). Incidentally, the effect to be executed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, for example, a big hit in the hold in a predetermined round after the distribution game execution round during the special game (or the distribution game execution round) In the case where there is a hold that becomes, it may be configured to be able to execute the in-hold condominium effect that notifies that it is definite that a big hit will be decided. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the reserved in-house game effect is executed in the round before the sorting game execution round, the game state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22). Since it has not been decided whether or not the player will enter the ball), despite the fact that the big hit has been notified, there is a possibility that the symbol fluctuation related to the hold that was the subject of the notification will be lost. It is preferable that the execution timing of the sol production is after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round or after finishing the distribution game execution round. Further, the distribution game execution round may be any round, and for example, the first round may be configured to be the distribution game execution round (also applicable to the case where there is one special winning opening). However, even if there are no game balls to hit (for example, if all game balls are cut off during the variation of the winning symbol), enough time can be rented for additional game balls in the second round. It is desirable to do it later.

Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the start demonstration effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 2) of FIG. 97 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not to receive the second long open command from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process moves to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not to receive the first length open command from the main side. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S informs that the final effect execution lottery for winning 1/5 (the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long in the special game being executed). Whether or not the lottery) is executed. Next, in step 2358, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the finalized effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process moves to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a long open confirmation notification effect (an effect of informing that the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long in the special game in progress) as a start demonstration effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2354 (when the first short opening command is received from the main side) or in the case of No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the long opening is present as the start demonstration effect. Notification effect (effect not informing whether the second special winning opening C20 is opened long or short in the special game being executed) is executed, and the following process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)} is executed. Move to. In the special game start demo time when the start demonstration effect is executed, like the distribution start demo time, 10 seconds for the big hit on the first main game side (a high proportion of them) and the second main game. The side jackpot (higher percentage thereof) may be configured to take 3 seconds.

With the above configuration, in the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second special winning opening in the distribution game execution round in all the special games C20 is long open, in the special game related to the first main game side, in the distribution game execution round, the second special winning opening C20 is provided with a special game that is long open and a special game that is short open. In the special game on the second main game side, the fact that the second special winning opening C20 will be opened for a long time at the start demonstration time of the special game is notified, while on the special game on the first main game side, the second big winning prize. Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured to have a case where the second big winning opening C20 is notified and a case where it is not notified at the start demonstration time of the special game, during the special game. In the special game on the side of the second main game that is sure to enter the specific area C22, the player is informed that the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long, while entering the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the side of the first main game, which is not definite to do, the player basically performs the effect of inspiring whether or not the second special winning opening C20 is to be opened for a long time, but also in the case of giving a definite notice. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that can execute an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the specific area C22.

In the modified example 2 from the third embodiment, the easy entry notification effect and the easy entry non-information effect are configured to be executed at the distribution start demonstration time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during execution of the round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds), or may be executed during execution of the distribution game execution round.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the third embodiment, a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, so that the probability variation game state is entered after the end of the special game. The playability which gives a high profit to the player by entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having such a game property is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, FIG. 99 is a drawing showing the basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the fourth embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the existence of the first main game starting opening A10 causes the second main game to start. The upper part of the game starting opening B10 is blocked. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the second main game starting openings B10. The game ball that is guided to the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, and flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so as not to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start openings A10. It may be configured to be guided to.

Further, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10, and thus the game area D30 While the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, even if each starting opening is arranged so as to be easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. Good. In addition, "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), which is easily guided, and flows down the left side of the game area D30. Is configured to be difficult to guide (however, it is not limited to this, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting port H10 may be provided on the left side and the right side of the game area D30, respectively)}.

Next, on the upper right of the outlet D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged. Before reaching the outlet D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged.

Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36 and on the upper right of the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second winning prize). Mouth solenoid C26), start driving at the time of small hit game start, upper shield member C24 that can obstruct the flow down to the lower shield member C25 of the game ball, and start drive when the power of the game machine is turned on, A lower shielding member C25 that can prevent the flow down to the V winning opening C22, a V winning opening C22 that is a winning opening that triggers a transition to a special game by entering a ball during a small hit game, and a V winning opening C22. V winning hole entrance detecting device C27s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, the second big winning hole outlet C23 for discharging the game ball entering the second big winning hole C20, and the second big It is provided with a second special winning opening discharge detecting device C23s for detecting the entry of a game ball into the winning opening outlet C23. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric part C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is set in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. In addition, in the second embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball has a lateral rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The internal structure of the second special winning opening C20 will be described later.

Next, FIG. 100 is an operation diagram relating to the second special winning opening C20 in the fourth embodiment, and more specifically, an upper shielding member C24 and a lower shielding provided in the second special winning opening C20. It is an operation view concerning whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C22 based on the opening and closing of the member C25. Incidentally, in the fourth embodiment, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the second special winning opening C20 during the small hitting game execution (if the player continues to hit right), the second big winning opening C20 is reached. The game balls are configured to enter a plurality of balls (for example, the opening mode of the second special winning opening C20 (the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d) is "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open→1 second closed→1 second open→close”. Therefore, whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C22 depends on whether the game ball in the second big winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24. It is determined by whether or not the opening timing with the lower shielding member C25 matches well. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

First, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the second special winning opening C20 is inserted into the second special winning opening C20 (as a flow path for a game ball inside the second special winning opening C20). The second big winning opening winning detection device C21s that detects a ball, the V winning opening C22, the V winning opening winning detecting device C22s that detects a ball entering the V winning opening C22, and the V winning opening C22 is not entered. And a second special winning opening discharge detecting device C23s for detecting a ball entering the second special winning opening discharging port C23, which is a discharge flow path for game balls. It is provided with a lower shield member C25 provided above the V winning opening C22 and an upper shield member C24 provided above the lower shield member C25, and the upper shield member C24 and the lower shield member C25 from the game board ( A closed state that can or can easily hinder the fall of the game ball by being in a protruding state (toward the player's side) (advancing state), and withdrawing into the game board (back side from the player's side) It is configured to be able to take the open state in which it is impossible or difficult to obstruct the fall of the game ball (it is possible to drop the game ball) by being in the state (retracted state) (like a so-called Bello-type attacker Is a configuration). More specifically, in the second embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shielding member C25, and the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shield member C25, and when the lower shield member C25 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the V winning opening C22. When the member C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to be reachable or easy to reach the V winning opening C22. Next, a specific flow path of the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening C20 during the execution of the small hit game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), the game ball that entered the second big winning opening C20 during the small hitting game is in the closed state after passing through the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s, and is in an upper shielding state. It is guided to the member C24 and stays in the area (referred to as a stopping area) formed by the upper shield member C24 and the inner wall surfaces of the second special winning opening C20 (placed on the upper shield member C24). In the second embodiment, since only one game ball can be placed in the stop area, a certain game ball is placed in the stop area as shown in FIG. 100(a). When it is, the game ball guided inside the second special winning opening C20 after the mounting timing of the certain game ball collides with the certain game ball mounted on the upper shielding member C24. Then, the flow path reaching the second special winning opening discharge detecting device C23s and the second special winning opening discharge C23 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (it is impossible or difficult to enter the V winning opening C22). It is configured to be guided to the flow path) (the stop area is such that the certain game ball is not pulled out of the stop area due to the impact when the other game ball collides. It is configured). Here, the right part of FIG. 100(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the XX cross section in FIG. 100(a). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 100(a), the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are both in a closed state (a state where the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 protrude from the game board (toward the player's side) (the sectional view). It is understood that the game ball can be placed on the upper shield member C24 in this case)).

In the fourth embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be opened after a certain period of time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game), and the lower shield member. C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a constant cycle (4 seconds cycle in this example) after the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic) Whether or not the ball can enter the V winning opening C22 is mainly determined by the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened (in other words, the timing of starting the small hit game) (the lower shielding member C25 is (When the small hitting game, in which the timing of opening the upper shield member C24 and the timing of opening the upper shielding member C24 are substantially the same, is started, the game ball can enter the V winning opening C22).

The fourth embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a state in which the fall of the game ball cannot be impeded or difficult to inhibit, and a state in which the fall of the game ball can be impeded or easily impeded. , May have any structure as long as they can be changed, and other configurations are not limited.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two shield members, the upper shield member C24 and the lower shield member C25, which prevent the game balls from entering the V winning opening C22 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The shielding member may be configured to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening C22. Further, even in the gaming machine, which is shown in the third embodiment, a gaming ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, which causes a transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends, You may comprise so that the shielding member which obstructs the entry of the game ball into C22 may be provided. In such a configuration, the opening mode of the shielding member may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot pattern that triggered the jackpot. In such a configuration, (1) the shielding in the distribution game execution round As an opening mode of the member, the shielding member is changed from the closed state to the open state at 50 ms after the distribution game execution round start timing or at the distribution game execution round start timing regardless of the jackpot pattern, (2) distribution game execution round The shield member changes from the open state to the closed state at a timing of 200 ms after the end timing (depending on the big hit pattern, there may be a case of 200 ms later or a case of 3000 ms later). By this, there is a timing that the shielding member opens regardless of the big hit pattern, the distribution game execution round ends more than the period from when the distribution game execution round starts until the shielding member first starts opening. It can be configured such that the period from when the shielding member is closed to the last is longer.

Next, FIG. 101 shows a timer interruption process performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. Differences from the second embodiment are step 1700 (third), step 1750 (third), step 3450 (third), and step 1950 (third). That is, in step 1600, after executing the special game control process, in step 1700 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1750 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an upper shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 3450 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a lower shield member drive control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a V winning opening entry determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1601.

Next, FIG. 102 shows a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from the second embodiment is steps 1403 (third), 1410-3 (third), step 1434 (third) and step 1436 (third), that is, step 1403 (third). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied (in the fourth embodiment, the fact that the small hit game is not being executed is added as the fluctuation start condition). If Yes in step 1403 (third), the process proceeds to step 1405, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1419. In addition, after determining the stop symbol for the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1410-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery, the game state, The variation mode (or variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

If the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1434 (third) whether or not the stop symbol is the small hit symbol. If Yes in step 1434 (third), in step 1436 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1434 (third), the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 103 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) is an example of the first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B) in the fourth embodiment. Is. In the fourth embodiment, regardless of the game state, the table content to be referred to is different only depending on whether it is a symbol variation related to the first main game side or a symbol variation related to the second main game side. There is. Further, the first main game side and the second main game side are configured to be able to win a small hit, and the winning/winning lottery result on the second main game side is almost a small win (with a probability of 1020/1024). The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, when winning the small hit, the first main game side is one type, the second main game side is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as the small hit symbol from the two types of main game symbol candidates. ing. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and/or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). It may be configured to migrate}.

Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 28 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the special game triggered by the ball entering the V winning opening C22 (in the fourth embodiment, a small hit). (A special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the game). If Yes in step 1681-1, in step 1681-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol is a short-time big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol that shifts to the time-reduced gaming state after the end of execution of the special game. Then, it is determined whether or not it is 4B/5A/5B/7A/7B). If Yes in step 1681-2, the process proceeds to step 1681-5. On the other hand, if No in step 1681-1, in step 1681-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a time saving small hit symbol (after the completion of execution of the special game, the special game will be moved to the time shortening game state. It is a small hit symbol that becomes a trigger to shift to, and in the present example, it is determined whether or not after the special game triggered by 7AK and 7BK). If Yes in step 1681-4, the process proceeds to step 1681-5.

Next, in step 1681-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (100 times in this example). Next, in step 1681-6 and step 1681-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag, and shifts to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. To do. In addition, in the case of No in step 1681-2, in other words, when the stop symbol is 4A which is a time saving big hit symbol, or in the case of No in step 1681-4, in other words, when it is 2BK which is a time saving small hit symbol Even when it is after the end of the special game, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. Note that the processing related to the limited frequency (subroutines of step 1411, step 1450, step 1413, step 1431) is deleted.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722 described later, that is, a scheduled small hit game (particularly, the scheduled second big Whether the flag that is turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharge waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the second special winning opening C20} is off after the execution of the winning opening C20 opening pattern) is completed. To judge. If Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small hit symbols, "0.2 seconds open → 0. 8 seconds closed → 1 second opened → 1 second closed → 1 second opened → closed”, and if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second big winning opening C20, the game ball will go to the second big winning opening C20. Configured to enter multiple balls). The opening mode of the special winning opening (second special winning opening C20) at the time of executing the small hit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the total opening time of the second special winning opening C20 at the time of executing one small hit. May be configured to be a predetermined time or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or less) (for example, “0.2 second open→0.8 second closed→1 second open→close” (total open time=1 .2 seconds)). Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a small hit execution start command (a command to the effect that the small hit game has been started, and launches a game ball toward the second big winning opening C20 to the player. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In the fourth embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, so that the discharge is performed after a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hit. The waiting time is configured to end (of course, the method for measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this, and for example, a scheduled small hit game (particularly, a scheduled second big winning opening C20 The measurement may be started after the execution of the release pattern) is completed}.

On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process moves to step 1712.

Next, in step 1712, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball winning (ball winning) in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1714, the process moves to step 1718. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1712 or step 1714, in step 1716, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the small hit game timer MP41t and a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) for opening the special winning opening has elapsed. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1716, the process moves to step 1718.

Next, in step 1718, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops driving the second special winning opening electric prize C21d and closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge standby flag (the discharge standby time is started from the timing of executing this processing), and the process proceeds to step 1724. Even if No in step 1701, the process proceeds to step 1724.

Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (10 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 1724, in step 1725, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge standby flag. Next, in step 1728, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}. Even if No in step 1710, step 1716, or step 1724, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}.

Here, in this example, the maximum number of winnings set as a program in one small hit is 10, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one small hit is 1.8 seconds or less throughout 1 2 seconds (more specifically, a series of opening and closing of "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → closed" as an opening mode of the big winning opening when one small hit is executed. The operation is set to) and the special winning opening is controlled to be closed when any closing condition is achieved. Here, in order to suppress the excessive winning and minimize the deviation from the payout design value, it is desirable to control so as to close immediately after the closing condition is achieved. On the other hand, even if such a treatment is performed, a ball has entered the special winning opening immediately after the closing condition has been achieved, or a prize-winning ball has accumulated in front of the count sensor (the count sensor detects the prize-winning ball after the closure condition is achieved. It is also possible. Therefore, regardless of whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the maximum number of winnings has been exceeded, the winnings are processed as valid winnings only under predetermined conditions (within a predetermined period after closing). It is desirable to do.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined drive pattern (in this example, a pattern of repeating “close for 5 seconds→open for 1 second→close for 24 seconds”) as an upper shielding member. The driving of C24 is started, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800). It should be noted that there is no problem if the drive pattern of the upper shielding member C24 is changed, but in this example, the game ball is V winning only when the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match. Since it is configured to be able to enter the mouth C22, it is impossible to enter the V winning opening C22 because the opening time is set to a long time such as 3 seconds or the driving is not opened for 10 seconds or more. It is desirable not to configure. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1756, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the upper shielding member C24 to the closed state (initial position) to end the driving, and the next process {step 3450 (third)). Processing}. As described above, in the second embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving upon the start of the small hit game (the opening of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit), and the end of the small hit game. The driving is configured to be terminated as a trigger, and the small hit game is completed before the driving is performed once in the opening pattern of the upper shielding member C24, and the driving of the upper shielding member C24 is configured to be completed. There is. Since the small hit game is provided with a discharge waiting time, even after the opening of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit game is finished, the small hit game is not finished until the discharge waiting time is finished. It will be.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the lower shield member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3452, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the lower shielding member C25 with a constant drive pattern (in this example, a pattern of “closing for 3 seconds→opening for 1 second” is repeated) after power-on. , And proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (third)}. In this way, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving when the small hit game starts, while the lower shielding member C25 starts driving when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, a game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the discharge standby time. In this case, it is determined whether the flag that is turned on) is off. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C22. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPU MC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the discharge standby time end timing of the small hit game). Determine whether there is. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main control section SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M has the V winning opening effective period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). In addition, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of unauthorized entry such as entry of a game ball into the V winning opening C22 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately executed. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to entering the V winning opening C22 is "9R", and the series of the series of "small hit game → special game related to entering the V winning opening C22" is summed up. Then, the round number "1R" related to the small hit game and the round number "9R" related to the special game are "10R". In addition, in this example, the round to be entered into the V winning opening C22 (specific area) is set as 1R (that is, the number of rounds in which a payout can be obtained is 9 rounds of 2 to 10 rounds). It may be designed as 1R after entering the V winning opening C22 (that is, 10 rounds of 1 to 10 rounds can be obtained).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, a control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 109 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2001 (third) and step 2003 (third). That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2001 (third), the CPU SC of the sub control board S resets and starts the power on timer SM24t. The power-on timer SM24t is provided for grasping the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, when RAM clear information is received → sub-side). When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received, the production related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub RAM). Next, in step 2003 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of holdings (for example, the drawing holding counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). Note that the effect, the information relating to the special symbol, etc. being executed are not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the CPUSC of the sub control board S. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2500 (third) and step 2550 (third). That is, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described above. Next, in step 2500 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a V winning detection effect display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400. Further, after executing the special game-related display control process in step 2400, in step 2550 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the small hit game-related display control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 2900. .. The stay stage determination process of step 2050 is deleted.

Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (third) in FIG. 109 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit execution start command (a command relating to the fact that the small hit game has started) is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prompts a right-handed instruction effect {launch of a game ball toward the second special winning opening C20 during a small hit game (execute right-handed). The command related to the effect} is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, if No in step 2502, the process moves to step 2506. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the CPUSC of the sub-control board S to notify the player that a game ball has entered the V winning detection command (V winning opening C22 from the main side). It is determined whether or not a command for executing the V winning detection detection effect, which is the effect of (3) is received. If Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command relating to the V winning detection effect (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2506, the procedure moves to the next step (step 2400). The V winning detection effect is an effect that informs the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C22 and then a special game will be executed. Therefore, as the effect content, an effect of celebrating the player is given. It is desirable that the contents and the contents of an effect that informs the player that it is highly profitable, for example, an effect of displaying "V" on the effect display device SG in the full display area SG10.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (third) in FIG. 109 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the small hit medium flag is off. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit start display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). ..

Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S turns on the small hit medium flag, and proceeds to step 2564. Even if No in step 2552, the process proceeds to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2564, in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the small hit end display (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). .. Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the small hit flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900). Even if No in step 2554 or step 2564, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the operation relating to the winning of the V winning opening C22 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, in the same figure, when the hold related to the small hit occurs, it will be calculated based on the number of holds when the variation time is determined. The upper shield member C24 is opened after the hold related to the small hit occurs. It is an action diagram which illustrated the relationship between the time until it is started (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the “upper shield member opening arrival time”) and the ease of entering the V winning opening C22. .. In addition, in this example, a case where a hold related to a small hit occurs during a certain symbol variation in which there are two hold related to a loss. In addition, in the present example, the order of executing the holding is the order of “first holding→second holding→third holding” (the third holding is the holding related to the small hit). In the following, the time from the occurrence of the 3rd hold (=holding related to the small hit) to the end of the changing pattern is the same (2 seconds), and the 1st hold of the pattern change starts. The timing and the random number values of the variation mode determination random numbers of the first to third suspension are the same (for example, the random number value of the variation mode determination random numbers of the first suspension and the second suspension is 799, and the variation mode determination random number of the third suspension). Is 1023).

First, if there is a hold related to a small hit during the pattern change in which there are two hold related to a loss, the third hold (=hold related to a small hit) occurs in the upper shield member opening arrival time. From the time until the fluctuation of the symbol is changing; the first holding time, the second holding time, and the third holding time (=holding for small hits), and the small hit game start. It is calculated as the total time from the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started;

Next, referring to the table at the top of the figure, while there are two holdings related to loss (first holding and second holding), the third holding (=holding related to small hits) Under the situation that occurred, as pattern A, when the firing of the game ball is stopped after the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) occurrence (in particular, after the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) occurs Is a case where a new hold does not occur}, and the pattern B is used as a pattern B when the game ball is continuously launched after the occurrence of the third hold (=hold related to a small hit) {especially, the third When a new hold occurs after a hold (=hold related to a small hit) occurs}, the upper shield member opening arrival time.

In pattern A, a new hold does not occur after the third hold (=hold for small hits) occurs, and the number of holds is 2 (the second hold and the second hold when the variable time relating to the first hold is determined). 3 hold (=hold for small hits)}, and the number of hold is 1 {3rd hold (=hold for small hits)} when the variable time for the second hold is determined, and the third hold (= The number of holdings is 0 when the variable time for holding a small hit is determined. In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table of FIG. 26, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) to the end of the changing pattern is 2 seconds. The variable time of the first hold is 5 seconds; the variable time of the second hold is 10 seconds; the variable time of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) is 60 seconds; the small hit game The time from the start to the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 82 seconds.

Next, in the pattern B, after the third hold (=hold related to a small hit) occurs, two new holds occur after the start of the symbol change of the first hold and before the start of the symbol change of the second hold. In this case, the number of holdings is 2 when the variable time relating to the first hold is determined {the second holding and the third holding (=holding relating to the small hit)}, and the number of holdings is used when the changing time relating to the second hold is determined. Are three {third hold (=hold related to small hit) and two newly generated hold}, and the number of hold is 2 when the variable time for the third hold (=hold related to small hit) is determined. It becomes the number (the above-mentioned two newly generated holdings). In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table of FIG. 26, in the pattern B, from the occurrence of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) until the fluctuation of the symbol is ending. Is 2 seconds; the first holding time is 5 seconds; the second holding time is 5 seconds; the third holding time (=holding for small hits) is 60 seconds. Yes; the time from the start of the small hit game to the start of opening the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 77 seconds.

Here, as described above, the ease of entering the V winning opening C22 (whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C22) depends on the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Is determined by whether or not they match well. That is, by referring to the upper shield member opening arrival time and the opening timing of the lower shield member C25, whether or not it is easy to enter the V winning opening C22 at the time of the small hit game according to the pattern A and the pattern B. It is possible to determine in advance.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the open state (closed state) of the upper shielding member C24 and the open state (closed state) of the lower shielding member C25 in each of the pattern A and the pattern B (the lower shielding member C25 is a power source). Is periodically opened and closed from the time of input.) In this timing chart, the elapsed time from the third hold (=hold related to small hit) occurrence timing is illustrated with reference to the third hold (=hold related to small hit) occurrence timing. In addition, as an open mode (close mode) of the lower shielding member C25, the elapsed time from the third hold (=hold related to small hit) occurrence timing is “4n+1 (seconds)” to “4n+2 (seconds)” (n Is an integer) and is open.

As shown in this timing chart, in the pattern A, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 82 seconds have elapsed from the third holding (=holding related to the small hit) occurrence timing, If the time (0.2 seconds in this example) required for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C8 is taken into consideration, it becomes 82.2 seconds, and the 82.2 seconds is "4n+1 (seconds)". "To "4n+2 (seconds)" (n is an integer). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 do not match, and the upper shielding member C24 is opened, so that the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls. Since the lower shield member C25 is not opened when reaching the lower shield member C25, it is difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (the lower shield member C25 causes V The entry into the winning opening C22 is easily blocked). On the other hand, in the pattern B, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 77 seconds have elapsed from the third suspension (=retention related to the small hit) occurrence timing, and the game ball is the upper shielding member C24. 77.2 seconds when the time (0.2 seconds in this example) from the position of to reach the lower shielding member C25 is added, and the 77.2 seconds are “4n+1 (seconds)” to “4n+2 (seconds). (N is an integer) (n=19). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are matched, and the upper shielding member C24 is opened, so that the game sphere placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls down. Since the lower shield member C25 is opened when the shield member C25 is reached, it is easy to enter the V winning opening C22 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (depending on the lower shield member C25, a game ball). It is difficult to prevent the ball from entering the V winning opening C22). In the case of the pattern A and the pattern B, the above-described firing continuation instruction effect is executed.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the pattern A, a new hold does not occur until the symbol variation related to the small hit starts after the hold related to the small hit occurs (the number of hold is 2). It is difficult to start the pattern variation in the above state = the time from the occurrence of the hold for the small hit until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started tends to be long), and as the pattern B, the small hit A new hold occurs from the time when the hold related to occurs to the start of the pattern change related to the small hit (the pattern change is easily started while the state in which the number of hold is 2 or more is always maintained = small The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 may change depending on whether the time from the occurrence of the hold related to the hit to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is short). Further, due to such a change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24, it is possible to change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are well matched. In the case of winning the small hit, it is possible to make the gaming machine highly entertaining, such as paying attention to whether or not to enter the V winning opening C22.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, based on the variation mode determination random number of the hold that exists at the time when the hold related to the small hit occurs, all the changeable times that can be executed corresponding to the number of hold when the hold is exhausted are confirmed. Then, based on the result, the time from the occurrence of the hold for the small hit in advance to the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is calculated, and the calculated result and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are calculated. , (Additionally, the time required for the game ball to reach the lower shield member C25 from the position of the upper shield member C24 is added), it is easy to enter the V winning opening C22 in the small hit game. Predicting a desired change in the number of holdings (at which timing and how much holding is desirable) for the purpose of (the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are matched) Is possible. With this configuration, and when a small win is put on hold, it is possible to enter the V winning opening C22 while the small hit game related to the hold is being executed, the combination of the variation times that allow the enter The player may be informed of the shooting mode of the game ball (or the desired change in the number of holdings) as an effect, and by doing so, in the small win game, the V winning opening C22 is played. It is possible to create a novel game property in which whether or not a ball enters can be determined by the technical intervention of the player.

In the fourth embodiment, depending on the number of holdings when determining the variation time of the main game symbol, the variation time that is determined can be configured to be different, so that a small-hit withholding occurs. Although the time until the lower shield member C25 is opened can be changed to allow the technical intervention of the player, the time from the occurrence of the small hit holding until the lower shield member C25 is opened is set. The configuration that allows the player to differ depending on the technical intervention is not limited to this. For example, (1) when the player presses, the fluctuation of the main game symbol is forcibly stopped, and the stop symbol is displayed. A variable shortening button to be provided is provided, and the time is varied depending on the timing of pressing the button, (2) the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are simultaneously parallel It is configured to be able to execute a parallel lottery that can be drawn (and can be changed), and when the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol becomes a small hit symbol, a small hit relating to the small hit symbol. The period during the game execution may be configured to temporarily stop the variable time (elapse of the variable time) of the first main game symbol, and the time may be different.

In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (for example, a specific small hit symbol is stopped, etc.) is satisfied, a game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the execution of the small hit game. An effect that informs the player of the timing of the game ball to be obtained (for example, on the effect display device SG, "If you enter the specific entrance now, you have a great chance to enter the V winning opening!", etc. May be performed).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the specific game state, there is a probability variation game state in which the winning/winning lottery result is advantageous to the player as compared with the non-probability variation game state, and the second big prize during the special game. It is configured to have a distribution game execution round which is a round in which the mouth C20 is opened, and by entering the V winning opening C22 during the distribution game execution round, the probability variation game state is transitioned after the special game ends. It may be configured as described above (so-called Jamken game as exemplified in the third embodiment). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in the round before the distribution game execution round, the game ball is fired so that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C22 in the distribution game execution round. It is desirable to be configured so as to be able to execute an effect to be notified to the person (for example, "On the effect display device SG, a message such as "A big chance of a sudden change if you enter the second big winning opening now!!") is executed. ..

<Structure of the big prize hole>
In the fourth embodiment, the number of game balls passing through a specific area within the special winning opening related to the operation of the condition device (for example, the V winning opening C22 provided in the second special winning opening C20) is It is configured so that it does not exceed about one-tenth of the number of game balls to win the big winning opening. In the fourth embodiment, one specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22) is provided, and a movable object (for example, the lower shielding member C25) that changes the ease of passing through the specific area is mounted above this. However, the specific region itself is set in advance without changing depending on each game, but a plurality of specific regions may be provided. In addition, the movable object is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the special winning opening affects the result of the game from the time when the special electric auditors product starts operating when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated. Until then, it is configured to always continue a certain operation (a series of operations are repeated), and the ratio of the number of game balls passing through a specific area is configured to match the design value.

More specifically, as the configuration of the fourth embodiment, two movable objects, an upper shielding member C24 and a lower shielding member C25, are provided as movable objects in the second special winning opening C20. C24 is configured to start driving when the small hit game starts, and to end the driving when the small hit game ends, and the lower shield member C25 is always driven in a constant drive pattern after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Although not shown, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the second special winning opening C20 during the execution of the small hit, the game ball entering the second special winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24. The two movable objects, the lower shield member C25 and the lower shield member C25, make it difficult for the player to enter the V winning opening C22 and easily enter the second winning opening outlet C23, and the game ball entering the second winning opening C20. One tenth or less of the game balls enter the V winning opening C22, and the other game balls that enter the second special winning opening C20 are configured to enter the second special winning opening C23. There is.

Here, the constantly constant operation includes a case where the movable object continues to operate after the power is turned on, and the movable object is stopped at a constant cycle, or the accessory continuous operation device is operating (operation of a special electric accessory). It also includes a case where the movable object is configured to perform a certain operation when one of the number of game balls won in the middle).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, a special winning opening having a specific area is provided in a direction in which a game ball won at one opportunity when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated falls in the direction of a game ball won at another opportunity. The rolling surface of the game ball is formed in order to shorten the residence time of the game ball in the special winning opening so as not to change it (because it becomes steeper than the front-back inclination in the stage of the center decoration) Inclined towards the outlet). Also, before it is decided whether or not the game ball that has won the special winning opening at a moment when the accessory continuous operation device is not operating passes through a specific area, it is won to the starting opening of another game ball. Therefore, a discharge ball detection sensor is provided so as not to be opened again, and detection of this discharge ball detection sensor or a predetermined time after closing is used as a trigger to satisfy the fluctuation start condition of the symbol.

<<<Structure of the gaming machine according to this example>>>
Here, the configuration of the gaming machine according to this example or the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below.
<<Performance of ordinary electric accessories>>
Hereinafter, the performance of the ordinary electric accessory (in this example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) will be described in detail.

<Basic performance>
In this example, the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) is changed upon the passage of the auxiliary game starting port H10, and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port motor combination) is stopped by the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol). Only one normal electric accessory that opens the object B11d) is provided. As described above, in this example, when the winning of the special winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) is triggered, an ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening) is used. The electric accessory B11d) is configured not to be opened, and the relationship between the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) and the normal electric auditors product operated by the operation of the normal symbol display device is predetermined. , A gaming state, etc. (whether it is a probability variation gaming state, whether it is a time shortening gaming state, whether a special game is being executed, etc.) Thus, while changing the operating ratio of the ordinary electric accessory, the complication of the game is kept within a certain range. Needless to say, the normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20) is configured to operate only when a specific gate (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10) is passed, and other Normally, the symbol display device does not operate depending on the conditions.

Further, in this example, the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) does not operate while the normal electric auditors product (for example, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d) is operating. Is configured. Here, "while the normal electric accessory is operating" means that the game ball has passed through the auxiliary game starting opening H10 and the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) is variably displayed, and then the normal symbol display device. After the combination of symbols that will cause the ordinary electric auditors product to operate is displayed (not included when displayed), from the time the winning opening for the ordinary electric auditors product begins to open, etc. It refers to the period from the state where the winning hole for the ordinary electric accessory is opened to the time when the state ends. Further, in order to be able to clearly understand the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product 1, it is possible to confirm that the operation has ended after the ordinary electric auditors product is in operation. Normally, a predetermined blank time is provided before the start of the variation of the design, or the output of the illumination device (for example, the game effect lamp D26), the speaker (for example, the speaker D24), or the like can inform that the operation is finished. desirable.

<Hold storage performance>
In this example, the operation of the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) ends when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (when the normal symbol display device is to be activated). Until the time or when the normal electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is operated in the normal symbol display device, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is displayed from the time when a combination of symbols is displayed. When the number of game balls of more than 4 passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10 by the end of, the first 4 games after the operation of the normal symbol display device or the normal electric auditors end. It is configured not to store the passing information for more than the four pieces so that the ordinary symbol display device cannot be continuously operated by passing through a gate other than the ball (the upper limit number of the auxiliary game holding balls is 4). Is configured in pieces). Here, "when the operation of the normal symbol display device ends" means that when the variation of the combination of symbols on the ordinary symbol display device continues, the variation ends. "After the operation of the ordinary electric auditors'end" means after the state where the state ends after the winning opening of the ordinary electric auditors has been opened. In addition, "the operation of the normal symbol display device" means that the game ball passes through the gate at which the normal symbol display device operates and the action on the normal symbol display device by the effect of the first four game balls. After that, it means from the time when the combination of symbols on the normal symbol display device starts to change to the time when the change ends after the state where the change continues.

Specifically, in this example, as illustrated in step 1110 of FIG. 7, the auxiliary game holding upper limit number is 4 in all the embodiments, and the auxiliary game holding ball is the upper limit number. Even if a game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting opening H10 in a situation, a new auxiliary game holding ball based on the passage does not occur. Incidentally, the upper limit number of auxiliary games is not limited to four, and there is no problem in changing it.

<Performance of ordinary patterns>
In this example, when the game ball has passed through the gate (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10 and may be the winning port) (only when the normal symbol display device is to operate), the normal symbol The time until the symbol combination is displayed on the display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) is predetermined. Here, "when the combination of symbols is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device" is "when the operation of the ordinary symbol display device is terminated", and "predetermined" is the characteristic of one gaming machine. It means that it is decided. Specifically, the game ball is configured so that the time from the time the normal symbol display device starts the operation to the time it ends the operation is predetermined.

More specifically, when the game ball wins a winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary game or when the game ball passes through the gate (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10), the ordinary symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) is displayed. The time until the combination of symbols is displayed (variation time of the auxiliary game symbol) is, for example, in the case of the present embodiment, 1 second in the case of a time shortening game state (auxiliary game short flag ON), non-time reduction In the case of the game state (off time of the auxiliary game short time flag), it is 10 seconds, which is a predetermined time value. In addition, the shortening button (not shown, but by operating, it is possible to reduce the variation time of the main game symbol, or connected to the main control board M side that can shorten the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol It is desirable not to install a function that changes the time until the combination of symbols in the normal operation is displayed after the normal symbol display device is activated, such as the variation reduction function based on the button operation. Can be expected to be easier.

<Probability function>
In this example, as a value of the probability that the combination of symbols that the normal electric auditors product (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d) is activated is displayed, the normal gaming state (non-time shortening gaming state, The probability of the auxiliary game short-time flag is sometimes called off) and the probability of the electric support game state (sometimes called the time shortening game state, the auxiliary game short-time flag on state, etc.) are defined. The transition to the electric support game state is set to be considered only when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is completed (when the big win is completed). Specifically, in the non-time shortened game state (auxiliary game time shortened flag off), it is the probability that the combination of symbols that the normal electric auditors product (the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d) will operate is displayed. "14/1024" and the probability of displaying a combination of symbols in which the normal electric auditors product (the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d) is activated in the time shortening game state (auxiliary gaming time shortening flag ON) There are two types, "1023/1024". It should be noted that one of the probabilities may be configured to be “0/n” or “1/1” (which is always a deviation/is always a hit).

<Modification example with multiple ordinary electric accessories>
In this example, the example in which only one ordinary electric auditors object is mounted (only one of the second main game starting opening electric auditors object B11d is mounted) is illustrated because the special electric auditors object is mounted. Instead of mounting the electric accessory, it is also possible to mount a plurality of ordinary electric accessories. In this case, it is desirable that the variable winning device is not opened at the same time by the operation of a plurality of ordinary electric auditors. Specifically, from the time when the combination of symbols that will operate one ordinary electric auditors product is displayed on the one ordinary symbol display device to the time when the operation of the ordinary electric auditors product ends, another Ordinary symbol display device, stop the symbol that does not normally operate the electric accessory, and perform control processing to continue the display as it is, or a predetermined fluctuation time (auxiliary game By suspending the measurement of (variation time relating to the symbol) and then performing a control process that does not stop the symbol, it is possible to control so that the variable winning device is not opened at the same time. When the set value is set, it is also possible to set the operation probability of the ordinary electric auditors (normal probability of hitting a symbol) for each set value. Further, when a plurality of ordinary electric auditors products are provided, all the operating probabilities may be changed for each set value, or only a part of the operating probabilities (for example, a plurality of ordinary electric auditors products are continuously operated). In the case of a so-called general electric-powered machine (if necessary, refer to Japanese Patent No. 5213219) that is formed so as to operate, the operating probability of the ordinary electric auditors as a starting point may be changed.

<<performance of special electric accessory>>
Hereinafter, the performance of the special electric accessory (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) in this example will be described in detail.

<<performance of special electric accessory>>
<Number of special electric accessories and condition devices>
As an example of the number of special electric auditors' products (big prize holes) in this example, in the present embodiment, the number of special electric auditors' products (big prize holes) is the first big prize hole C10 and the second big prize hole C20. The number of special symbols display device (main game symbol display device) is two, the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20, the number of condition devices Only one condition device flag is provided, and the big hit is configured to start only when the condition device flag is turned on.

<Operating performance of special electric accessory>
In this example (for example, the fourth embodiment), two special electric auditors' products are mounted (two special winning holes are provided), but in any special electric auditors' character, the auditors continuously operate. When the device is not operating, it is configured to operate only when a predetermined combination of small hit symbols (excluding those relating to the operation of the condition device) is displayed. Here, the case where the accessory continuous operation device is operating means that after the operation trigger has occurred (not including when it occurs), the special winning opening for the special electric auditors product related to the accessory continuous operation device is From the time when the opening etc. started (from the time when the big hit started), the state that the special winning opening related to the special electric auditors related to the role continuous operation device is continuously open (during the big hit) After that, it means the time when the state ends (the big hit ends). Further, the "operation of the condition device", a combination of symbols that the condition device is activated is displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, when the process of step 1423 of FIG. 25 is executed, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Or when the game ball passes through a specific area within the special winning opening which is opened when the accessory continuous operation device is not operating (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1956 of FIG. 108). Then, after the state in which the special winning opening for the special electric auditors related to the winning accessory continuous operation device is continuously opened (for example, during the big hit), the state ends (for example, the big hit is End) until time.

In addition, the operation of the special electric auditors product means, in the case where the auditors product continuous operating device is operating, after the operation trigger by the auditors product continuous operating device occurs, the special winning hole for the special electric auditors product. The state ends after the player has started opening the jackpot (for example, the jackpot has started) and the jackpot related to the special electric auditors has been opened (for example, the jackpot is being executed). (For example, when the big hit ends), except when the accessory continuous operation device is operating, after the actuation trigger of the special electric accessory occurs, From the time when the prize hole starts to open (for example, a small hit starts), the special prize hole related to the special electric accessory has been opened (for example, a small hit is in progress), It refers to the time when the state ends (for example, the small hit ends). Incidentally, in the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment, the small hit is started by the stop display of the small hit symbol, and the second special winning opening C20 (special electric accessory) is opened based on the small hit. Is configured.

In addition, in this example, the special electric auditors product is operated so that the relationship between the operation and the operation trigger can be grasped when the operation trigger is generated, and the operation trigger is generated by the accessory continuous operation device. Sometimes the blank time between rounds (sometimes referred to as inter-round time) is set so that the special electric auditors' second and subsequent actuations triggered by the trigger will operate without interruption to the extent that they can be recognized as being continuous. There is. Specifically, during the execution of the jackpot, the time value of the inter-round time (the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round of a certain round) is recognized as multiple consecutive rounds in the jackpot. It is preferable to design the time value as much as possible (if the time between rounds is too long, it becomes difficult to recognize that multiple rounds are continuous). The time between rounds is appropriately set within the range of about 60 ms to 3000 ms while considering the ratio).

Furthermore, in the present example, a symbol that activates the special electric auditors product only once (for example, a small hit symbol) and a symbol that activates the condition device (for example, a large hit symbol) are clearly distinguished, and these are simultaneously activated ( There is no specific symbol combination (such that a small hit and a big hit occur simultaneously when the symbol is displayed). On the other hand, the accessory continuous actuating device arbitrarily operates the two special electric auditors during the operation within a range not exceeding 10 times in total. Specifically, in the case where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are configured as two big winning openings, when performing a big jackpot of 10 rounds, "1 round to 5 rounds: The first special winning opening C10 is opened, 6 rounds to 10 rounds: the second special winning opening C10 is opened", so that the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 do not operate at the same time, In addition, the number of operations of the two special electric auditors is set within a range not exceeding 10 times in total. In addition, it is set so that the special electric auditors' operations are always performed twice or more for one operation of the accessory continuous operation device (big hit), and the small hit game and the big hit game are clearly distinguished. (In the small hit game, the special electric accessory works only once).

In this example, the main game symbol does not change when the ball enters the special winning opening, and by the operation of the one special electric auditors, other than the predetermined one special winning opening. It is configured so that the winning openings are not opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special game from occurring in a loop and prevent the game form of one special game from becoming complicated.
In addition, the special winning opening that is opened by the operation of the special electric auditors is predetermined so that it does not change with each game, and the special electric auditors and the special electric auditors are opened by the operation of the special electric auditors. It is set so that it has a one-to-one relationship with the special winning opening.

<Split performance/operating probability of special electric auditors (big hit)>
In this example, in order to keep the gambling ability within a certain range, the special electric auditors continuously operate with a single operation of the object continuous operation device (big hit) with respect to the jackpot performance and the operation probability (big hit probability). The total number of times of operation (for example, the expected value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot) is N times, and the maximum value of the maximum number of prizes related to the special electric auditors (for example, one round in the jackpot is a big prize. R is the number of balls entered into the mouth, and the maximum value of the number of game balls obtained when one game ball wins the big prize hole (for example, prize ball payout when one ball enters the big prize hole) When the number is S, the operation probability M (for example, the expected value of the jackpot winning probability) is set so as not to exceed “M×N×R×S≦7.5”.

More specifically using this embodiment, the higher jackpot probability (big hit probability in the probability varying game state) is MH, the lower jackpot probability (big hit probability in the non-stochastic varying game state) is ML, the jackpot probability. If P is the expected value of the number of times the start of the big hit occurs consecutively when is higher (probability variation game state),
MH=410/65536≈0.0063, ML=205/65536≈0.003,
P≈1.357,
S=15, R=10, N=10
M=(P+1)÷{(P÷MH)+(1÷ML)}=0.0044 (1/227.663)
Therefore,
M×N×R×S=0.0044×10×10×15≈6.5886≦7.5
Is satisfied, and “M×N×R×S≦7.5” is satisfied.
Although detailed calculation is omitted, each value is set so as to satisfy “M×N×R×S≦7.5” also in other embodiments.

となることが望ましい。また、本実施形態のように、高い値のまま一定回数抽せんを行う場合は、その一定回数は、あらかじめ定められた一の値（以下この項でγとする。）とすることが望ましい。なお、このときのＰ・α・γの関係は、

となることが望ましい。 In this example, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the value of the operation probability M is changed from a low value to a high value (non-probability) every time the operation of the accessory continuous operation device ends (at the end of a big hit). If you win the big jackpot in the floating game state and if you move to the probability varying game state after the big hit ends, it is assumed that you win the lottery), or a lottery that does not change the high value ) Is performed (if you win the big hit in the probability variation game state, and if you move to the probability variation game state again after the big hit, it is assumed that you have won the lottery), but in any case, the winning probability is , Which is a predetermined value (hereinafter, α (0<α≦1) in this section).
Although not adopted in the present embodiment, when the value of the operation probability M is a high value, a lottery in which the value of the operation probability M is changed from a high value to a low value for each lottery related to the operation of the condition device once. In the case of performing (sometimes referred to as a falling lottery), it is desirable that the winning probability is one predetermined value (hereinafter, β (0≦β<1) in this section).
Note that the relationship between the values of P, α, and β when changing the probability is

Is desirable. Further, when the drawing is performed a fixed number of times with a high value as in the present embodiment, the certain number of times is preferably set to a predetermined value (hereinafter referred to as γ in this section). The relationship between P, α and γ at this time is

Is desirable.

Although it is possible to have two or more of α, β, and γ described above, in consideration of probability setting of the gaming machine, in the present example, α, β, and γ are configured to be one type or less, respectively. There is. Further, in the case where the high-probability variation lottery is performed by the structure as in the present embodiment, it is desirable that α be a physically possible maximum value “1” and satisfy the above relationship. Further, β in the case where the falling lottery is carried out by the structure is preferably set to “0” which is the minimum value physically possible to satisfy the above relationship. It should be noted that P in the case where the number of times the conditioner operates at a high probability is limited, it is desirable that the above relation be satisfied as the smaller of the limit value and the calculated value.

More specifically, in the present example, there are two types of jackpot probabilities, and as an example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the non-stochastic variation game state corresponding to the lowest value of the operation probability is It is "205/65536", and the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state corresponding to the higher value of the operation probability is "410/65536". In this way, it is desirable to set the one with a high operation probability not to exceed 10 times (for example, 2 times) that of the low one, and thereby prevent the winning rate in a short time from significantly increasing. ..

Here, for example, when there is no numerical value on the program such as the condition that the game ball has passed the continuation area within the special winning opening during the unit game (during the round when the jackpot is big), the above N is It is desirable to set it as the maximum value that can continue (for example, 16 which is the maximum number of rounds).

In addition, when the accessory continuous operation device is operating (when it is a big hit), it is necessary to provide a unit game in which the time for opening the special winning opening once is less than 1.8 seconds. Although it is not desirable from the viewpoint of functioning, it is desirable to set the operation probability without including the parameter (big hit probability, number of rounds, etc.) related to the big hit when adopted to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Incidentally, N in the gaming machine having a plurality of special symbol display devices (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is the value of the special symbol display device which is the maximum value. It is desirable to set the maximum value of each of N, R, and S when there are a plurality of values.

Further, in the present example, the total number of times the special electric auditors continuously operate by one operation of the accessory continuous operation device (the number of execution rounds of the jackpot) is all the jackpots (operation of the accessory continuous operation device). ) Is set not to exceed 10 times, and in one big hit (operation of the accessory continuous operation device), only one of the two special winning openings is opened for each unit game (each). Which big winning opening is open in a unit game is predetermined for each big hit). Here, the "total number of times of operation" refers to the total number of times of operation of each special electric accessory, and is specified when the accessory continuous operation device is not operating (for example, during a small hit). Area (for example, V winning opening C22) in the special winning opening is operated, the special electric accessory related to the special winning opening is activated, and the condition device is activated by passing through the specific area in the special winning opening, and When the accessory continuous operation device operates (for example, the configuration of the fourth embodiment is applicable and such a configuration may be referred to as a small hit V), the operation of the special electric accessory is also performed. It is included in the number of operations.

It should be noted that, in the situation where one special electric accessory that is related to the accessory continuous operation device is operating, another special electric accessory operates due to winning of a prize at a predetermined starting port or the other special electric accessory. The operating conditions are set so that the special continuous auditors will not operate when the special prize hole is opened, etc. Has been.

Further, in the present example, the number of continuous operation of special electric auditors (the number of execution rounds) is determined by the type of the pattern (big hit pattern) that has triggered the occurrence of the big hit, but other lottery devices may be provided. .. In that case, it is desirable to provide a predetermined probability as the lottery probability so that the probability does not change each time the game is played. In addition, when determining the number of continuous operation of the special electric auditors, it is carried out immediately when the auditors continuously operating device is activated, and the result of the determination is clearly stated. It is desirable to keep information unchanged.

Further, unlike this example, the continuation condition of the unit game is set, for example, when the continuation condition (the continuation condition of the big hit, the execution condition of the next round) is a passage to a specific area within the special winning opening. In this case, display the maximum number of times the special electric auditor is physically able to continue to operate (eg, four times without fulfilling the continuation condition before executing the maximum number of rounds). Even when the big hit ends by execution of the unit game, it is desirable to display the display relating to the maximum number of unit games, which is 10 times, at the start of the big hit.

In addition, it is desirable that the passage area is set so as not to fluctuate depending on the state of the game, or be invalid or valid (limited to a period during which the winning in the special winning opening itself is valid). When a structure is provided in order to make the variable, it is desirable that a constant operation be continuously performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device so that it cannot be adjusted from the outside. By the way, N in “M×N×R×S≦12” described above may be calculated as the maximum number of times that the special electric auditors product is physically operable continuously. Here, the constantly constant operation means that the movable object continues to operate after the power is turned on, that the movable object stops at a constant cycle, or during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (during the operation of the special electric accessory). Among the number of game balls that have won a prize, the number of game balls included in the game is such that the movable object performs a certain action.

There is no problem that the gaming machine has a structure in which a plurality of specific areas are provided and the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product is determined for each area. Further, N in this case is the maximum number of times that the special electric accessory is physically operable continuously.

<End processing of special electric accessory (big hit)>
In this example, as the operation ending process of the accessory continuous operation device (big hit), when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (big hit) ends, the operation of the special electric auditors and the condition device ends. Therefore, the special electric accessory and the condition device are provided so that they do not operate again due to any operation caused by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is completed. As an example, it is possible to perform a clear process (turn off all flags) of all flags that are turned on by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (when the big hit starts, during the big hit, etc.). It is preferable to execute the clear processing of the RAM area used in the operation (at the time of starting the big hit, during the big hit, etc.).

<Special symbol display device operation processing, etc.>
In this example, the special symbol display device (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, only when the game ball wins the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10)) The symbol of the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured to vary, and is configured not to vary with other conditions. Further, the special symbol display device prohibits the fluctuation of the symbol (set the non-operation of the special electric auditor as a fluctuation start condition) so that the special electric auditor does not operate while the special electric auditor operates. Here, "while the special electric auditors product is operating" means that the special winning opening for the special electric auditors product is opened after the operation trigger has occurred during the operation and non-operation of the auditors product continuous operation device. Etc. from the time of starting (not including the time of opening) to the time when the state ends, after the state where the special winning opening for the special electric auditors has been opened. Win big jackpot, start big jackpot opening related to big hit until big jackpot finish, or win small jackpot, open big jackpot opening related to small jackpot, then finish small win Until then.

Further, in the present example, in order to make it clear that "the operation of the special electric auditors' product has ended", the effect display indicating the end of the operation is executed. Specifically, a command indicating that the operation of the special electric auditors has ended is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and based on the command, the end effect (for example, special game end demo time effect) is given for a predetermined time (for example, 1 s to 10 s).

In this example, two special symbol display devices are provided (two of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20), and one condition device for one special symbol display device or From the time when the combination of symbols that will activate the special electric accessory is displayed to the time when the operation of the condition device or the special electric accessory is completed, the variation for another special symbol display device Although it is configured not to execute, one special symbol display device and another special symbol display device are displayed in parallel (for example, the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be displayed at the same time. In this case, if you adopt 1 type + 1 type parallel type), you can avoid complicated big hits when they are duplicated, or you can hit big hits more than necessary. In order not to improve the performance of, when one symbol is stopped by the symbol that will activate the condition device and special electric auditors, another symbol will activate the condition device and special electric auditors It is configured to be stopped forcibly with a symbol that does not become, and to continue the display as it is, or after the measurement of a predetermined fluctuation time is interrupted, a control that does not stop the symbol is performed. That is, when the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be able to execute a parallel lottery that can be displayed at the same time in a variable manner, while one of the symbols is displayed variably, the other symbol (another symbol) is a big hit. When the symbols or small hit symbols are stopped and displayed, it is preferable to perform control to forcibly stop one symbol with a lost symbol or control to temporarily stop fluctuation of one symbol.

<Number of holding special symbol display device>
In this example, from the time when the game ball wins the starting opening until the operation of the special symbol display device ends, the special electric symbol is operated on the special symbol display device, and the combination of symbols is displayed. From the time when the operation of the special electric auditors is completed or when the combination of symbols that causes the condition device to operate is displayed, the operation of the accessory continuously operating device that is operated by the operation of the condition device. In the case where more than four game balls are won in the starting opening by the time when is finished, after the operation of the special symbol display device, the special electric auditors product or the auditors product continuous operation device is finished, The special symbol display device cannot be continuously operated by winning the game balls other than the first four game balls out of the four or more game balls.

Specifically, the maximum number of reservations on the first main game side is four, the maximum number of reservations on the second main game side is four, and the maximum number of reservations on the first main game side is four. In such a situation, when a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10, a reserve ball on the first main game side does not newly occur (for example, No in step 1304 of FIG. 23). If the game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10 in a situation where the number of reserves on the second main game side is four, which is the upper limit, the second main The game-side reserve ball is configured not to newly occur (for example, in the case of determining No in step 1314 of FIG. 23).

<Variable time setting process for special symbols>
In this example, in order to set a predetermined time from when the game ball wins the starting opening to when the combination of symbols is displayed on the special symbol display device, by entering the starting opening of the game ball The time from the start of the special symbol display device to the end is set. Here, when the combination of symbols is displayed on the special symbol display device means the time when the operation of the special symbol display device is finished, and the predetermined is what is determined as the characteristic of one gaming machine. Say. Specifically, before the start of the variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol, the variation time is determined by using a variation time determination table that is predetermined according to the game state/the number of holdings, and the variation time is set. After the determination, it is configured not to change the determined variation time. In this example, in order to allow the player to clearly confirm that the combination of symbols is displayed, when the symbol is stopped, a movable accessory or another display image (for example, displayed on the effect display device SG) is displayed. The image is controlled so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the design. Also, from the point of view of payout design, the function to change the time until the symbol combination in the operation is displayed after the special symbol display device is activated by operating the variation time reduction button, etc. is not installed. , It may be equipped with a function that changes the fluctuation time, in which case, the shortening function is limited within a certain range so that the influence on the ball output design is reduced (the time range is defined, an operable game It is desirable to determine the state (for example, valid only during the game period when the original variation time is set to be short, such as during electric power support).

<Material of game machine>
Hereinafter, materials that are applicable to the gaming machine of this example and are related to the configuration of the gaming machine will be exemplified.

The material of the game ball that can be used for the game machine in this example is steel and is a uniform material.

In addition, in the present example, the material of the winning opening is made of hard plastic or other material, and is configured so as not to be damaged or deformed due to a drop of the game ball or other impact.

Further, in this example, the material of the shaft of the game nail and the windmill is brass having a Vickers hardness of 150 Hv or more and 230 Hv or less, or a metal having a hardness equivalent to this, which does not easily rust and does not break. Has become. Further, the material of the game nails and the like (excluding the game nail and the shaft of the wind turbine) is made of hard plastic or other material so as not to be damaged or deformed due to a drop of the game ball or other impact.

In addition, in this example, the game board is made of plywood or another material that can fix the winning holes and the game nails, and has hardness and strength that does not easily bend. The surface of the board is smooth and of uniform material. The material of the frame of the game board is configured to have hardness and strength equal to or higher than those of the game board.

Further, in this example, the material of the glass plate or the like (for example, the transparent plate D16) is glass or other material that is transparent (colorless and transparent is referred to as transparent), and the game balls fall and the like. It is configured so that it will not be damaged by the impact of or its shape will not be deformed.

Further, it is preferable that the materials of all parts of the gaming machine are configured so as not to be deteriorated or deformed due to normal changes in temperature or humidity.

<Other supplementary items>
The gaming machine according to this example is designed so as not to change the performance of the gaming machine under conditions other than the changing condition of the function of the gaming machine described above. Specifically, the normal electric role triggered by the result of the game such as the time or power-on or the number of times the symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, the main game symbol display device) (for example, the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol) The function of changing the state of the game, such as the operation probability of the object (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) or the internal structure in the special winning opening, and the performance of the game machine that affects the result of the game. It does not have a function to adjust or change the value. Of course, it is possible to mount them, but it is desirable to mount them in consideration of the possibility of increasing the gambling ability more than necessary due to the complicated ball output design.

In addition, a normal electric auditors object (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors object B11d) has a certain degree of the winning hole (for example, the second main game) among the game balls that have been fired even when the opening or the like occurs. It is desirable that the starting opening B10) is configured so as not to win a prize, and that the game ball that is fired at an arbitrary firing speed and firing strength does not touch the game nail or the like and wins the winning mouth that is open or the like. It is desirable that the game parts are arranged so that the game cannot be performed.

Furthermore, when an accessory (a special electric accessory, an ordinary electric accessory, etc.) is activated, it is not easy to win a game ball to a winning opening other than the winning opening that was opened due to the operation of the accessory. It is desirable that the winning opening that has been opened has a different flow of falling game balls from that when the winning opening has not been opened, and as a result, it is easy to win a prize at any winning opening. In order to prevent this, it is desirable that the structure of the opening/closing device for the other winning holes and electric chu (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is designed. Further, as in this example, the function of opening the entrance of the special winning opening without depending on the operation of the special electric accessory, or a special device (function or role It is desirable not to install a continuous operation device).

In addition, the winning opening and the gate are invalid or valid depending on the game state, and the performance that enables adjustment, the operation of the winning hole related to the accessory changes or is adjusted depending on the game state. It is desirable not to install the performance that makes it possible.

In addition, in the present example, the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is not configured so as to be able to trigger the operation of an accessory other than the special electric accessory (for example, a big hit or a prize is awarded to the first main game starting opening A10). Although a small hit can be executed, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d is not opened), but it is also possible to use it as an actuation trigger for another character. In this case, it is necessary to design in consideration of the gambling property and the ratio of the payout rate related to the accessory.

In the present example, it is configured so that a single winning lottery on the main game side does not result in multiple wins in the big hit, and a fair lottery is provided. Also, except for a device for changing the probability of operation and the probability that a combination of symbols that the ordinary electric accessory will operate will be displayed, the probability of displaying a combination of symbols related to the operation of an accessory {eg, jackpot probability. , Small hit probability, auxiliary game winning probability (probability that the auxiliary game symbol that will cause the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d to be opened, etc., to be stopped) are not changed. ..

≪Other configurations≫
There is no problem even if the following configuration is applied to the gaming machine according to this example. The following configurations are applicable to all the above-mentioned embodiments. Further, only one of the following configurations may be applied, or a plurality of configurations may be combined and applied.

<Equipped with mechanical tulip>
In this example, a mechanical tulip (also referred to as a non-electrical accessory) that expands the entrance of its own winning opening when it wins a predetermined winning opening is not provided, but it is a mechanical type at an appropriate position in the game area. You may mount one or two tulips. In this case, it is desirable that the mechanical tulip is configured to be closed by enlarging the entrance of the winning opening and then closing the winning opening by one or two predetermined winnings. In addition, when the condition that the game ball wins and expands when the mechanical tulip is closed (immediately before closing) is reached, the entrance immediately expands, and the condition that a predetermined number of game balls win and close is set. It is desirable that the opening/closing mechanism is provided integrally with the mechanical tulip so that it will be closed immediately when the achievement is achieved.

It is preferable that the opening/closing mechanism is configured only by a mechanical opening/closing mechanism without using electric power such as a solenoid because part of the opening/closing mechanism does not use electric power, because the burden of processing or the like is increased when duplicate prizes are won. In addition, when the game ball of the maximum winning number and the game ball different from the game ball are won at substantially the same time, the accessory may end the operation once and be operated again. According to the above configuration, although it is a rare case, it is possible to secure the profit of the player by continuously winning the prize. By the way, in this example, since the main game starting mouth electric auditors product (the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product B11d) is provided as the electric auditors product, from the viewpoint of suppressing the total amount of balls thrown out of the auditors product, The total number of maximum prizes related to the mechanism (first-class non-electric accessory) provided on the game board D35 is 4 or less (4 if the mechanical tulip is one-time open, and the mechanical tulip is two-time open. If there are two), it is desirable. In addition, a mechanical tulip (also referred to as a non-electrical accessory) may be provided that expands the entrance of a prize opening different from the predetermined prize opening when a prize is won. Even in such a case, the tulip may be configured in the same manner as the mechanical tulip that expands the entrance of its own winning opening when the winning is made in the predetermined winning opening.

In this example, although not mounted, two or so reserve devices may be provided to retain the game ball in the game area D30 (after stopping the game ball, the game ball is dropped toward the winning opening). Here, “falling toward the winning opening” means dropping the game ball so that the game ball may win the winning opening. Further, when the holding device is provided, it is desirable to place it at a position where there is no possibility that a game ball dropped from the device will win the special winning opening. A holding device having a structure in which a game ball is attracted by a magnet or the like and the game ball is dropped toward the winning opening may be adopted. In this case, it is desirable that the number of magnets and the like be about two.

It should be noted that it is possible for the player to adjust the trigger for the game ball to drop from the holding device, and for example, it is possible to provide a holding release operation unit. Further, in view of the relationship with the number of holding storage devices, it is desirable that the holding device cannot hold more than five game balls. It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of fairness of the game, it is desirable not to mount a device that facilitates the holding of the holding device.

In addition, from the time when the game ball wins the winning opening or passes through the gate, or the combination of symbols is displayed (only when the accessory is to operate) to the time when the operation of the accessory ends. It is also possible to install a device that remembers that the game ball has won the winning opening, has passed through the gate, or that the combination of symbols has been displayed (only when the accessory is to be operated). However, due to the relationship with the holding device and the holding storage device, these may not be mounted in order to prevent complication.

Here, when the operation of the accessory ends, it means that the state ends after the winning opening of the accessory has been opened. In this example, the accessory is configured to be actuated immediately when the actuation trigger occurs. Further, it is possible to store the operation trigger of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device by electromagnetic recording or the like, and to continuously operate the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device by the storage information or the like at any trigger. It is possible to install a structure, but it is not desirable from the viewpoint of guaranteeing fairness of the game. Specifically, despite the fact that the big hit symbols are stopped and displayed (the big hit is won), the big hits are not executed, and then the predetermined conditions such as the case where the fluctuation of the main game symbol is executed a predetermined number of times are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable not to configure the big hit related to the big hit pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 113, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, when an ECO pachinko gaming machine is realized, it is roughly divided into a pachinko gaming machine and an ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko gaming machine (each is attached to and detached from a game hall facility as a separate body). In the pachinko game machine, it is roughly divided into the game board side and the game frame side (the game frame side is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the game hall equipment, and the game board side to the game frame side It is configured to be removable). Hereinafter, first, the configuration mainly relating to the pachinko gaming machine will be sequentially described.

First, the game frame of the Pachinko game machine includes the outer frame 12, the front frame 14, the transparent plate 16, the door 18, the operation unit device 50, the winning information display device 60, and the firing handle 44. First, the outer frame 12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate 16 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 18. The door 18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame 14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). In addition, a speaker 24 is provided on the front surface of the game frame, and a sound effect according to the game state or the like is output.

Here, the operation unit device 50 includes a touch panel type interface 52, a ball number display unit 54, a sub-input button SB, etc., and the touch panel type interface 52 is a touch operation of the player (contact type/non-contact type). It is possible to display and use the game state information of the gaming machine and the game medium information recorded in the IC card (game medium recording medium) inserted in the ECO unit EU described later by a touch operation of one of the molds). It is configured. Further, the touch panel type interface 52 also has an effect display function, and is configured to be able to execute an effect related to a game by a command from the sub-main control unit 2000. Further, the number of possessed balls display unit 54 displays the number of possessed balls {the number of gaming balls that can be used in the game (launched in the game area 30)}. Further, the sub input button SB is a device for operating an effect on the sub main control board 2000 side by an operation of the player.

Next, the prize information display device 60 (the prize ball number display unit 60a and the prize hole type lamp 60b) is provided when the game ball enters the prize hole (or the starting hole) provided on the game board surface. This is a device for displaying the position of a winning opening (or a starting opening) into which a game ball has entered, and the number of prize balls given to the player. Further, on the front surface of the game board, there is provided a prize ball number display unit 28 for displaying the number of prize balls given to the player. The details of the control mode for outputting information to the winning information display device 60 and the prize ball number display unit 28 will be described later.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area 30 partitioned by an outer rail 32 and an inner rail 34. Then, in the game area 30, in addition to a plurality of game nails and mechanisms (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game starting opening 110, a second main game starting opening 210, an auxiliary game starting opening 410, First big winning opening 310, second big winning opening 320, first main game symbol display device 120, second main game symbol display device 220, effect display device 2550, auxiliary game symbol display device 420, center decoration 38 and out mouth 36 are installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game starting port 110 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening 110 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detecting device 111. Here, the first main game starting opening ball entrance detection device 111 is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game starting opening 110, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entering the ball. Generates mouth entrance information.

Next, the second main game starting port 210 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port 210 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device 211 and a second main game starting port electric accessory 212. Here, the 2nd main game starting mouth entrance detection device 211 is a sensor which detects the entrance of the game ball into the 2nd main game starting mouth 210, and the 2nd main game start showing the entrance at the time of entering the ball. Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory 212 is changed to a closed state where the game ball is hard to win the second main game starting port 210 and an open state where the game ball is easier to win than the normal state. Incidentally, in the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting port 210 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting port 110 side. You may. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game starting port 110 and the second main game starting port 210 are arranged vertically adjacent to each other, but not limited to this, the first main game starting port. 110 and the second main game starting port 210 may be provided separately.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port 410 includes an auxiliary game starting port entrance detection device 411. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device 411 is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting entrance 410, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entering the ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port 410 serves as a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory 212 of the second main game starting port 210. The position of the auxiliary game starting port 410 is merely an example.

Next, above the outlet 36, a first big winning opening 310 and a second big winning opening 320 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the right or left side of the game area 30 (based on the center of the game area). Is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening 310 and the second special winning opening 320 are arranged before reaching the outlet 36.

Next, the first big winning opening 310 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol, is in a horizontal rectangular shape, and has an outlet. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above 36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening 310, the first special winning opening winning detection device 311 for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first special winning opening electric auditors 312 (and the first big winning Mouth solenoid 312a). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device 311 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening 310, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates the entry when entering. To generate. The first special winning opening electric auditors product 312 changes the first special winning opening 310 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult to win the first special winning opening 310 and an open state in which the game balls are easy to win (the first winning hole 310). (1) The special winning opening solenoid 312a is excited to be changed). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state where it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state where it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second special winning opening 320 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the opening 36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening 320 is a second special winning opening winning detection device 321 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric role object 322 (and the second big winning). Mouth solenoid 322a). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device 322 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening 320, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. The game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 320 are configured to be detected by the second special winning opening detection device 321. Next, the second special winning opening electric part 322 opens the second special winning opening 320 in the normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state in which the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening 320. It is made variable (the distribution winning opening solenoid 322a is excited and made variable). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state where it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state where it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device 120 (second main game symbol display device 220) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device 120 (second main game symbol display device 220), the first main game symbol display unit 121 (second main game symbol display unit 221), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display unit 122 (second main game symbol holding display unit 222). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display unit 122 (second main game symbol reservation display unit 222) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit 121 (second main game symbol display unit 221) is composed of, for example, 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 types of numbers and "-" that is missing (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

Incidentally, the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, so in the fifth embodiment, the first main game symbol display device 120 (second main game symbol display device 220). The size of) is set so that it is inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), the effect display device A liquid crystal display such as 2550 may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device 2550 is a device for displaying an effect image including a decorative pattern that fluctuates/stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol/second main game symbol. Although the effect display device 2550 is composed of a liquid crystal display in the fifth embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device 420 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device 420 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit 421 and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit 422. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section 422 is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding of the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations not executed).

Next, the center decoration 38 is installed around the effect display device 2550, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of the effect display device 2550, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp 26 is provided in the game area 30 or an area other than the game area 30 and plays a role of blinking or the like.

Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 114. First, as described above, the fifth embodiment is roughly divided into a pachinko game machine and an ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko game machine (each can be attached to and detached from a game hall facility as a separate body). In the pachinko game machine, it is roughly divided into a game board side and a game frame side (the game frame side is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the game hall equipment, and the game board side is attachable to and detachable from the game frame side). Configured to be possible). Hereinafter, each of the roughly divided schematic configurations and the electrical connection modes between the substrates and the devices will be outlined.

<Pachinko machine/game board side>
The pachinko gaming machine (game board side) according to the fifth embodiment, the main control board A for controlling the progress of the game, and the fluctuation/stop of the decorative design based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board A. Sub-control board B (in this example, sub-main control unit 2000 and sub-sub-control) that controls execution of various effects on effect display device 2550, sound from speaker 24, lighting of game effect lamp 26, error notification, etc. The part 2500 is arranged on one board), and game peripherals (first main game peripheral 100, second main game peripheral 200, first/second main game shared peripheral 300, auxiliary game) The peripheral device 400) and the prize ball number display device 28 are mainly configured. The speaker 24 and the game effect lamp 26 may be provided on the pachinko game machine (game machine frame side). Here, the sub-control board B controls various effects on the effect display device 2550 such as variation/stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker 24, lighting of the game effect lamp 26, and error notification. And two control units of the sub-sub-control unit 2500 that executes display processing such as variable display/stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 2550, and hold display and notice display. The main control board A, the sub-main control unit 2000, and the sub-sub control unit 2500 have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and data that the CPU handles (during a game). A RAM for temporarily storing various kinds of generated data, a computer program read from the ROM, etc. is installed.

First, the main control board A is a game peripheral device (first main game peripheral device 100, second main game peripheral device 200, first and second main game shared peripheral device 300, auxiliary game peripheral device 400), number of prize balls The display device 28, the information display LED (not shown), etc. are electrically connected to the input/output devices essential for the progress of the game, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signals from the respective input/output devices. It is configured to output information regarding the progress of the game to each input/output device as needed. Further, the main control board A is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board 3000 and the sub control board B (sub-main control section 2000/sub-sub control section 2500), and based on the progress of the game, the prize-ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board 3000, and information (commands) related to the progress state of production/game, etc. can be transmitted to the sub control board B.

Next, the sub-control board B is connected to the effect display device 2550 for displaying a decorative pattern or the like, the speaker 24, the game effect lamp 26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects as described above. .. In the fifth embodiment, the sub-control board B has a sub-main control section 2000 and a sub-sub-control section 2500, and the sub-main control section 2000 controls the sound output from the speaker 24 and the game effect (illumination). The lighting control of the lamp 26 and the determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device 2550 are performed, and the sub-sub controller 2500 performs display control on the effect display device (substantial display control). Has been done. When the touch panel interface 52 is also connected, various effects controlled by the sub-control board B can be displayed on the touch panel interface 52. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the sub-main control unit 2000 and the sub-sub-control unit 2500 are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board B, but the configuration is not limited to this (as a separate board. Although it may be configured, there is an advantage in that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by configuring it as an integrated unit). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, by executing voice control by the sub-sub control unit 2500 (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted).

<Pachinko machine/game frame side>
The pachinko gaming machine (game frame side) according to the fifth embodiment is a payout control that controls the launching of game balls and the awarding of prize balls to a player (in the fifth embodiment, addition and subtraction of holding ball data). The substrate 3000, the power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine, the operation unit device 50 described above, and the launch control substrate 40 (and the launch device 42 and the launch detection sensor 43) that is the launch mechanism of the game ball. ), a prize ball permission sensor KS (which will be described later in detail, a sensor capable of detecting a ball entering a ball entrance for which a prize ball is to be paid out), and the prize information display device 60 described above. It is configured as the subject. The payout control board 3000 and the operation unit device 50 include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU in advance, and data that the CPU handles (various data generated during a game and ROM. A RAM for temporarily storing a computer program or the like read from the. In this example, the power supply unit E supplies power to the payout control board 3000 and the sub control board B, and also supplies power to the main control board A via the payout control board 3000. Has been done.

Here, the prize ball payout control board 3000 includes a launch control board 40, which is a control circuit of the launching device 42, and a prize ball permission sensor KS (details will be described later, but to a ball entrance that is a target of prize ball payout). Connected to the winning information display device 60 and the operation unit device 50. In addition, the main control in the pachinko game machine (game board side) according to the fifth embodiment. The board A and an ECO unit EU described later are also connected. Then, as will be described later, information from the main control board A and the ECO unit EU (mainly information to be added by the player's ball), the firing detection sensor 43 (mainly as a subtraction target of the player's ball). The operation (addition/subtraction, etc.) of the holding ball relating to the game is controlled on the basis of the information) and the display of the holding ball information and the launch device 42 (the launch handle, the launch motor, It is configured to control the operation of a ball feeding device or the like).

Here, in this example, the sub-main control unit 2000 (sub-game control unit 2000) is a sub-sub-control unit 2500 (production display unit 2500) that executes image production, the operation unit device 50, various game effect lamps 26 (for example, It is also electrically connected to a side lamp), a speaker 24 and the like. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control board 3000 is a launch control board 40 (and a launcher 42 for launching a game ball) that controls the launch of a game ball, a prize ball permission sensor KS for permitting a prize ball, a request for lending a game ball, etc. Is electrically connected to the ECO unit EU for receiving and transmitting to the prize ball payout control substrate 3000, and the operation unit device 50 for displaying the number of balls held and operating the IC card information.

Also, the prize ball payout control board 3000, a transmission/reception control means 3100 for transmitting and receiving information relating to prize balls, a payout control means 3300 responsible for processing relating to prize ball payout, and a firing controlling processing relating to launch of game balls. It has a control means 3400 and an initial processing control means 3500 at the time of power failure/power recovery at the time of power failure on the prize ball payout control board 3000 side.

Here, the transmission/reception control unit 3100 has a reception control unit 3110 that controls the reception of information and a transmission control unit 3120 that controls the transmission of information. Further, the reception control means 3110 includes a main side reception information temporary storage means 3111 for temporarily storing information received from the main control board A and an ECO unit side reception information for temporarily storing information received from the ECO unit EU. And a temporary storage unit 3112.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information related to prize balls, and the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 is provided from the main control board A. Each prize counter (first main game starting mouth prize counter 3311a, second main game starting mouth prize counter 3311b, first big prize mouth prize counter 3311c, second big) for counting the number of prizes received to each prize hole Winning prize winning counter 3311d, general winning prize winning counter 3311e), and a ball number counter 3312 for counting the number of balls currently held by the player (the number of game media that can be used in the game), and a game frame at this time. It further has an enclosed game sphere number counter 3313 for counting the number of game spheres (enclosed game spheres) existing inside.

Next, the firing control means 3400 has a firing control related information temporary storage means 3410 for temporarily storing information relating to the firing control of the game ball.

Next, the power-off/power-off recovery initial process control means 3500 has a power-off information temporary storage means 3510 for temporarily storing (backing up) the power-off information.

<ECO unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is connected to the prize ball payout control board 3000 and the operation unit device 50, and an IC card (membership information) in which personal game state information of the player (in particular, information on the number of game media possessed) is recorded. Card, general card), the game state information recorded in the IC card can be displayed on the operation unit device 50, and the game state information can be used by an operation on the operation unit device 50. In addition, it is configured to perform lending control and management control for lending such as electronic money. In addition, the ECO unit EU is connected to the hall computer H via a network and configured to output game-related information, and the authentication processing of the game frame and the game board is also performed via the ECO unit EU. The ECO unit EU is supplied with power from a power source (power supply device E2) different from that of the gaming machine, and is also connected to the operation unit device 50. For the operation unit device 50, the ECO unit EU is connected to the ECO unit EU. It is configured to be supplied with power.

In the fifth embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 115, the main control board A and the prize-ball payout control board 3000 are configured to be capable of two-way communication, while the main control board A and the sub-control board. The main control unit 2000 is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board A to the sub-main control unit 2000 (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). In addition, the prize-ball payout control board 3000, the operation unit device 50, and the ECO unit EU are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the prize-ball payout control substrate 3000 is unidirectionally communicated to the operation unit device 50. The communication method between the control boards (between the control devices) is merely an example}.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a processing image between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board (in particular, addition/subtraction/transfer processing of the number of balls held) in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. .. In the figure, the prize-ball payout control board 3000 always holds the number-of-balls possessed ball information {information relating to the number of game balls that can be used in the game (launched in the game area 30)}. And the number-of-balls-holding display unit 54 repeatedly updates the number of balls-held display. Moreover, the case where no error occurs in each process is illustrated.

<Number of balls to be added processing>
First, the ball lending process in the upper part of the figure will be described as an example of the number-of-balls addition process. First, when the ball lending operation is performed on the touch panel interface 52 in (1), the "ball lending operation information" of (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 52 to the ECO unit EU. .. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "ball lending operation information" executes the balance consumption of the IC card in the ball lending control process of (3), and issues the "ball possession addition request" of (4). It is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize-ball payout control board 3000 that has received the "required number-of-balls-added request", in the number-of-balls-added process of (5), adds the number of game media for the remaining balance to the current number of balls-held. to add. When the process of (5) is completed, the prize ball payout control substrate 3000 transmits the “addition completion information” of (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “addition completion information” transmits (7) “ball lending completion display instruction” to the touch panel type interface 52. Next, the touch panel type interface 52 that has received the “ball lending completion display instruction” executes the ball lending completion display of (8), and the ball lending process is completed.

<Number of balls held>
Next, as an example of the number-of-balls subtraction process, a ball consumption process (particularly, a process related to a wagon service) in the middle part of the figure will be described. First, when the wagon service utilization operation is performed on the touch panel interface 52 in (1), the “ball consumption operation information” of (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 52 to the ECO unit EU. It Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “ball consumption operation information” transmits the “reduction request for the number of balls to be held” of (3) to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 that has received the "reduction request for the number of possessed balls" is a game for consumption by the wagon service from the current number of possessed balls in the possession number subtraction processing of (4). Subtract the number of media. When the process of (4) is completed, the prize ball payout control substrate 3000 transmits the “subtraction completion information” of (5) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “subtraction completion information” transmits the “sphere consumption completion display instruction” of (6) to the touch panel interface 52. Next, the touch panel type interface 52 that has received the “sphere consumption completion display instruction” executes the wagon service utilization completion display of (7), and the sphere consumption processing ends.

<Transfer processing of number of balls held>
Next, as an example of the number-of-balls transfer process, the IC card return process in the lower part of the figure will be described. First, when the return operation (IC card return operation) is performed on the touch panel interface 52 in (1), the “return operation information” of (2) is sent from the touch panel interface 52 to the ECO unit EU. Sent. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “return operation information” transmits the “return request for the number of owned balls” of (3) to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 that has received the “return request for number of balls held” stops the game (for example, stops the firing of the game balls) in the ball transfer process of (4), and ( In the process of transferring the number of possessed balls in 5), confirm that there is no gaming ball (floating ball) flowing down on the game board surface (for example, until the counter value of the enclosed gaming ball counter 3313 reaches the initial value). (Stand by), (6) “ball number information” is transmitted to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “ball information” has temporarily stored the number of balls that it has, based on the received information, in the return control process of (7), "Several clear request" is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 that has received the “required number of balls to be held” clears the current number of balls to be held (zero clear) in the number of balls transferred process of (9), and returns to (10). The “ball number clear completion information” is transmitted to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU which has received the “ball possession number clear completion information”, in the return control process of (11), sets the number of possessed balls temporarily stored in the process of (7) to the ECO unit. Add to the number of coins stored in the IC card inserted in. Next, in the return control process of (12), the ECO unit EU ejects (returns) the IC card from the IC card return port, and outputs the “return completion display instruction” of (13) to the touch panel interface 52. To send. Next, the touch panel interface 52 that has received the "return completion display instruction" executes the return completion display of (14), and the IC card return process between the touch panel interface 52 and the ECO unit EU is completed. .. When the process of (12) is completed, the ECO unit EU transmits the “return completion information” of (15) to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 that has received the "return completion information" releases the game stop executed in the process of (4) and returns to the playable state of (16), and the ECO unit. The IC card return process between the EU-prize ball payout control board 3000 is completed.

<Authentication process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a game machine authentication process in the game machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Here, the gaming machine authentication processing is processing for determining whether or not the gaming machine is an authorized gaming machine when the gaming machine is powered on. In addition, in the same figure, the case where it is authenticated as an authorized gaming machine is illustrated.

First, when the game machine is powered on, the main control board A encrypts the unique main control board ID stored in the CPU of the main control board A in the authentication control process of (1), The main control board ID” is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board 3000. When the power is turned on, the prize-ball payout control board 3000 encrypts and receives the unique payout control board ID stored in the CPU of the prize-ball payout control board 3000 in the authentication control process (3). ) And the “main control board ID” of (4), the “main control board ID/payout control board ID” is transmitted to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU which has received the "main control board ID/payout control board ID", based on the received information, the "main control board ID/payout control board ID" of (5) Send to. Next, in the processing of (6), the key management center decrypts the received encrypted IDs (main control board ID/payout control board ID) and, at (7), "delivery information request". Is sent to the gaming machine management center. Next, the gaming machine management center that has received the "delivery information request" displays the delivery information of the proper main control board and payout control board registered in the gaming machine management center in the processing of (8). It is confirmed, encrypted, and sent to the key management center as "delivery information" of (9). Next, the key management center that has received the "delivery information" decrypts the received delivery information in the processing of (10). Next, in the processing of (11), the key management center collates (authenticates) the main control board ID and the payout control board ID received from the gaming machine with the delivery information received from the gaming machine management center. Next, the key management center encrypts the authentication result in the process of (12) and sends it to the ECO unit EU as the “authentication result” of (13). Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “authentication result” decrypts the received encrypted authentication result in the processing of (14). Next, when the decrypted authentication result indicates successful authentication, the ECO unit EU transmits (15) “game start permission” to the prize ball payout control substrate 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 having received the “game start permission” transmits (16) “game start permission” to the main control board A. Here, the main control board A and the prize-ball payout control board 3000 that have received the “game start permission” are authenticated as legitimate game machines, and the game can be started. Further, when the authentication result is the authentication failure, the "game start permission" is not transmitted from the ECO unit EU, and the main control board A and the prize ball payout control board 3000 cannot start the game. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board ID and the payout control board ID in (4) and (5) may be transmitted separately, or may be transmitted to the key management center. Delivery information may be constantly transmitted to and received from the gaming machine management center. Further, when setting values are set in the gaming machine (for details, refer to the sixth embodiment), the setting value information is transmitted in time with the transmission of “main control board ID/payout control board ID” in (4). You may do it. The set value may be recognized based on the information from the main control board, or may be recognized and transmitted by the prize ball payout control board 3000 based on the information of the device having the function of setting the set value. Good.

<About the circulation mechanism of the game ball>
Next, the circulation of the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to play a game by circulating a fixed number (for example, 100 balls) of the gaming balls inside the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, the gaming balls to be circulated are enclosed gaming balls. It may be called), and the game progress is configured without supplying the game ball from outside the game machine and discharging (paying) the game ball outside the game machine.

First, the enclosed game ball is stored in the enclosed game ball tank in the enclosed game ball number management means, and the enclosed game ball in the enclosed game ball tank is sent to the launcher 42 by the ball feed solenoid mechanism. The launch control device 42 launches a game ball toward the game area 30 on the game board side. Next, the game ball shot in the game area 30 is one of the game entrances, which is a peripheral device (for example, the first main game starting opening 110, the second main game starting opening 210, the first big winning opening 310). , Second big winning opening 320, general winning opening, out opening 36, etc.) (first main game starting opening entrance detecting device 111, second main game starting entrance detecting device 211, first large) The winning opening winning detection device 311, the second big winning opening winning detection device 321, the general winning opening detection device detects a ball), and flows from the game board side to the game frame side. The inflowing enclosed game balls are prize ball permission sensors KS (for example, first main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS, second main game start mouth prize ball) corresponding to the ball entrance provided in the game area 30. Permission sensor 210KS, first big prize mouth prize ball permission sensor 310KS, second big prize mouth prize ball permission sensor 320KS, general prize mouth prize ball permission sensor, etc.) and an out ball detection sensor, and the enclosed game ball tank It is stored again. Then, in a situation where the enclosed game balls are circulating in the pachinko game machine in this manner, the game balls are shot toward the game area 30 on the game board side, or the ball entrance for which prize balls are paid out ( For example, when the player enters the first main game starting opening 110, the second main game starting opening 210, the first big winning opening 310, the second big winning opening 320, the general winning opening, etc.) By the substrate 3000, the prize balls are given to the player (in the fifth embodiment, addition and subtraction of ball data is carried out).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123, a control process executed on the prize ball payout control substrate 3000 side will be described. First, FIG. 118 is a main flowchart of the prize ball payout control substrate 3000 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Here, the prize ball payout control board side main processing of FIG. 7G is processing in the prize ball payout control board 3000 which is executed after resetting when the power of the game machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 3100, the prize ball payout control board 3000 executes an initial process at the time of power recovery, which will be described later. After that, the process shifts to a loop process of repeatedly executing (h) which is a repetitive process routine of the prize ball payout control substrate 3000. Here, when (h) is executed, first, in step 3200, the prize-ball payout control board 3000 executes a later-described enclosed game ball number management process, as shown in the process of FIG. .. Next, in step 3300, the prize-ball payout control board 3000 executes the number-of-balls-owned-ball management process described later. Next, in step 3400, the prize ball payout control board 3000 executes a game ball launch control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the prize ball payout control board 3000 transmits/receives information related to prize balls to/from the prize ball related information transmission/reception control processing (main control board A, launch control board 40, ECO unit EU, etc.). Yes) is executed, and this repetitive processing routine is ended.

As described above, the prize-ball payout control board 3000 adopts a mode in which after the reset, the prize-ball payout control board side routine (S3200 to S3500) is looped. In addition, the process of FIG. 9I is an NMI interrupt process of the prize ball payout control board 3000, and is a process flow that is forcibly executed when the power from the power supply unit E drops to a predetermined level. That is, when the NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the prize ball payout control board 3000, in step 3600, the prize ball payout control board 3000 executes the power interruption process described later, and shifts to the power interruption waiting loop.

Next, FIG. 119 is a flow chart of initial processing at the time of power failure recovery, which is related to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. 118. First, in step 3102, the power failure/recovery from power failure initial process control means 3500 refers to the flag area of the power failure information temporary storage means 3510 to determine whether or not the payout control side power failure flag is on. judge. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the power-on/power-off recovery initial process control means 3500 turns off the payout control side power failure flag in the flag area of the power failure information temporary storage means 3510. To do. Next, in step 3106, the power-on/power-off recovery initial process control means 3500, based on the information backed up at the time of power failure, each winning counter (eg, the first main game start mouth winning counter 3311a, the second main). It restores the counter values of the game start mouth prize counter 3311b, the first big prize mouth prize counter 3311c, the second big prize mouth prize counter 3311d, and the general prize mouth prize counter 3311e. Next, at step 3108, the power failure/recovery from power failure initial processing control means 3500 restores the count value of the ball number counter 3312 based on the information backed up at the time of power failure. Next, at step 3110, the power-on/power-off return initial processing control means 3500 counts the number of game balls in the enclosed game ball tank to the initial value in the enclosed game ball number counter 3313 (for example, 100, which is 100). If it is possible, the count result may be used as an initial value). Next, in step 3112, the power-on/power-off recovery initial process control means 3500, based on the information backed up at the time of power failure, other information necessary for the game (for example, various flag information, received commands, untransmitted). Command, etc.). Next, at step 3114, the power-off/power-off recovery initial processing control means 3500 causes the game stop flag (enclosed game ball number abnormal flag/illegal prize) in the flag area of the firing control related information temporary storage means 3410. The sphere information flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3102, the processing of steps 3104 to 3114 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 3116. Although not shown in this example, when resetting the initial value to the enclosed game ball number counter 3313, the waiting time until the floating ball (the game ball existing in the game area 30) returns to the game frame side is set. It may be provided.

Next, in step 3116, the power-on/power-off recovery initial process control means 3500 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111, and receives the basic prize ball number information command from the main control board A side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3116, in step 3118, the power-on/power-off recovery initial process control means 3500 pays out the basic prize ball number information of each winning opening based on the received basic prize ball number information command. The related information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage unit 3310, and the calling source of this subroutine is restored. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, in other words, when the reception of the basic prize ball number information command has failed, in step 3120, the power-on/power-off recovery initial processing control means 3500 causes the main control board A to On the other hand, a request to transmit a setting command (when the basic control board A transmits a basic prize ball number information command in response to the setting command transmission request, it is received and stored by the prize ball related information transmission/reception control process of step 3500). Then, the process returns to the caller of this subroutine and shifts to the prize ball payout control board side routine of (h).

Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the enclosed game sphere number management process according to the subroutine of step 3200 in FIG. 118. First, in step 3202, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the launch control related information temporary storage unit 3400 (or based on the launch signal from the launch detection sensor 43) to determine whether or not a game ball has been launched. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 (decrement) from the counter value of the enclosed game ball number counter 3313, and proceeds to step 3206. On the other hand, if No in step 3202, the process of step 3204 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 3206.

Next, in step 3206, the payout control means 3300 refers to the information from the prize ball permission sensors KS and the out ball detection sensor to determine whether or not a discharged ball has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the payout control means 3300 increments the counter value of the enclosed game ball number counter 3313 by 1, and moves to step 3210. On the other hand, if No in step 3206, the process of step 3208 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 3210.

Next, in step 3210, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value of the enclosed game ball number counter 3313 is within a proper range (for example, 51 to 100). Here, the enclosed game ball number counter 3313 is a counter that counts the number of enclosed game balls existing on the gaming machine frame side, and 100 (the number of game balls enclosed in this gaming machine) is set as an initial value. It is set. This game machine does not supply game balls from outside the game machine or discharge game balls outside the game machine. The error can be detected.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 3210, the process returns to the calling source of this subroutine. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in steps 3212 and 3214, the payout control means 3300 determines that the number of game balls in the gaming machine is abnormal, and is in the flag area of the firing control related information temporary storage means 3410. , The enclosed game ball number abnormality flag is turned on (the game will be stopped), error notification is executed, and the process returns to the calling source of this subroutine.

Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the number-of-balls-owned-ball management process related to the subroutine of step 3300 in FIG. 118. First, in step 3302, the payout control means 3300 refers to the ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means 3112, and holds ball operation information from the ECO unit EU (ball lending operation on the touch panel type interface 52, coin replay operation). , Ball sharing operation, wagon service use operation, IC card return operation, etc.) is received. If Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the payout control unit 3300 adds (or subtracts, clears) the counter value of the number of held balls counter 3312 based on the received held ball operation information, and proceeds to step 3306. .. On the other hand, if No in step 3302, the process of step 3304 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 3306.

Next, in step 3306, the payout control means 3300 refers to the launch control-related information temporary storage means 3400 (or based on the launch signal from the launch detection sensor 43) to determine whether or not the game ball has been launched. judge. If Yes in step 3306, in step 3308, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 (decrement) from the count value of the number-of-balls counter 3312, and proceeds to step 3310. On the other hand, if No in step 3306, the process of step 3308 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 3310.

Next, in step 3310, the payout control means 3300 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111 and determines whether or not a winning information command is received from the main control board A side. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the payout control means 3300 acquires information relating to the winning hole type and the number of prize balls based on the received winning information command. Next, in step 3314, the payout control unit 3300 determines whether or not the obtained winning hole type and the number of prize balls match the basic prize ball number information temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage unit 3310. judge. If Yes in step 3314, in step 3316, the payout control unit 3300 increments the winning counter value of the winning opening for which the determination result matches by 1 (increment), and proceeds to step 3330. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3314, in steps 3318 and 3320, the payout control means 3300 determines that the prize information command is illegal, and is in the flag area of the firing control related information temporary storage means 3410. , The illegal prize information flag is turned on (the game is stopped), error notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step 3330. In addition, in the case of No in step 3310, the process of steps 3312 to 3320 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 3330.

Next, in step 3330, the payout control means 3300 confirms the information from the prize ball permission sensors KS and determines whether or not any one of the prize ball permission sensors has detected entry. In the case of Yes in step 3330, in step 3332, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout process related information temporary storage unit 3310, and the prize counter value corresponding to the prize ball permission sensor that detected the game is 1 or more. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 3332, in step 3334, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the corresponding winning counter. Next, in step 3336, the payout control means 3300 holds the number of prize balls corresponding to the sensor that detected the entry based on the basic prize number information temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310. It is added to the counter value of the sphere counter 3312. Next, in step 3338, the payout control means 3300 sets a prize ball payout completion command to the main control board A side (transmitted to the main control board A side by the prize ball related information transmission/reception control processing of step 3500). To do. Next, in step 3340, the payout control means 3300 displays the prize hole type and the number of prize balls for the prize ball on the prize information display device 60, and proceeds to step 3342. Even if No in step 3330 or step 3332, the process moves to step 3342.

Next, in step 3342, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value of the ball-holding counter 3312, displays the current ball-holding number on the ball-holding number display unit 54, and makes the caller of this subroutine. Return.

Here, the figure (image diagram of the winning counter) is a diagram showing a processing image from the receipt of the winning information command from the main control board A side to the awarding of a prize ball (particularly, the first main game). The case where there is a ball entering the starting port 110 is illustrated). First, when the winning information command relating to the ball entering the first main game starting port 110 is received from the main control board A side, 1 is added to the counter value of the first main game starting port winning counter 3311a. At the stage, prize ball payout (addition processing) does not occur. Next, the first main game starting mouth prize ball permitting sensor 110KS on the prize ball payout control board 3000 side detects a ball entering, thereby subtracting 1 from the counter value of the first main game starting mouth winning counter 3111a, "3", which is the number of prize balls of the one main game starting port 110, is added as a prize ball to the counter value of the number-of-balls counter 3312.

Further, the same figure (example of winning information display) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the winning information display device 60 in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. In the initial state (the state in which no prize is detected), the number of prize balls display portion 60a and the prize hole type lamp 60b are not displayed. And the winning a prize type will be displayed. For example, when a prize ball related to a ball entering the first main game starting opening 110 is awarded, a prize opening type lamp 60b corresponding to a winning in the first main game starting opening 110 (in the present example, the leftmost one). The lamp which is positioned) lights up, and the prize ball number display portion 60a displays "+3" as the prize ball number display. When a plurality of prizes are detected within a short period of time, the player can confirm the display contents of the prize hole type and the number of prize balls in the order in which the prizes are detected (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is desirable to continue displaying. Further, this example is merely an example, and the display means, the display method, the number of prize balls, etc. are not limited thereto. May be configured to be notified. Further, by configuring so that a plurality of winning information can be displayed at the same time, it is possible to display more accurately even when there are a plurality of winnings within a short time.

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the game ball launching control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 118. First, in step 3502, the launch control means 3400 refers to the flag area of the launch control related information temporary storage means 3410, and determines whether or not the game stop flag (enclosed game ball number abnormality flag/unauthorized prize ball information flag) is off. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the firing control means 3400 refers to the ball number counter 3312 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 3504, in step 3506, the firing control unit 3400 refers to the information from the firing control board 40 and determines whether or not there is an input of the handle 44 (rotation operation by the player). If Yes in step 3506, in step 3508 the firing control unit 3400 determines the firing strength of the game ball based on the handle input (for example, the larger the displacement of the handle 44 by the player's operation, the stronger the firing strength). And). Next, in step 3510, the launch control means 3400 drives the game ball launch solenoid to launch the game ball into the game area 30, and returns to the caller of this subroutine. Even if No in steps 3502 to 3506, the process returns to the calling source of this subroutine.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure, which is related to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 118. First, in step 3602, at the time of power failure/power failure recovery initial processing control means 3500, each winning counter (eg, the first main game starting mouth winning counter 3311a, the second main game starting mouth winning counter 3311b, the first large). The winning prize winning counter 3311c, the second big winning prize winning counter 3311d, and the general winning prize winning counter 3311e) are temporarily stored (backed up) in the power interruption information temporary storage means 3510. Next, in step 3604, the power failure/recovery from power failure initial processing control means 3500 temporarily stores (backs up) the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 in the power failure information temporary storage means 3510. Next, in step 3606, the power failure/recovery from power failure initial process control means 3500 turns on the payout control side power failure flag in the flag area of the power failure information temporary storage means 3510. Next, in step 3608, the power-off/power-off recovery initial processing control means 3500 provides information necessary for other games (for example, various flag information, received commands, untransmitted commands, etc.) during power failure. Temporary storage (backup) in the temporary storage means 3510. Next, at step 3610, the power failure/recovery from power failure initial processing control means 3500 supplies power to the backup area, returns to the calling source of this subroutine, and shifts to the power failure waiting loop.

With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the ball entrance detection device (for example, the first ball entrance detection device 111, the second ball entrance detection device 211) provided on the game board side. , A first winning detection device 311, a second winning detection device 321, etc.) and prize ball permission sensors KS (for example, a first main game starting mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS, a second main) provided on the game frame side. The game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 210KS, the first big prize mouth prize ball permission sensor 310KS, the second big prize mouth prize ball permission sensor 320KS, the general prize mouth prize ball permission sensor, etc.) The winning information (for example, information relating to the winning hole type and the number of prize balls) transmitted from the main control board A side matches the basic prize ball number information stored in the prize ball payout control board 3000 side. Only in this case, since the player is provided with the prize ball, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being obtained by an illegal act. Also, by providing the prize ball permission sensors KS on the game frame side, it is possible to reduce the cost of the game board (the model change of the pachinko game machine is mainly performed by changing only the game board, and the game frame is Often used repeatedly). In addition, for a prize in which a prize sphere is given to a player, a predetermined display unit (for example, the prize information display device 60) is configured to display the prize hole type and the number of prize spheres. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is easy for the player to understand which winning hole has been won and how many winning balls have been obtained.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning information display device 60 in the fifth embodiment is provided in the game frame, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other first main game symbol display device 120 (or second main game symbol display device) or the like. It may be provided on the same substrate as the display device (in such a configuration, there are effects such as cost reduction and improved visibility). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the main control device A transmits prize information (and basic prize ball number information) to the prize ball payout control board 3000, and determines whether or not the prize information is normal. Although it is configured to make the determination on the payout control substrate 3000 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine an abnormality in the winning information, for example, by a configuration opposite to that of the fifth embodiment. The control board 3000 may transmit winning information (and basic prize ball number information) to the main control device A, and the main control board A side may determine whether or not the winning information is normal. }. Further, for example, the number of prize balls may be displayed in full-color 7-segment, and the type of prize hole and the position of the prize hole may be notified by the color in which the number of prize balls is displayed. Also, the display of the winning information is changed according to the easiness of entry of the winning opening (for example, in the case of winning the winning opening that is easy to enter, it is displayed in white, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening In the case of winning a prize, a red color is displayed together with the sound effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to estimate the expected degree of profit of the gaming machine with respect to the player, by the display frequency that is different from usual.

(Sixth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, only one kind of setting value corresponding to the winning probability or the like of the main game symbol of the gaming machine is provided, but a plurality of such setting values may be provided. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of such settings are provided will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Note that the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers in each individual embodiment, It is indicated that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the present embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, and thus each is a process that functions independently. ).

First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values for making the winning/probability of winning or the like of the main game symbol different, so that a setting changing means includes a key switch and a setting changing button for changing the setting. It is provided. Hereinafter, the setting change device in this example will be described by using the setting change key switch and the setting change button, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a general input device such as a DIP switch may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to use the key for setting change from the viewpoint that only a specific administrator can change the setting, but in addition to this, authentication with high security performance such as password input, biometric authentication, etc. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed using the system.

Here, in the present example, the setting change key switch can be switched between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction. ing. In this example, when the power switch is turned on (under a predetermined condition), if the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state, the operation (for example, pressing) by the setting change button may be effective, while When the key switch for change is in the OFF state, the operation (for example, pressing) by the setting change button is invalid. Further, as the predetermined condition for making the setting change button effective, there can be mentioned an opening signal of the door D18 inputted to the main control board M. With this configuration, there are two situations in which setting change can be executed: "the key switch for setting change is in the ON state" and "the door D18 is in the open state". Since the condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress a state in which the key switch for setting change is turned on with the door D18 closed (that is, an illegal setting change).

In the following, the processing relating to the setting change when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 124a.

First, FIG. 124a is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the sixth embodiment. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 1001 (sixth), the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch has been operated. If YES in step 1001 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1002. If NO in step 1001 (sixth) (when the setting key switch has been operated), the main control board M executes the process of step 1003 (sixth) (setting change process described later), The processing moves to 1004.

In this example, the gaming machine has a plurality of set values, but the correspondence between the operation mode of the setting change button and the change in the set value of the gaming machine can be freely designed as appropriate. For example, when the number of set values in this example is 6 (the set value is any of “1” to “6”) and the set value at power-on is “6”, the setting change button is set to 1 According to the number of times the setting change button is operated, the setting value becomes “5” when the setting operation button is operated three times, and the setting value becomes “3” when the setting change button is operated three times. The configuration may be such that the setting value is moved down to "1" (similarly, the setting value may be sequentially increased from "1" to "6" according to the number of times the setting change button is operated). .. Further, in this case, when the setting value is "1" and the setting change button is operated once, the setting value becomes "6". When the button is operated, the set value may be changed to the upper limit value. Similarly, the configuration is such that the set value is incremented according to the number of times the setting change button is operated, and when the setting change button is operated with the set value being the upper limit value (“6” in this example), The set value may be changed to the lower limit value (“1” in this example). Alternatively, the set value may be sequentially changed by long-pressing the operation button.

The number of set values can be freely designed, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or the like. The smaller the number of set values (for example, when the number of set values is 2 or 3), the more interesting the game based on having a plurality of set values, and the simpler the configuration of the gaming machine. It becomes possible, and the more the number of set values is (for example, when the number of set values is 5 or 6), the more interesting the game can be made.

In this example, as shown in the upper right of FIG. 124, the main control of the setting key insertion port (and the key switch for changing the setting corresponding to the setting key insertion port on a one-to-one basis) and the setting change button Although it is installed on the surface of the board M in the backside direction of the gaming machine (more specifically, in the present example, the periphery of the entry state display device J10), it may be installed in other parts. Further, when the setting key is used to change the setting, it means that only a specific administrator who holds the setting key changes the setting, and therefore the setting is not normally changed during the game. That is, in the state where the setting can be changed, displaying the set value on the front surface of the gaming machine is more convenient in that the setting can be smoothly changed. In this case, the existing light emitting means provided in the gaming machine (for example, the special symbol display device of FIG. 1 (the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20)) is also used, and the setting is changed. By displaying the set value only during or during confirmation of the setting, it is possible to easily confirm the set value.

Here, FIG. 124b shows a state in which the main control board M is housed in a case and a cross section around the setting operation unit. As shown in FIG. 124b, in the main control board M, the CPU MC is provided in the upper right of the main control board M, and a test terminal TS mounting area to be attached only when performing a payout test or the like is formed in the upper center part. At the lower right portion of the main control board M, the above-mentioned entering state display device J10 is provided. Further, in the upper left portion of the main control board M, an operation unit for changing the setting and a set value display device are provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU, the test terminal, the entry state display device J10, the operation unit for changing the setting, and the set value display device do not overlap in a plan view (rear view of the gaming machine) (to prevent overlapping). ), and a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm or more) is provided to prevent misidentification between the ball entering state display device J10 and the set value display device. In the present embodiment, the left side in FIG. 124b is the free end when the gaming machine frame is opened, and the setting change operation unit and the set value display device are arranged near the free end side to set. While paying attention to making it easy to change the value, the entry state display device J10 is displayed when the gaming machine frame is opened by arranging it on the rotation axis side when opening the gaming machine frame. Care is taken to prevent information from being unintentionally viewed by the player. Of course, when giving priority to fraud prevention when changing the set value, the operation unit for setting change and the set value display device may be formed on the right side of the main control board when viewed from the front (on the rotating shaft side of the game frame) ( (See the image on the upper right of FIG. 124a). Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above points, the opening/closing lid SKC is provided in a portion corresponding to the operation unit for setting change so that the operation unit for setting change cannot be easily accessed, and the setting value is changed. Except for work and confirmation of setting information, the operation unit for changing the setting is not exposed. Hereinafter, the operation unit for changing the setting and the set value display device will be described with reference to the lower diagram of FIG. 124b (partial cross-sectional view of a relevant portion).

First, the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key slot of the setting key switch SK1 on the upper surface of the substrate case corresponding to the operation unit for changing the setting, and the setting change button SK2 can be operated. An opening of a predetermined size is formed so that However, since a partition wall such as a side wall is formed from the opening toward the upper surface of the substrate, other electronic components (for example, CPU) of the main control board M cannot be accessed through the opening. Further, a setting key SK1 having a setting key insertion opening formed corresponding to the opening and a push-type setting change button SK2 are arranged vertically, and an opening/closing lid SKC corresponding to the size of the opening is provided. Is attached to the substrate case so as to be openable and closable while being biased in a direction to always close the opening.

Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method for changing settings and the operation of setting change/setting display. When checking the set value, first open the opening/closing lid SKC by a predetermined angle against the urging force, insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the setting key switch SK1, and move the key to the right. Rotate in the direction. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device formed by the 7-segment LED, indicating the setting display mode. Therefore, the segment DP (dot) is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is running, the set value can be displayed, but the set value changing process cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening/closing lid SKC is opened at a predetermined angle against the biasing force, and the setting key is pressed. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the switch SK1 and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is 1 to 6) is displayed blinking on the setting value display device formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting change mode is indicated. In order to show, the segment DP (dot) is displayed off. When the setting change button SK2 is pressed in this state, a new setting value incremented by +1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. The administrator operates the setting change button SK2 so as to obtain an arbitrary set value. In the present embodiment, if the setting value at power-on is "1", "1" "2"... "5" "6" "1" each time the setting change button SK2 is pressed once. Is changed to ". Then, by operating the setting change button, when the key inserted in the setting key switch SK1 is rotated leftward while the setting value is changed to the desired setting value (the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display device), After the change process is completed, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and the segment DP (dot) is displayed on, and then both displays are turned off.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a flow of setting change processing according to the sixth embodiment. When the setting change process is started, in step 1003-1, a command indicating that the setting change process has started is set and transmitted to the sub control means. As a result, the sub-control means can display "in the setting change mode" or the like on the liquid crystal display (FIG. 140). At the same time, it outputs to the external terminal board as an outer end signal (security signal). In step 1003-2, it is confirmed whether or not the set value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”). If YES, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. If NO in step 1003-2, that is, if it is determined that the set value is an abnormal value other than “1” to “6”, the minimum payout rate “1” is set in step 1003-3. Then, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. In step 1003-4, the LED is turned on in a display mode (for example, all lighting) indicating that the setting is being changed on the special symbol display device, and at the same time, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display device. Next, in step 1003-5, it is confirmed whether or not the setting change button is input. If NO, the process proceeds to step 1003-11. If YES in step 1003-5, the setting value data switched by the setting change button is acquired in step 1003-6, and the process proceeds to step 1003-7. In step 1003-7, it is confirmed whether or not the current set value is not the maximum value. If YES, the process proceeds to step 1003-9 and 1 is added to the set value. If NO in step 1003-7, that is, if it is determined that the set value is the maximum "6", the minimum payout rate "1" is set in step 1003-8, and step 1003 is performed. The process shifts to -9 and 1 is added to the set value. Subsequently, in step 1003-10, the setting value data is updated, and in step 1003-11, it is confirmed whether or not the setting key signal has fallen. In step 1003-11, if there is no fall of the setting key signal, the process proceeds to step 1003-5 and the processes of step 1003-5 to step 1003-11 are performed until the fall of the setting key signal is confirmed. repeat. In the case of YES in step 1003-11, that is, when it is determined that the setting key switch has returned to the state before the setting is changed, in step 1003-12, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are turned off to change the setting. After clearing the display mode indicating that, in step 1003-13, a command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is set and transmitted to the sub control means. As a result, the sub-control unit hides "in the setting change mode" being displayed on the liquid crystal display and stops the output to the external terminal board. After the process of step 1003-13 is completed, the process proceeds to step 1004 of this process to execute the RAM clear. Further, in the process flow of the present embodiment, the setting value switched by the setting change button is determined by the falling edge of the setting key signal (step 1003-11), but the processing is not limited to this. Alternatively, the set value may be confirmed by performing the main operation (a ball lending button, a handle sensor, etc., not shown). Furthermore, the set value may be fixed by input information (various gates, starting openings, attackers, etc.) of various switches provided on the board, and in this case, the player touches various switches. Since it is not possible, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes, and also to prevent unauthorized setting changes by adopting a complicated procedure in such setting changes. Further, although “1” to “6” are used as the setting value data managed by the RAM throughout the entire processing, the processing may be performed by replacing the setting value data with “0” to “5”, respectively. .. By doing this, when the RAM clear occurs due to the RAM abnormality, it is possible to avoid the abnormality determination (NO in step 1003-2) due to "0" being set to the value of the RAM that manages the set value data. You can If the set value data is managed by "0" to "5", since "0" is treated as the set value data, it is not judged as abnormal. Furthermore, when some sort of lottery is performed using the set value data (for example, when different data is set for each set value in the prefetch table or the like), there is an advantage that the offset process in the table selection can be easily performed. Specifically, when the set value data is managed by "1" to "6", it is necessary to perform a process such as decrementing the start address by -1 when using it as the offset data for the table selection. When managing the value data with “0” to “5”, the value as it is can be used as the offset data. Actually, when the set value data is displayed on the setting display device, it is displayed as "1" to "6" by adding 1 to the set value data.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the key switch for changing the setting is turned on in a situation other than when the power is turned on (predetermined condition).

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control board M according to the sixth embodiment. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1000-S (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the setting key operation determination described later to be performed. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1000-1.

The setting key operation determination processing determines whether or not the setting key switch has been operated (whether or not the setting key is input to the setting key insertion port, and the key switch for setting change is in the ON state. It is a process of determining whether or not the information is present). In the setting key operation determination process in the timer interrupt process, when it is determined that the setting key switch is operated (that is, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port, and the setting key is rotated in the predetermined direction). By doing so, when the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state), the current setting value of the gaming machine is displayed on a predetermined display device (in this example, the setting value display device).

Here, as described above, in the setting change process performed when the power is turned on (under a predetermined condition), if the setting key switch is operated, the following operation is performed until the setting key switch operation is completed. On the other hand, the process does not shift to the process, but in the setting key operation determination process, even if the setting key switch is operated, it is possible to shift to the next process without waiting for the end of the operation of the setting key switch. .. Therefore, the situation in which the setting change process is being executed (specifically, the setting is being changed) and the situation in which it is determined that the setting key switch has been operated in the setting key operation determination process (specifically, the set value is set). It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the process that can be executed is different between (during display). The following table shows an example of processing that can be executed when the setting is being changed and when the setting value is being displayed. In the table, "○" indicates that the corresponding process can be executed, "X" indicates that the corresponding process cannot be executed, and "△" indicates that the corresponding process is temporarily stopped. Indicates that In the table, “game-related input” is, for example, a sensor input from a winning opening. Further, the "abnormality notification A" is, for example, an abnormality notification such as a glass frame set/frame opening error of the game board D35, an error due to a shock, or the like. The "abnormality notification B" is, for example, an abnormality notification related to magnetism, disconnection/short circuit/power supply, and radio waves. In addition, the “production control command” is, for example, command transmission to the sub-control board S side. The "payout control command" is, for example, command transmission to the prize ball payout control board KH. In addition, “random number update” is, for example, a random number per normal symbol (eg, auxiliary game symbol random number), a normal symbol random number (eg, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), a special symbol random number (eg, symbol lottery random number) ), and a process of updating a soft random number per special symbol. The "external output" is, for example, an output of a security signal (a signal indicating that the setting is being changed or the set value is being displayed) output to the external terminal board. The “maintenance mode” is various setting modes regarding information output on the side of the sub-control board S. Further, the "notification" is a notification that the setting is being changed or the setting value is being displayed on the sub-control board S side. Further, the "payout" is a game machine payout process on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Moreover, "launch" means the launch or non-launch of a game ball on the launch control board D40 side.

Next, the arrangement of each device will be described.

<<Arrangement of setting change means>>
First, the arrangement of the setting key insertion port will be described. The setting key insertion port is mounted on the main control board M, and is provided separately from the entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button, and the like.

≪Set value display device≫
Next, the set value display device will be described. The main control board M is provided with a set value display device for displaying a set value to be set when the setting is changed. The set value display device is a 7-segment display, and the display of "1" to "6" makes it possible to distinguish 6 stages of settings 1 to 6. In the present embodiment, an example in which the set value display device is provided separately from the entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button and the like has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry state display device J10 is used. The set value may be displayed. In this case, both the set value and the base value are displayed on the incoming state display device J10. However, the set value is displayed during the setting change mode, and in other cases, It is desirable to display the base value. It is also possible to keep displaying the base value during the setting change mode, in which case the display of the set value and the base value can be switched by time or operation of any input device. Is possible. Further, by changing the display mode of the entry state display device J10, both the set value and the base value may be simultaneously displayed in the 4-digit 7-segment.

≪Change target≫
In the sixth embodiment, the winning probability of the special lottery win/loss lottery can be changed. For example, six stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided, and in order of setting 1 to setting 6, the winning probability of each high probability and low probability jackpot is gradually increased (to be advantageous to the player. ), the winning probability at high probability for each setting is twice as high as the winning probability at low probability. Specifically, the winning probability at a low probability is: setting 1:1/320 (205/65536), setting 2:1/318 (206/65536), setting 3:1/317 (207/65536), setting It is provided like 4:1/315 (208/65536), setting 5:1/314 (209/65536), setting 6:1/312 (210/65536), and the winning probability at the time of high probability is setting 1 : 1/160 (410/65536), setting 2: 1/159 (412/65536), setting 3: 1/158 (414/65536), setting 4: 1/58 (416/65536), setting 5:1 /157 (418/65536) and the setting is 6:1/156 (420/65536). The winning probability of the special symbol win/loss lot includes the winning probability of the small hit, and the winning probability of the small hit is constant regardless of the set value and the gaming state (low probability, high probability) (for example, It is set to 1/99). In addition, the winning probability at the time of high probability is set to be within 10 times that at the time of low probability, that is, setting 1:1/30.7, setting 2:1/30.3, setting 3:1/29.9. , Setting 4: 1/29.5, setting 5: 1/28.0, and setting 6: 1/27.0.

Next, the setting value storage area will be described.
≪Setting value storage area≫
The RAM area in the sixth embodiment is configured with a storage area (specific area) for setting values and another game data storage area (for example, main game side random number, round number, etc.), and the storage area for setting values is , And is stored from the top address of the RAM area. In addition, when there is an abnormality in the RAM area and the setting change by the setting key switch, all the RAM areas including the storage area of the set values are cleared (initialized), but the RAM clear button is operated to clear the RAM. In, the storage area for the set value is not cleared, and only the data in the other game data storage area is cleared (initialized). Further, although an example in which the setting value is stored at the head address of the RAM area has been described for the purpose of facilitating the designation of the clear range when the RAM is cleared, there is no problem in storing the setting value at any address of the RAM area.

≪Confirmation timing of set value data≫
Next, a process of confirming the set value at the time of winning/winning lottery will be described. Confirmation processing of the set value at the time of winning/winning lottery is performed before step 1410-1 during the main game symbol display processing of step 1400 in the timer interrupt processing, confirms the currently set setting value, and is set. This is a process of setting the main game table 1 (that is, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the above setting) corresponding to the set value. After confirming the set value in the win/win lottery, in step 1410-1 the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and determines the first main game content determination random number ( Based on the second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol win/win lottery is executed.

<<Process during setting change>>
Next, the process during the setting change will be described.

<Processing on the main control side>
First, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured to be able to display that the setting is being changed by a special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20). Specifically, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are turned on during the setting change. In addition, it is desirable that the LEDs of the special symbol display device are all lit so that they are not displayed during the game of the player. Further, if it is possible to indicate that the setting is being changed, it is not always necessary to use the special symbol display device, and for example, various LEDs provided on the board surface may be used. In addition, by providing a dedicated LED and processing it so that it is displayed only during setting changes, the processing load is greater than the combined use of various LEDs (special symbol display device or ordinary symbol display device) that display other game information. Can be lightened.

<Processing on the sub-control side>
Next, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is configured to be able to suggest that the setting is being changed by the effect display device SG, the speaker D24, and the like. Specifically, the effect display device SG is configured to display an image of “setting is being changed”, and the speaker D24 is configured to output a voice of “setting is being changed”. Also, during the setting change, it is configured to be able to change game data not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPUMC of the main control board M). For example, it is possible to make changes such as volume change setting (enabled or disabled), RTC setting, energy saving mode setting (light intensity is lower during normal game than during normal game), and sub-input These changes can be made by operating the button SB or the cross key. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and an input device such as a touch panel may be used instead. In this case, in addition to the liquid crystal display used for the main game as the effect display device, it is desirable to provide another liquid crystal display for only sub-input and use it as a touch panel.

<Input restrictions>
Next, the input restriction during the setting change will be described. Specifically, in the processing of step 1003 (sixth) (setting change processing which will be described later), not to detect the ball entering the starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10). It is configured. For example, even if the input signal is input to the input port due to the input being detected by the first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device (A11s) or the second main game starting entrance detecting device (B11s). Since the CPU MC of the main control board M does not permit the processing at the time of timer interruption, it does not check the input port. However, error detection such as door open detection and magnet detection is possible. In the present embodiment, these abnormality detections are configured to be detected only in the timer interrupt processing, but in the sixth embodiment, the main control board side main processing (setting change processing) detects door opening, magnet detection, etc. By making it possible to detect the error, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed while the setting is being changed.

<External output>
Next, information that the CPU MC of the main control board M outputs to the outside will be described. The information output by the CPUMC of the main control board M to the outside is 1. Set value, 2. It is possible to output a signal indicating that the setting is being changed. In this embodiment, 1. External output of set value, 2. Both of the information indicating that the setting is being changed are output from the main control board M to the hall computer. The signal indicating that the setting is being changed is continuously output during the setting change, and is continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) after the setting change is completed. Further, the CPU MC of the main control board M is configured to send a set value command, a setting change start command, and a setting change end command to the CPU SC of the sub control board S and the CPU of the prize ball payout control board.

<Payout processing>
Next, a process when the power is cut off during the payout process and then the setting is changed will be described. Specifically, when the power is cut off in the situation where the prize balls are paid out in the prize ball payout unit KE10, the power is turned off with the remaining prize balls being backed up in the RAM area. .. When the power is restored, in the normal power restoration (that is, not RAM clear), the number of remaining award balls is still stored, so the number of remaining award balls is paid out after the power is restored, but it is set when the power is restored. When the setting key switch to change is operated, all RAM areas are cleared, so the number of remaining award balls that was backed up is also cleared, and it is assumed that the power is cut off during the award ball payout. Is configured so that the number of remaining prize balls will not be paid out when the power is restored. During the setting change, the CPUMC of the main game board M is configured to send a setting change command to the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board), and after the setting change is completed, the setting confirmation is performed. It is configured to send an end command. The number of remaining prize balls may be cleared after the setting has been effectively changed.

<Random number update process>
In the sixth embodiment, the random number update process is not performed during the setting change. That is, the random number is updated by updating the random number in step 1018 of the main control board side main process or step 1000-2 (various random number update process) of timer interrupt process, step 1000-3 (initial value update type random number update process), Only in step 1000-4 (initial value random number updating process), there is no process for updating the random number in the setting changing process.

≪Display during setting confirmation≫
Next, the display during setting confirmation will be described.

<Display on the main control side>
First, on the main control side, as described above, the special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) is configured to be able to display that the setting is being changed. However, the LED of the special symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured to be able to display that the setting is being confirmed even while confirming the setting. During the setting confirmation, all LEDs of the special symbol display device are configured to blink. In addition, it is desirable that the mode in which all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are displayed in a blinking manner is a mode that is not displayed during the game of the player (a mode displayed during the game of the player is, for example, (A certain LED and another LED are alternately blinking and displayed). Further, when the setting confirmation is in progress during the change of the special symbol, the display of the change of the special symbol is configured to be displayed with priority over the display during the setting confirmation.

<Display on sub-control side>
Next, during setting confirmation, on the sub-control side, the image display of "setting confirmation" is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the output of "setting confirmation" is output on the speaker D24. While the setting is being changed, the game data not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPU MC of the main control board M) can be changed (maintenance mode), but during the setting confirmation, the main game can be changed. Even game data that is not related (not controlled by the CPU MC of the main control board M) is configured to be unchangeable, and is configured not to be settable. In addition, it is desirable to set the output time in accordance with the degree of importance with other errors that extend the output time. (For example, if the degree of importance of the notification of the setting change is higher than that of the notification at the time of initialization and the output extension time at the time of initialization is 5000 ms, it may be set to 6000 ms, which is longer than that at the time of setting change.)

<Restriction of input information>
Next, the limitation of input information will be described. While the setting of the input information is restricted during the change of the setting as described above, the setting of the input information is not restricted during the setting confirmation. Specifically, the main control side (main) such as the detection of the ball entering the starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) whose input was restricted during the setting change Regardless of whether the control board M controls the CPUMC or the sub-control side (controlling the sub-control board S by the CPUSC), all the information about the game is detected and processed.

<External output>
Next, the external output during setting confirmation will be described. First, regarding the set value for performing the external output during the setting change, the external output is not performed during the setting confirmation. Next, during the setting confirmation, a signal indicating that the setting is being confirmed is continuously output. Further, after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is configured to be continuously output until a specific time (for example, 500 ms), and is configured to be output for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) during the setting change.

<Payout processing>
Next, the prize ball payout control during setting confirmation will be described. First, when the prize balls are paid out by the prize ball payout device KE, if the setting confirmation is in progress, the prize ball payout control is temporarily interrupted. The setting can be confirmed by a game shop employee or the like opening the game machine frame and using the setting key switch from the rear side of the game machine. In other words, opening the game machine frame may prevent the sphere supply device on the store side from normally supplying the sphere to the game machine. Therefore, it is preferable to temporarily suspend the payout of prize balls. When the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended, the CPU MC of the main game board M is configured to send a setting confirmation command to the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board), and the setting check is performed. After completion, it is configured to send a setting confirmation end command.

<Internal processing such as random number update processing>
Next, internal processing such as random number updating processing during setting confirmation will be described. While the setting is being changed, the random number update processing is not performed, but during the setting confirmation, the random number update processing and the like are performed as in the game.

<<Process when power is restored>>
Next, the processing at the time of power failure recovery will be described.

<Normal power off recovery>
First, when the setting is not changed and the RAM is not cleared when the power is restored, the game is started by returning the game state including the set value to the state before the power was turned off.

<Process when changing settings>
Next, the processing when changing the settings will be described. When changing the setting, all the data in the RAM area including the setting value is cleared, and then the set setting value is stored.

<Processing when RAM is cleared>
Next, the processing when the RAM is cleared will be described. In the RAM clear at the time of operating the RAM clear button, the game data other than the set value is cleared. Next, when there is an abnormality in the RAM area, all the data in the RAM area including the set value is cleared.

≪Command transmission timing≫
Next, in the present embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted in the control command transmitting process in step 1999 in the timer interrupt process, but when the setting change in the sixth embodiment is started or the setting change ends. In this case, the CPUMC of the main game board M instructs the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board) immediately after starting the setting change (command during setting change) ) Is transmitted, and the command relating to the end of the setting change is preferably transmitted immediately after the end of the setting change. Further, at the start of the game (for example, the transmission timing of the fluctuation start command), at the end of the game (for example, the stop timing of the fluctuation stop command), at the time of the hold occurrence (for example, the read-ahead read/write command or the read-ahead change mode described later). The set value may be transmitted from the main control means to the effect control means at a timing such as (command stop timing). At this time, the effect control means stores the received setting value, compares the setting value with the setting value received in the next game, and if there is a difference, informs the setting value, thereby making an illegal setting during the game. It can also help discover changes.

≪Modification≫
The processing relating to the setting change has been described above, but the summary is as follows. First, in the situation where the setting is being changed, the main control means (for example, the CPUMC of the main control board M) and the effect control means (for example, the CPUSC of the sub control board S) and the payout control means (for example, prize ball payout). A command (setting changing command) indicating that the processing of changing the setting is executed in the main control means is transmitted to the CPU of the control board KH), and the random number updating process related to the success or failure, the starting opening sensor, etc. The game related input, for example, a low priority abnormality notification such as a bowl full is prevented. Further, the main control means outputs a signal indicating that the setting is being changed from the external terminal. It should be noted that the abnormality notification having a high priority (for example, an abnormality that is directly connected illegally (magnetic detection, radio wave detection, etc.)) is notified even while the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in the effect control means, while notifying that the setting is being changed, the mode is shifted to the maintenance mode, and test output in the effect control means, various effect settings, setting of the effective range of the player operation, etc. are executed. Configured to be able. Further, the payout control means is configured to prohibit both the payout process and the firing process.

When the set value is being displayed on the set value display device, the main control means indicates to the effect control means and the payout control means that the processing for displaying the set value is executed by the main control means. While transmitting the command (command during setting display), the same processing as usual such as update processing of random numbers related to winning or hitting, game-related input such as a starting opening sensor, abnormality notification, etc. is performed. However, a signal indicating that the set value is being displayed is output from the external terminal. Similarly, the effect control means also notifies that the set value is being displayed, but does not shift to the maintenance mode. Then, the payout control means is configured to temporarily suspend the payout process but not prohibit the operation of the firing process.

With the above-described configuration, in the sixth embodiment, the administrator is also used in the effect control means (for example, the CPUSC of the sub control board S) in consideration of the setting change based on the operation performed only by the administrator. In the main control means (for example, CPUMC of the main control board M) and payout control means (for example, CPU of the prize ball payout control board KH), the game function is stopped. That is, also in other control means, the process for the administrator is executed in accordance with the process of changing the setting, and the process related to the game function is not executed. Therefore, starting from the single operation of changing the setting, the plurality of control means can execute the corresponding management processing. On the other hand, in the confirmation work of setting display, by configuring the normal game processing to be maintained as much as possible, it is possible to realize appropriate processing without imposing more control restrictions than necessary.

It should be noted that modifications of the sixth embodiment (setting change) will be listed below.
≪Change target≫
In the sixth embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol is set to be different for each set value, but it is possible to change other parameters that affect the payout rate. Specifically, there is an influence on the payout rate, probability change rate, selection ratio of big hit type (symbol selection ratio at the time of hitting), probability of winning/decreasing of normal symbol, electric support transfer rate, special symbol, fluctuation of ordinary symbol It is possible to combine one or a plurality of parameters such as time (relative difference in the number of fluctuations per hour) and the operation speed of a movable object that affects the winning rate. Further, although the partial parameters are different for each set value, it is possible to configure so that the same payout rate is obtained. Of course, it is also possible to improve each parameter in accordance with the improvement of the payout rate. Further, for example, it may be possible to individually set a plurality of parameters such as the probability of winning or losing a special symbol and the probability of winning or losing a normal symbol. In this case, a setting key switch that can be changed in two or more steps is used, and a setting key is used. It may be configured to shift to a parameter change mode corresponding to the position of the switch. In addition to the parameter that affects the payout rate, the effect frequency that does not affect may be changed.
≪Confirmation timing of set value data≫
In the sixth embodiment, the process of confirming the set value is performed for each special symbol lottery process, but it is also possible to execute the process only at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the information may be checked only once when the setting is changed and when the power is turned on, or may be checked at each change timing of the gaming state such as a big hit. Further, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with the entry state display device J10, the confirmation may be made in accordance with its display timing or calculation timing. As a result, the probability change timing can be reduced, and the load on other processing can be reduced.
<<Arrangement of setting key switches, etc.>>
In the sixth embodiment, the setting key switch, the setting change button, and the set value display device are mounted on the main control board, but a payout control device (for example, prize ball payout control board KH or the like) or a power supply unit (for example, power supply) It can be provided in the unit E) or can be configured as an independent device. It is also possible to disperse various buttons and indicators in a plurality of devices, for example, a setting key switch is provided on the main control board and a setting change button is provided on the payout control board. Since the change of the set value is likely to be the target of unauthorized operation, the input function (setting key switch and setting change button) is used in the control device with a sealed structure such as the main control board and the payout control board. It is desirable to provide it. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the setting is changed using the setting key switch and the setting change button has been described, but the design can be changed appropriately by using a general input device such as a DIP switch. it can.

Next, FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device SG during the setting change and the setting confirmation.

Next, the upper part of the figure is an image diagram showing a list of items that can be set during the maintenance mode executed by the sub-control board S in the setting change processing of FIG. 124a. In this example, by transmitting a command from the main control board M side to indicate that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, the main control board M side indicates that the setting is being changed, and the sub control board S side It is configured to be able to execute a maintenance mode (a mode for setting in a store or a mode for manufacturing confirmation). Further, in the present example, during the maintenance mode, the setting display image SGSHG (in this example, an image showing “4” which is the current setting value) for guiding the current setting value is displayed on the effect display device SG. Is configured to do. Further, as shown in the figure, in the setting change mode, in the effect display device SG, a setting change mode information display image SGHMH (an image for notifying that the setting is currently being changed, In the example, it is configured to be able to display an image for displaying "in setting change mode".

As shown in the figure, in this example, a plurality of items can be selected as various settings relating to information output during the maintenance mode. More specifically, in this example, during the maintenance mode, execution of a test mode at the time of shipment (for example, a mode for executing tests such as lamp, voice, liquid crystal display device, input confirmation, etc.) , A series of operations are completed, or it may be returned to the main screen by, for example, pressing and holding the sub-input button, etc.), advertisement content setting (that is, advertisement at a specific timing including the demo screen) Is a setting for whether or not to display, and is a setting for specific advertisement contents (for example, a store name) when displaying an advertisement}, and whether the power saving mode is enabled or disabled (that is, energy saving during a game standby, etc.). It is a setting of whether or not to automatically shift to the mode), and a selection of valid or invalid of the RTC effect (an effect executed when a predetermined time is reached) (a setting of whether or not to perform the RTC effect). The RTC effect may be uniformly set, or a plurality of RTC effects may be individually set), and selection of whether or not to display the set value (that is, the present set value of the gaming machine is an effect display device). Select either the setting display mode (display setting) which is a mode that can be displayed on the SG or the setting display mode (non-display setting) which is a mode in which the current set value of the gaming machine is not displayed on the effect display device SG. Whether the player volume setting is valid or invalid, and the player light amount setting is valid or invalid (in the normal state other than the maintenance mode, the player presses the sub input button, the cross key, or the like). It is a setting as to whether or not it is possible to perform volume setting and light amount setting). In addition, when the termination of the maintenance mode is selected, or when the setting change is terminated (for example, the command indicating the return from the setting change mode (end of the setting change mode) is received from the main control board M side) ) The maintenance mode is terminated, and predetermined screens such as the demo screen, the normal screen, and the dedicated screen are displayed.

In this example, an item is selected by operating the cross key and the change content is determined by pressing the sub input button. Further, the effect display device SG is configured to be able to display a button operation information image SGHMB (an image for explaining the button operation in the maintenance mode). In the lower part of the setting change display area (for example, the effect display device SG), a caption SGHMJ (in this example, "maintenance mode is forced to end when the setting change ends... Subtitle) is scrolled. The subtitle SGHMJ may be displayed when “End maintenance mode” is selected with the cross key, or may be always displayed during the maintenance mode. Further, the present invention is not limited to such a subtitle SGHJM, and may indicate or guide the maintenance mode end condition or the like by using predetermined character information or voice information, or may not provide such guidance or suggestion. Further, the maintenance mode may be automatically terminated on the basis that the sub input button or the cross key has not been operated for a predetermined time. In this case, the operation of the sub input button or the cross key is specified as the subtitle SGMHM. It may be configured to notify that the time (less than a predetermined time) has not been reached and automatically notify the remaining time until the maintenance mode is ended.

Next, an example of a display screen during setting confirmation will be described. In the middle of the figure, the sub-control board S side is in a game standby state (a state in which the symbol variation is not executed and there is no hold), and the setting display mode is the setting display mode (display setting) in the maintenance mode described above. ) And the image is displayed while the main control board M side is confirming the settings. In this example, the main control board M side sends a command indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode, so that the sub control board S side indicates that the setting is being confirmed on the main control board M side. The display is configured to be executable.

Further, in this example, the setting display image SGSHG exists in front of the image related to the demo screen displayed in the game standby state (that is, the setting display image SGSHG has priority over the image related to the demonstration screen in display). It is configured such that the visibility of the display of the setting display image SGSHG is not hindered depending on the image of the demo screen). Further, in this example, a subtitle SGSMJ (in this example, “setting display mode” in the example, which indicates and guides the ending condition of the setting display mode (display setting) is provided in the lower part of the demo screen display area (eg, the effect display device SG). (Display setting) is in progress. Subtitles saying "Return to normal mode when the setting key is removed" are scrolled.

Next, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram that the sub-control board S side is in a symbol variation state (state in which symbol variation is being executed), and the main control substrate M side is displayed during setting confirmation. Further, in this example, the setting display mode is the non-display setting in the maintenance mode described above. More specifically, “7” is temporarily stopped on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, two reservations are displayed on the first reservation display unit SG12, and “red” is displayed as a look-ahead effect for the second reservation. Is displayed, the hold is not displayed on the second hold display unit SG13, and the main control is performed in a situation where the display mode of the pseudo hold display is “green” as a reliability suggestion notice corresponding to the fluctuation. It is a display example in the case where the substrate M side shifts during setting confirmation.

In this example, as described above, since the setting display mode is the non-display setting, “☆” is shown in the setting display image, and the specific setting value cannot be determined from the setting display image SGSHG. Or it is difficult. When the setting display mode is the non-display setting, it is not necessary to display the image related to the setting display (for example, the setting display image SGSHG). In this example, the setting display image SGSHG is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern (the setting display image SGSHG hides the first decorative pattern in the center of the screen), while the second The decorative pattern (the decorative pattern arranged at the lower right of the screen) ensures the visibility of the decorative pattern. Further, in this example, a caption SGSMJ (in this example, "in setting display mode (non-display setting) is in progress," suggests and guides the ending condition of the setting display mode (non-display setting) in the upper part of the effect display device SG. When you remove the setting key, it returns to the normal mode.") is displayed. While the main game symbol is changing, the subtitle SGSMJ is configured not to overlap with the main game symbol, the hold display, etc., so that the hold prefetching effect and the visibility of the hold information related to the symbol change are not disturbed. Exist).

In addition, the 2nd modification regarding 6th Embodiment (setting change) is enumerated below.
≪Gaming machine that does not require setting change≫
In the sixth embodiment, an example in which the probability of winning or losing a special symbol is made different for each set value has been described, but in a gaming machine that does not use a special symbol such as the second type pachinko gaming machine, the object to be changed by the setting change Does not exist, it does not make sense to provide a function (setting changing means) for substantially changing the setting. However, in developing a gaming machine, designing a gaming machine provided with setting changing means and a gaming machine not having setting changing means separately is not preferable from a hardware and software standpoint, As much as possible, it is necessary to develop game machines with a wide variety of specifications using the same software and hardware configurations in order to reduce development costs. Therefore, the following is an example of how to handle the setting changing means in a gaming machine that does not require setting changes. With such a configuration, even in a gaming machine that does not require the setting changing means, it is possible to develop the gaming machine with the same software configuration and hardware configuration as the gaming machine that performs the setting changing means. Further, the gaming machine that does not require the setting changing means and the gaming machine that performs the setting changing means do not necessarily have to have the same hardware configuration/software configuration, and if the same effect is exhibited, some There is no problem even if there is a design change.
<1 step setting>
The set value that can be changed by the setting changing means is set to one type. As a result, the process of switching the set value remains the same (for example, by performing the process so that the set value is not changed from “1” even if the setting change switch is operated although the mode is changed to the setting change mode). Similarly, it is possible to realize the same specifications as those of a gaming machine that does not require setting changes. In this case, since there is one kind of numerical value that can be taken as the set value, by displaying “1” as the set value data on the set value display device, it is possible to recognize that the process of displaying the setting is being performed. It may or may not be displayed. If the sub-control board is equipped with a process for displaying the setting information, a default value (for example, “setting 1”) may be transmitted, or there is no effective setting value. Command may be transmitted. When the command indicating that the set value does not exist is transmitted, it is desirable that the sub-control board be subjected to a process of displaying that the set value does not exist by receiving the command.
<Common setting value>
All setting values that can be changed by the setting changing means are set as the same setting value. Specifically, when using a 6-step setting (setting 1 to setting 6), for example, by treating all the setting values as “1”, the same setting value can be made to be used regardless of which setting value is selected. You can As a result, the same specification as the one-step setting can be realized without changing the process of switching the set value. When reading the set value data, the data of the set value “1” is stored in the addresses of the ROM corresponding to each of the settings 1 to 6, and the set value “1” is stored from the address corresponding to the selected set value. Data may be read out, or the data of the setting value "1" may be stored at an address common to the settings 1 to 6. At this time, the set value display device may display the set values "1" to "6" according to the operation of the setting change button, but the set value "1" is displayed regardless of which operation is performed. Is suitable for a machine that does not require a setting change, and thereby avoids misidentification when confirming a set value.
<Software processing that does not refer to set values>
The setting value stored in the RAM (the setting value selected by the setting changing unit) is not processed for reference. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine that adopts the set value, when the winning or failure of the special symbol is selected by lot, the setting value stored in the RAM as the selected setting value is referred to when the winning probability table is referred to. A win/loss probability table corresponding to the set value is selected (described in an eighth embodiment described later). At this time, by omitting the process of referring to the set value from the RAM and determining one predetermined win/loss table, it is possible to realize the same specifications as those of the gaming machine that does not require setting change.
<Software processing that refers to set values>
As a gaming machine that does not require setting changes, the soft processing that does not refer to the setting values has been described above, but when only one winning probability table is provided according to the gaming state regardless of the number of selectable setting values, Not limited to this. Regardless of which set value data the selected set value is, the same win/fail probability table is determined, and as a result, a setting difference due to the set value does not occur.
<Identification flag>
By providing a flag for distinguishing between the gaming machine that changes the setting and the gaming machine that does not require the setting change, and determining the flag at a predetermined trigger such as the game start timing, the processing in the gaming machine that changes the setting, The processing in the gaming machine which does not require the setting change is changed. Specifically, in the power-on process of FIG. 124a, a value indicating that the game machine does not require setting change by referring to the flag stored in the ROM of the main control board M before performing the process of S1001. In case of, it is possible to shift to the processing of S1002 without performing the processing of S1001. In this case, soft changes can occur, but at least hard changes cannot occur.
<Set number of settings>
Select the number of settings used to change the settings. For example, three types of one-stage setting, three-stage setting, and six-stage setting are designed so that they can be appropriately selected according to the game specifications. Specifically, a method of setting according to the rotational position of the setting key switch used when changing the setting, or a method of selecting using an input switch such as a DIP switch can be considered. As another means, a flag indicating the selectable setting number (one-step setting, three-step setting, six-step setting) stored in the ROM of the main control board M, as in the example using the above-mentioned identification flag. May be made selectable by referring to before the processing of S1001 of FIG. 124a or before the processing of 1003-1 of FIG. 125. By using such a method, the specifications of the current gaming machine are classified into three types: a gaming machine corresponding to one-stage setting, a gaming machine corresponding to three-stage setting, and a gaming machine corresponding to six-stage setting. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the processing according to the set number. Further, by this, when the one-step setting is selectively used, it can be made to function as a gaming machine that does not require setting change, and when the three-step setting or the six-step setting is selectively used, it depends on the selected setting step. It can be made to function as a game machine whose settings can be changed. Further, as in the case of using the one-step setting described above, when the process for displaying the setting information is mounted on the sub control board, a value indicating the selected setting number (for example, “three-step setting”) May be transmitted. Thereby, the sub-control board can notify the liquid crystal or the speaker such as "the currently selected setting is a three-step setting" according to the value received from the main control board M.
<Other>
Functions related to setting changes (setting change buttons, etc.) are provided on the sub-board (power supply board, etc.) instead of the main control board, and in the case of gaming machines that do not require setting changes, signal input to the main control board May not be performed. Specifically, a method of not performing a harness connection between the sub-board provided with a function related to setting change and the main control board, and not sending a command related to the setting change from the sub-board to the main control board The method to do, etc. are considered.

<<Configuration during setting confirmation>>
The configurations during setting confirmation applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be listed below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that one or a plurality of them may be appropriately combined to cause no problem (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<If the power is cut off while checking the settings>
If a power failure occurs while checking the settings, and then the power is restored,
(1) The setting confirmation is restarted. (2) The setting confirmation is ended.
(3) Switch to setting change mode

<Operation during setting confirmation>
(1) Entry into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 is invalid. (It is possible that only some of the entrances are invalid, and the other entrances are valid (2) First main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, auxiliary The game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 remain valid (3) The operation of the firing handle D44 is invalid (the game ball is (Cannot fire)
(4) The operation of the firing handle D44 remains valid (the game ball does not become unlaunchable)
(5) Error detection is feasible, but error notification is not displayed on the effect display device SG. (6) Error detection is feasible, which is a layer in front of the display during setting confirmation on the effect display device SG. (7) Do not display the demo screen (Do not shift to the game standby state)
(8) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) do not start changing (9) Auxiliary game symbols do not start changing

<Period where settings cannot be confirmed>
In the following period, the setting may not be confirmed even if the setting key switch is turned on.
(1) Special game start demo time (2) Special game end demo time (3) Special game running (4) Main game symbol (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) is changing (5) Auxiliary game While the symbol is fluctuating (6) The normal electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory) is in operation (7) The specific effect (during execution of the effect related to RTC, etc.)
(8) Time shortening During game state (9) Probability fluctuation During game state (10) Occurrence of specific error (door open detection, magnet detection, etc.)

<When returning from checking settings>
The operation when returning from the setting confirmation (when the setting key is turned off) may be configured as follows.
(1) Volume setting is set to initial setting (2) Light intensity setting is set to initial setting (3) Demo screen is displayed (shift to game standby state)

<<Configuration of setting change mode>>
The configuration of the setting change mode applicable to the gaming machine according to this example is listed below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that one or a plurality of them may be appropriately combined to cause no problem (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<When power is cut off in the setting change mode>
If the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the power is then recovered,
(1) The setting change mode is restarted (2) The setting change mode ends (if the setting key switch is turned off then on, the setting is being confirmed)
(3) Shift while confirming settings

<Operation in setting change mode>
(1) Entry into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 is invalid. (It is possible that only some of the entrances are invalid, and the other entrances are valid (2) First main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, auxiliary The game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 remain valid (3) The operation of the firing handle D44 is invalid (the game ball is (Cannot fire)
(4) The operation of the firing handle D44 remains valid (the game ball does not become unlaunchable)
(5) Error detection is feasible, but error notification is not displayed on the effect display device SG. (6) Error detection is feasible, which is a layer in front of the display during setting confirmation on the effect display device SG. (7) Do not display the demo screen (Do not shift to the game standby state)
(8) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) do not start changing (9) Auxiliary game symbols do not start changing

<When returning from the setting change mode>
The operation when returning from the setting change mode may be configured as follows.
(1) Volume setting is set to initial setting (2) Light intensity setting is set to initial setting (3) Demo screen is displayed (shift to game standby state)

(Seventh embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the information regarding the ball entry can be displayed on the ball entry status display device. An embodiment configured such that processing such as generation/display of information relating to ball entry is executed by the main control board (CPU MC of the main control board M) will be described in detail as a seventh embodiment.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
First, FIG. 127 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the seventh embodiment. The characteristic processing in FIG. 127 is step 1001 (seventh), step 1003 (seventh), step 1000 (seventh), step 1005 (seventh), step 1001-1 (seventh), step 1001-2. (Seventh), Step 1018-1 (Seventh), Step 1018-2 (Seventh), Step 1019 (Seventh), Step 1992 (Seventh), and Step 7000 (Seventh). First, after power is turned on, in step 1001 (seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is operated. If Yes in step 1001 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 1000 (seventh). If Yes in step 1001 (seventh), the set value backed up in the first RAM area at the time of power interruption is restored. On the other hand, if No in step 1001 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the setting change process in step 1003 (seventh), and proceeds to the process in step 1004. Next, at step 1000 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls the second RAM area confirmation processing at the time of power-on of the second ROM/RAM area as the processing in the first ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1005 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the setting value stored in the first RAM area by the program of the second ROM and sets the second RAM area corresponding to the setting value. .. Therefore, the subsequent processing is performed using the second RAM area corresponding to the set value (for example, when “1” is set as the set value, the setting “1” of the second RAM area is set). Use storage area). Next, in step 1001-1 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the second RAM area as processing in the second ROM/RAM area (for example, as a set value, " If "1" is set, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" of the second RAM area). If Yes in step 1001-1 (seventh), in step 1001-2 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area (for example, the first RAM area). Data and the setting value "1" is set, the data in the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" in the second RAM area is cleared). Since the first RAM area is updated only by the first ROM/RAM control and the second RAM area is updated only by the second ROM/RAM control, the first RAM area is cleared only by the first ROM/RAM control. The processing in the 1ROM/RAM control is performed, and the clearing of the second RAM area is performed in the processing in the second ROM/RAM control. Here, the second RAM area will be described with reference to an image diagram. The second RAM area is provided so as to correspond to the set value, and the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 1, the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 2, the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 3, and the like are provided. .. That is, in the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 1, the initial flag, the display data switching flag 1, the display data switching flag 2, the normal prize ball number counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, etc. Similarly, an initial flag, a display data switching flag 1, a display data switching flag 2, a normal prize ball number counter value, a normal out number counter value, and a total value are stored in the second area stored and corresponding to the setting 2 and the setting 3. The out number counter value and the like are stored. As the processing in the first ROM/RAM area, after performing the processing of step 1018, in step 1018-1 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M loads the value of the input port of the power-off signal. Next, in step 1018-2 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the input port is a value indicating occurrence of power failure. For example, when the value of the input port is 0, it indicates that the power is not cut off, and when the value of the input port is 1, it is indicated that the power is cut off. If Yes in step 1018-2 (seventh), in step 1019 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls the ball entry state display device arithmetic processing in the second ROM/RAM area {that is, the first ROM. In the main loop processing in the RAM area (repeating the processing of step 1018 to step 1019), the entry state display device calculation processing is called (for example, a call instruction), and the entry state display apparatus calculation process is executed in the second ROM/RAM area. Execute}. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1018-2 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the processing at steps 1020 and 1022 and waits until the power is turned off. In the timer interruption process, after executing the processes of step 2000 to step 1990, in step 1992 (seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M calls the entry state display device display control process of the second ROM/RAM area. .. The RAM check in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the amount of information stored in the RAM area is compared) is a process of checking the first RAM area and the second RAM area. (A process for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in specific data in the second RAM area, which will be described later in detail (that is, the check processing is different from the check of the first RAM area in step 1008)) is not. In addition, after the processing in the second ROM/RAM control is called in the main processing on the main control board side and the timer interrupt processing, which are the processing in the first ROM/RAM control, the second ROM/RAM area is not stored in the first ROM/RAM area. The process is executed using. Note that the counters and control data (register values, etc.) used for processing on the main control board M side are backed up, so similar to the data stored in the first RAM area, in the embodiment. All the data stored in the second RAM area is also backed up. In addition, the term "clear" in the seventh embodiment is not limited to zero-clearing, and includes initialization (that is, the term "clear" is used for returning to the initial state that is the game start state). To).

<Processing in second ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 128 is a flowchart relating to the ball entering state display device arithmetic processing which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area called in step 1019 of FIG. 127 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8100, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the stack pointer (address is A) in the second RAM area. Next, in step 8200, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (address is B) in the second stack area. Note that switching of the stack area will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138 (seventh), but by these processes, the stack area used in the incoming state display device calculation process is changed from the first stack area to the second stack area. It will be changed. Next, in step 8300, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the data of all the registers in the second stack area. Next, in step 8400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second RAM area clear check process described later. Next, in step 8500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the section determination described below. Next, in step 8800, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes arithmetic processing described later. Next, in step 8900, the CPU MC of the main control board M restores the data of all the registers saved in the second stack area. Next, in step 8950, the CPUMC of the main control board M returns the stack pointer (A) from the second RAM area.

Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the second RAM area clear check processing which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8400 of FIG. 128 in the seventh embodiment. For example, when "1" is set as the setting value, the clear check process of the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" of the second RAM area is performed. First, in step 8401, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the initial flag stored in the second RAM area is AA55H. The initial flag is data indicating whether or not to clear the second RAM area. 0000H indicates that the second RAM area is cleared, and AA55H indicates that the second RAM area is not cleared. Note that 0000H indicating that the second RAM area is cleared is configured to be stored in another process. For example, the normal out number counter value is compared with the total out number counter value, and the normal out It is configured to be stored when the number counter value is larger. Further, in the determination (processing of step 8401), it is determined whether or not the AA55H, and therefore, even if it is other than 0000H, if it is not AA55H, it corresponds to the determination condition of "not AA55H". In the case of Yes in step 8401, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second RAM area in step 8404, and proceeds to step 8402. The data cleared in step 8404 is the data in the second RAM area other than the stack area. The section to be described later returns to the section A even while staying after the current section B. 2. All counters are initialized. It is configured so that the processes after step 8402 are continued. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8401, step 8404 is skipped and the process proceeds to step 8402. Next, in step 8402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the second RAM area. For example, when the values of the display data switching flag 1 and the display data switching flag 2 which will be described later are out of the range (other than 0, 1, 2), it may be determined that there is an abnormality. If Yes in step 8402, in step 8405, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second RAM area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8402, step 8405 is skipped and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8500). The data cleared in step 8405 is the data in the second RAM area other than the stack area. The section to be described later returns to the section A even while staying after the current section B. 2. All counters are initialized. It is configured such that the processing of step 8500 and subsequent steps is continued.

Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the section determination which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8500 of FIG. 128 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the display data switching flag 1 is 0. The display data switching flag 1 is a flag indicating a section in the ball entry state display device calculation process, and if the display data switching flag 1 is 0, the section A {for example, the total number of outs from the first power-on is predetermined. If the display data switching flag 1 is 1, the section B {for example, the total number of outs from the first power-on is a predetermined number (for example, 300) or more and a specific number (for example, 300)). For example, if the display data switching flag 1 is 2, it is switched every time the value of the total out number counter reaches a specific number (for example, 60000) after the interval N (for example, interval B). Section}. The display data switching flag 1 is backed up so as not to be cleared even when the power is cut off. Next, in the case of Yes in step 8502, in step 8600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a later-described section A time determination, and shifts to the next process (process of step 8800). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8502, in step 8700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the later-described time determination of section B and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8800).

Next, FIG. 131 is a flow chart of the section A o'clock judgment which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8600 of FIG. 130 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 300 or more (the numerical value of “300” used here is an example, and when the gaming machine is manufactured). The value may be larger than the expected value counted in the inspection process in. Next, in the case of Yes in step 8602, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets 1 to the display data switching flag 1 (changes from 0 to 1) in step 8608. Next, in step 8610, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes counter clear, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 8800). The counters cleared here are a normal prize ball number counter, a normal out number counter, and a total out number counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8602, in step 8650 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the later-described SW totalization processing (switch totalization processing), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 8800). To do. As a supplement, the SW totaling process will be briefly described. Update of the normal prize ball number counter, the normal out number counter, and the total out number counter based on the detection information of each winning opening read in the process of step 7500 described later. Is a process for performing.

Next, FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the determination of the time after the section B which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8700 of FIG. 130 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 60000 or more (the numerical value of 60000 used here is an example, and the interval between the game balls is 100). It is an assumed value that the firing time of the game ball has reached 10 hours in the case of the number of pieces/minute). Next, if Yes in step 8702, in step 8706, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the display data switching flag 1 to 2 (including resetting the display data switching flag 1 to 2). Next, in step 8707, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the final base value of the section. Next, in step 8708, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes counter clear, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 8800). The counters cleared here are a normal prize ball number counter, a normal out number counter, and a total out number counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8702, in step 8650 (seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the SW totalization process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8800).

Next, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the SW totaling process which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8650 of FIGS. 131 and 132 in the seventh embodiment. First, at step 8651, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball entry flag of any of the ball entry sensors is ON. If Yes in step 8651, in step 8651-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines which of the ball entry sensors the ball entry flag is to be checked (which ball entry sensor of the ball entry flag is to be checked). Is determined based on the value of α). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8651, the process shifts to the next process (process of step 8800). First, when α=0, in step 8652, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M determines whether or not the second special winning opening winning flag is ON. If Yes in step 8652, in step 8653, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second special winning opening ball flag, and in step 8654, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the second special winning opening ball. The flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8652, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=1, in step 8655, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first special winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8655, in step 8656, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first special winning opening ball flag, and in step 8657, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the first special winning opening ball. The flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8655, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=2, in step 8658, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening entrance flag is on. If Yes in step 8658, in step 8659, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game starting opening entrance flag, and in step 8660, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second main playing start opening. The prize ball flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8658, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=3, in step 8661, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening entrance flag is on. If Yes in step 8661, in step 8662, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start opening ball entry flag, and in step 8663, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game start opening. The prize ball flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8661, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=4, in step 8664, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 1 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8664, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 1 entry ball flag in step 8665, and the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the general winning opening 1 prize ball flag in step 8666. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8664, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process in step 8680). Next, when α=5, in step 8667, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 2 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8667, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 2 winning ball flag in step 8668, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns the general winning opening 2 winning ball flag in step 8669. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8667, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=6, in step 8670, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 3 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8670, in step 8671, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 3 winning ball flag, and in step 8672, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the general winning opening 3 winning ball flag. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8670, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=7, in step 8673, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 4 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8673, in step 8674, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 4 winning ball flag, and in step 8675, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the general winning opening 4 winning ball flag. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8673, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=8, in step 8676, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the total discharge confirmation sensor flag is ON. If Yes in step 8676, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the total discharge confirmation sensor flag in step 8677, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out-number counter addition flag in step 8678. In 8679-1, α is cleared, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8676, α is cleared in step 8679-1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, in step 8680 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes counter addition processing, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 8800). It should be noted that a plurality of ball entry sensors for general winning openings may be combined into one, and for example, in the case of a configuration in which a right hit is made during an auxiliary game state (high base state), a ball that can enter a ball when left hit is common. A second general winning award entrance ball, which is equipped with a first general winning award entrance sensor for detecting the entrance into the award winning openings 1 to 3, and detects an entrance into a general winning entrance 4 which can be entered when the player hits the ball right. It may be configured to include a sensor.

Next, FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the counter addition processing which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8680 of FIG. 133 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8682, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes addition of the normal prize ball number counter. In addition, a condition for executing addition of the normal prize ball number counter is provided, and when the gaming state is the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, and the jackpot is not the big hit, the prize ball flag (second big Prize mouth prize ball flag, first big prize mouth prize ball flag, second main game start mouth prize ball flag, first main game start mouth prize ball flag, general prize mouth 1 prize ball flag, general prize mouth 2 prize ball flag , The general prize opening 3 award ball flag and the general prize opening 4 award ball flag are turned on, the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is executed. Further, in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, addition of the normal time prize ball number counter may be executed, but In the non-probability variation state and non-time reduction game state, if the position to be fired does not change (for example, left-handed), in the probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, the normal prize ball number counter is added May be configured to perform 2. When the position to be fired changes in the non-probability variation state and non-time reduction game state (for example, it changes from left-handed to right-handed), the number of normal prize balls in the probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state It is preferable that the counter is not added. In the case of "1. Non-probability fluctuation state and non-time shortened game state, the position to be fired does not change", the number of prize balls in non-assistant game state (low base state) other than during big hit You will count. When the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is completed, the prize ball flag is turned off. As a supplement, the normal prize ball number counter consists of 2 bytes, and check whether the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls exceeds the upper limit (whether a carry flag is generated). If it exceeds, it is configured not to add (maintain the upper limit value of 2 bytes). Next, in step 8684, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the addition of the normal out-number counter. Incidentally, there is a condition to execute the addition of the normal out number counter, and the out number counter addition flag is set when the gaming state is the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, and the jackpot is not in the middle of a big hit. When it is on, the normal out-number counter is configured to be added. Also, the normal-time out number counter may be configured to execute addition in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, as in the normal-time award ball number counter. When the position to be fired does not change (for example, left-handed) when in the non-probability variation state and non-time reduction game state, the normal time out number counter is incremented in the probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state. 1. may be configured to perform In the non-probability variation state and the non-time reduction game state, when the position to be fired changes (for example, from left-handed to right-handed), in the probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state, the normal out-number counter It is preferable that the addition is not performed. When it is configured to "1. The position to be fired does not change when in the non-probability variation state and the non-time reduction game state", the number of outs in the non-auxiliary game state (low base state) other than during the big hit is counted. Will be done. As a supplement, the normal out-number counter consists of 2 bytes, and it is checked if the added value exceeds the upper limit (whether a carry flag is generated), and if it exceeds. Is not added to (is maintained at the upper limit value of 2 bytes). Since the out-number counter addition flag is used also in the addition of the total out-number counter in the next step 8686, it is not turned off even after the addition of the normal out-number counter is completed, and is kept on. Next, in step 8686, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the addition of the total out number counter. When the out number counter addition flag is on, the normal prize ball number counter is configured to be added, and when the addition is completed, the out number counter addition flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 8800). To do. As a supplement, the total out number counter is made up of 2 bytes, and it is checked if the added value exceeds the upper limit value (whether a carry flag is generated). Are not added (maintained at the upper limit value of 2 bytes).

Next, FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the arithmetic processing which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8800 of FIG. 128 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a section change. If Yes in step 8802, in step 8804, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes base calculation. Here, the base value is calculated by an expression of {(normal prize ball number counter value/normal out number counter value)×100}. Next, in step 8806, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the base value (ball entry state information) calculated in step 8804 on the ball entry state display device J10 as the current base value (ball entry state information). Stored for display, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8900). The base value (ball entry state information) stored here is a value rounded to the first decimal place. On the other hand, if No in step 8802, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 8900).

<Processing in second ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 136 is a flowchart relating to the ball entering state display device display control processing which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area called in step 1992 of FIG. 127 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 7100, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the stack pointer (address is A) in the second RAM area. Next, in step 7200, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (address is B) in the second stack area. Note that switching of the stack areas will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138 (seventh). By these processes, the stack area used in the incoming state display device display control process is changed from the first stack area to the second stack area. Will be changed to. Next, in step 7300, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the data of all the registers in the second stack area. Next, in step 8400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second RAM area clear check process. The second RAM area clear check process executed by the ball entering state display device control and the second RAM area clear check process executed by the ball entering state display device calculation process are the same process. Next, in step 7500, the CPU MC of the main control board M reads the detection information of each winning opening of the first RAM. Specifically, in the program of the second ROM, it is determined that the detection information of the first RAM is on by one edge detection (off→on), and if it is determined that there is a ball entering, Of the storage area (2 bytes) of the ball entry information in the 2RAM area, the flag of the storage area of the corresponding winning opening is turned on (1 is set). For example, when the detection information of the second main game starting opening of the first RAM area is ON, when it is determined by the program of the second ROM that the detection information of the second main game starting opening of the first RAM area is ON. , Once it is determined to be on, 1 is set to D1 which is the storage area of the ball entry information in the second RAM area. Then, the SW totaling process of step 8650 is executed based on the ball entry information set here. The storage area of the ball entry information in the second RAM area is not limited to 2 bytes, and can be changed to 1 byte or the like according to the number of ball entry sensors. Next, in step 7600 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a display content update process. Next, in step 7700, the CPUMC of the main control board M restores the data of all the registers saved in the second stack area. Next, in step 7800, the CPUMC of the main control board M returns the stack pointer (A) from the second RAM area.

Next, FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the display content update processing which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area according to the subroutine of step 7600 of FIG. 136 in the seventh embodiment. First, the functions of the first segment information and the second segment information will be described. First, the first segment information is information about the base value that is updated in real time in the current section, and the second segment information is information about the final value (final base value) in the section immediately before the current section. is there.

Next, a flowchart of the display content update process will be described. First, in step 7610, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the blinking state update. Here, when the first segment information is set to “blink” in step 7630, which will be described later, the blinking display control for switching on and off every 0.3 seconds during the display related to the first segment information is performed. If the second segment information is set to “blink” in step 7640 to be described later, the blinking display control for switching on and off every 0.3 seconds during the display related to the second segment information is performed. Execute. Next, in step 7620, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a display switching process of the first segment information and the second segment information. For example, the first segment information and the second segment information are switched every 5 seconds. The first segment information and the second segment information are composed of an identification segment and a ratio segment, and the two left 8-segment displays of the incoming state display device J10 identify the segment (display the base value of the current section. "BL." indicating that the right base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed or "b6." indicating that the final base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed), and the two right 8-segment displays are ratio segments (" "--" or the base value is displayed).

Next, in step 7630, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes setting (updating) of the first segment information. In the section A (when the display data switching flag 2 described later is 0), the display content of the first segment information is set to blink “bL.” on the identification segment and display “−−” on the ratio segment. It In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “bL.” is displayed in blinking on the identification segment when the normal out number counter value is 0 to 5999, and when the normal out number counter value is 6000 or more. “BL.” is lit up and the ratio segment is set to display the base value stored in step 8806. In the section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "bL." is blinkingly displayed in the identification segment when the normal out number counter value is 0 to 5999, and when the normal out number counter value is 6000 or more. “BL.” is lit up and the ratio segment is set to display the base value stored in step 8806. In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "bL." is displayed in blinking on the identification segment when the normal out number counter value is 0 to 5999, and when the normal out number counter value is 6000 or more. “BL.” is lit up and the ratio segment is set to display the base value stored in step 8806. As described above, the section C and the section N are sections that are switched each time the value of the total out number counter reaches 60000 after the section B.

Next, in step 7640, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes setting (updating) of the second segment information. In the section A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), the display content of the second segment information is set so that “b6.” is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “b6.” is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "b6." is lit up in the identification segment, and the final value (final base value) of the section B stored in step 8707 is displayed in the ratio segment. It In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), "b6." is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the section N-1 is displayed in the ratio segment.

Next, in step 7650, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the display data switching flag 2. The display data switching flag 2 is a flag that is updated in accordance with the display data switching flag 1, and is a display flag for displaying the base value on the ball entering state display device J10.

Next, FIG. 138 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the seventh embodiment. In the figure, the stacking of data in the stack area and the switching of the first stack area and the second stack area are shown, and the addresses circled show the stack pointers that have been set. .. First, processing is being executed in the first ROM/RAM area, and the stack pointer A (address is A) for using the first stack area is set. Next, the process is executed in the first ROM/RAM area, and then the process in the second ROM area is called. Next, in the processing of the second ROM area, the stack pointer A is saved in the second RAM area, and the stack pointer B (address is B) for using the second stack area is set. Next, after saving all the registers in the second stack area, the address of the stack pointer B is changed. Next, the processing by the second ROM/RAM area is executed to restore all the registers. Next, the stack pointer A in the first stack area is restored, the caller in the first ROM area is restored, and then the processing in the first ROM/RAM area is executed.

Next, FIG. 139 is an electrical overall configuration diagram in a first modification of the seventh embodiment. A feature of the modified example 1 of the seventh embodiment is a flow path image diagram of the game ball. In the modified example 1 of the seventh embodiment, the number of sensors for detecting the number of gaming balls out is not only one of the total discharge confirmation sensors C90s but also a first discharge confirmation sensor and a second discharge confirmation sensor. ing. The first discharge confirmation sensor is mainly configured to detect a winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, general winning opening) entering the ball when left-handed and a gaming ball entering the out opening. 2 The discharge confirmation sensor mainly detects the game ball that entered the winning opening (the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that enters the ball when the player hits the ball right. It is configured. When configured in this way and further configured to detect each winning opening in series in the SW totaling process of step 8650 (that is, the second winning opening → the first winning opening → the second main game start (Mouth→first main game start opening→general winning opening 1 to 4→confirm every time in order of discharge confirmation sensor)) A case may occur in which two balls are added by one counter addition process. At this time, the value of the total out number counter in which the section is changed may exceed 60000. In this case, the result of adding two balls may be stored as the final base value of the section. In this way, in order to calculate the incoming balls and the award balls that have occurred at the same time as the base value in the same section, by adding the values of the normal prize ball number counter and the normal out number counter for two balls, It is possible to calculate an accurate base value.

In the seventh embodiment and the modified example 1 of the seventh embodiment, the incoming state display device calculation process is called and executed in the main loop process, and the incoming state display device display control process is called and executed in the timer interrupt process. By configuring so as to enable efficient processing by distributing the processing, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the timer interrupt processing, the entry state display device calculation process and the entry state display device display are performed. It is also possible to configure to call and execute the control process. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing and reduce the capacity. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which only one display data switching flag is provided, and to refer to the display data switching flag updated in the entry state display device calculation process in the entry state display device display control process. To be

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the second RAM area clear check process is executed every time the ball entering state display device calculation process and the ball entering state display device display control process are executed, so that a sudden abnormality due to noise or the like occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second RAM area is checked when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the normal addition award ball count in the counter addition process). The counter value, the normal out-number counter value, the total out-number counter value reaching a predetermined number, etc.) may be used as a trigger. With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve the efficiency of processing without excessively checking the second RAM area.

In addition, in the above gaming machine, when the RAM clear processing (clear processing of the first RAM area) occurs during the prize ball payout operation (for example, the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned off, or abnormal due to noise or instantaneous power). It is assumed that power will be restored after power failure). For example, when the RAM clear processing occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 6) of payouts are completed during a specific number (for example, 10) of payout balls, the remaining stored information of the number of prize balls (for example, 4) is obtained. Although it is cleared, the payout for the remaining number of prize balls is not executed, and the payout operation is ended. However, in the incoming state display device J10, the base value calculated by adding a specific number of prize balls is Is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to intentionally adjust the ball input information such as the base value, and it is possible to generate the ball input information that is configured based on the number of balls that have entered the winning opening.

In addition, you may comprise so that the incoming state information for every set value may be displayed on the incoming state display device J10, for example, "bL." "b6. Is displayed, but the display of “b” may be changed to “set value” so that the incoming state information (base value) for each setting can be confirmed. Specifically, if it is setting 1, "1L." and "16." are displayed on the two left 7-segment indicators of the entry state display device J10, and if it is setting 2, entry state display device J10. "2L." and "26." are displayed on the two left 7-segment displays. In addition, it is also possible to operate the setting change button to switch the entry state information in the set value so that the entry state information for each setting can be confirmed, and further, at a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). It is also possible to confirm the incoming state information for each setting. In particular, if the target of setting change is only the probability of winning or losing a special symbol, there will be no difference in the base value for each setting value, so the same base value will always be obtained for any setting value, but the target of setting change is , In the case where the probability of winning/decreasing ordinary symbols and the probability of winning in small hits, etc. are reached (an example is given in paragraph 660 below), the base value for each set value will differ, so the incoming state information for each set value will be individually It is possible to check the base value according to the set value by managing and displaying on.

(Eighth Embodiment)
Next, FIG. 141 is an example of the first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) in the case where the winning probability of the main game symbols is changed according to the set value in the eighth embodiment. is there. In this example, the profit ratio given to the player is set to increase in the order of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3. More specifically, the winning probability (big hit) of the setting 1 at the time of non-stochastic fluctuation game is set to about 1/320, and the winning probability (big hit) of the setting 2 at the time of non-stochastic fluctuation game is set, It is set to about 1/318, and the winning probability (big hit) of the setting 3 at the time of non-probability variation game is set to about 1/317. Also, the probability of winning (big hit) of setting 1 at the time of probability variation game is set to about 1/160, and the probability of winning (big hit) of setting 2 at the time of probability variation game is set to about 1/159. The probability of winning (big hit) in setting 3 at the time of probability variation game is set to about 1/158. Therefore, the probability of winning (big hit) at the time of probability variation game is about twice as high as the probability of winning (big hit) at the time of non-stochastic variation game, and the ratio is configured to be common in all settings. .. This point is the same for the first main game side and the second main game side.

Further, as shown in the figure, even in the range of random numbers that is determined to be a hit (big hit) in the setting 1 in the non-probability variation game, it is also determined to be a hit (big hit) in the setting 2 in the non-probability variation game. "0-204" is included as a common range both in the random number value range and in the random number value range determined to be a hit (big hit) in the setting 3 at the time of non-probability variation game. Therefore, for example, in the case where a hold with a random number value of "0-204" occurs during a non-probability variation game, the hold is hit before the hold is exhausted and the lottery is performed ( If it is announced in advance that it is going to be a big hit (and if it is a random number value determined to be a big hit that falls outside the range of “0 to 204”, it is not notified beforehand), The higher the frequency that the holding is exhausted and the winning/winning lottery is performed (as a result, a big hit occurs) without executing the advance notification (prefetching effect), the higher the possibility that the setting is 3 (the setting value is set). It can be configured so that it can be suggested (in the order of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, the random number value determined as a hit (big hit) outside the range of “0 to 204” increases. is there). It should be noted that this point can be similarly applied to the probability variation game, and can be similarly applied to the first main game side or the second main game side. Also, since the range of random number values determined to be a hit (small hit) at a certain set value does not overlap with the range of random number values determined to be a hit (big hit) at another set value, which is the set value? Regardless of the above, in the case where a hold occurs with a random number value belonging to a range of random numbers that is determined to be a win (small win), the hold is hit (small win) before the hold is exhausted and the lottery is performed. If it is informed in advance that it is going to be a hit, it is possible to give an advance notification of a win (small hit) regardless of the set value (the pre-determination process related to the prefetching effect can be made common).

On the other hand, it is also possible to configure so that the setting value is not suggested by the prefetching effect, and an example thereof will be shown below. The pre-reading determination table in the table below is a table for the preliminary determination that the main control board M has. When the hold occurs, the main control board M refers to the look-ahead determination table based on the random number value related to the hold, derives the look-ahead code, and transmits it to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S is based on the information related to the set value transmitted from the main control board M in advance, and if the main control board M side is setting 3, for example, the sub-control board S corresponds to one of the pre-read codes A, B, and C. If the main control board M side is set to 2, the advance notification that it is a (big hit) is given, and if only one of the prefetch codes A and B is given, the advance notification that it is a big hit is made and the main control is performed. If the setting is 1 on the board M side, advance notification that the hit (big hit) is made only in the case of the prefetch code A is performed. With this configuration, it is difficult to infer the setting on the main control board M side from the execution tendency of the prefetching effect.

(9th Embodiment)
As described above, in order to perform the look-ahead effect, the random number value held as a hold is determined based on the game state (for example, non-probability variation game) and the set value (for example, setting 1). It may be inaccurate unless it is determined in advance whether or not it belongs to a random number value range (for example, “0 to 204”) determined to be a big hit. At that time, as configured in the second embodiment, in the case where the sub-control board S side determines whether or not to execute the prefetching effect, for example, as shown in step 2162 of FIG. It is necessary for the sub-control board S side to pre-determine whether or not the existing random number value belongs to the range of random number values determined to be a win (big hit). In that case, the sub-control board S side relates to the set value. Information is needed. However, it is not preferable to send the information about the set value held by the main control board M to the sub control board S in terms of security or ensuring the fairness of the game {transmitted to the sub control board S side. At this time, the information related to the set value may be intercepted and misused, and the information related to the set value is clearly notified to the outside on the side of the sub-control board S (for example, displayed by the amusement hall operator for maintenance purposes). Things can be stolen by game players.}. Therefore, a method for accurately performing the prefetching effect without transmitting the information about the set value held by the main control board M to the sub control board S will be described in detail below as a ninth embodiment.

First, in the second embodiment, when a new hold occurs, the probability of execution or non-execution of the prefetch effect lottery differs depending on whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. (That is, at the time of the pre-reading effect lottery, the information regarding the “win/win lottery random number” relating to the new suspension is referred to).

In this case, even if the winning/winning lottery random numbers relating to the new hold are the same, the situation may arise in which the winning/winning lottery result (whether it is a big hit or not) may be different for each setting, and further, the winning/winning lottery result may be different. As a result, even if the same variation mode lottery random number is acquired, a situation may occur in which the variation mode (for example, variation time) that is selected is different. As an example, in the case where a hold occurs that ""the winning/winning lottery random number" is "206" and the variation mode lottery random number is "900", the setting value is "big hit" and the "variation time is 60 seconds". It may be determined that the setting value is 1 and the setting value is “missing” and that the variation time is 30 seconds. In this case, in setting 3, the pre-reading effect lottery is configured to be easily executed (in order to notify that the jackpot expectation degree related to the new hold is high) (the pre-reading effect lottery probability is increased). On the other hand, there is a case where it is desirable that the setting 1 is configured so that the prefetch effect lottery is difficult to be executed (the prefetch effect lottery probability is low). However, when the sub-control board S side does not have information related to the current setting value (the sub-control board S side does not hold the current setting value), the sub-control board S determines that the win/no-win random number “206” is set. As a result of being unable to determine whether it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss", it is assumed that it is difficult to execute an accurate prefetching effect.

Therefore, in the gaming machine having the set value as in the sixth embodiment, when determining whether to execute or not execute the pre-reading effect lottery (lottery), without referring to the information regarding the “win/win lottery random number”, It may be configured such that only the information regarding the “variation mode lottery random number” and/or the “design lottery random number” is referred to. As an example, it is confirmed that the newly generated change time related to the hold is a long time (for example, 60 seconds) {in the case of a "change mode lottery random number belonging to such a random value range". For example, in the main game table 3 of FIG. 26, when it is any of “1000 to 1023”, a variation mode for a long time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. In the case of}, the pre-reading effect lottery that wins with a specific probability (for example, 1/3) is executed, while it is determined that the variation time is short (for example, 10 seconds). It is a case where it is a "variation mode lottery random number" belonging to such a random number value range, and, for example, in the main game table 3 of FIG. 26, when it is any of "0-2", it is a big hit. Regardless of whether or not a short-time (for example, 10 seconds) variation mode is selected}, the pre-reading effect that wins at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/50) that is lower than the specific probability For example, a lottery is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the prefetching effect regarding the "predicting that the variation time related to the newly generated hold will be long time" as the prefetching effect.

Similarly, when performing the look-ahead effect lottery only with reference to the "symbol lottery random number", "when a new hold occurs, the look-ahead effect lottery is performed based only on the symbol lottery random number, and the new hold occurs. It can also be read as "effect that suggests which stop symbol is related" (effect that suggests the symbol type (whether or not it is a probability fluctuation jackpot symbol) when the new hold is a jackpot). ..

Next, another method for accurately performing the prefetching effect without transmitting the information about the set value held by the main control board M to the sub-control board S (whether the main control side determines whether or not the result is correct). The method) will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 142 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process in the ninth embodiment. 23. This embodiment is different from FIG. 23 in that the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a pre-reading determination process in step 1316-1 (9th).

Next, FIG. 143 is a flowchart relating to the subroutine of the prefetching determination processing in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1316-1-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current setting value is 3 (=setting 3). If Yes in step 1316-1-2, in step 1316-1-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the win/loss determination table in the setting 3 (the win/loss determination table has the same contents as the win/loss lottery table). , Because the reference timing is different, it is provided as another table), and it is determined whether or not the obtained second main game content determination random number is a win (big hit). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-3, in step 1316-1-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter value and the suspension information (the suspension number including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number). On the basis of this, referring to the corresponding hit determination limited frequency table (the determination limited table has the same contents as the limited frequency table, but is provided as another table because the reference timing is different). , Determine the variation mode. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1316-1-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines when the corresponding failure occurs based on the limited frequency counter value and the suspension information (the suspension number including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number). The variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table of. Next, in the case of No in step 1316-1-2, in step 1316-1-6, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current setting value is 2 (=setting 2). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-6, in step 1316-1-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the win/loss determination table in the setting 2 (the determination table has the same contents as the win/loss lottery table, Since the reference timing is different, it is provided as a separate table) and it is determined whether or not the acquired second main game content determination random number is a win (big hit). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-7, in step 1316-1-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter value and the hold information (the hold number including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number). On the basis of this, referring to the corresponding hit determination limited frequency table (the determination limited table has the same contents as the limited frequency table, but is provided as another table because the reference timing is different). , Determine the variation mode. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1316-1-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the corresponding lost time is based on the limited frequency counter value and the suspension information (the suspension number including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number). The variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table of. Next, in the case of No in step 1316-1-6, in step 1316-1-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current setting value is 1 (=setting 1). If Yes in step 1316-1-10, in step 1316-1-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the win/loss determination table in the setting 1 (the determination table has the same contents as the win/loss determination table, Since the reference timing is different, it is determined whether or not the acquired second main game content determination random number is a win (big hit) by referring to (provided as another table). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-11, in step 1316-1-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter value and the suspension information (the suspension number including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number). On the basis of the above, referring to the corresponding hit determination limited frequency table (the determination limited table has the same contents as the limited frequency table, but is provided as another table because the reference timing is different). , The variation mode is determined. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1316-1-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the corresponding lost time is based on the limited frequency counter value and the suspension information (the suspension number including the acquired random number value, the variation random number). The variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency table of. When the processing of step 1316-1-4, step 1316-1-5, step 1316-1-8, step 1316-1-9, step 1316-1-12, and step 1316-1-13 is completed, step 1316- In 1-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the pre-reading right/wrong command and the pre-reading variable mode command based on the win/fail judgment result and the judgment result of the fluctuation mode, and executes the next process (step 1318). Transition. Even if No in step 1316-1-10, the process moves to the next process (step 1318).

In this way, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a judgment as to whether or not the variation mode is true after determining whether or not a random number value (for example, a main game random number value or variation mode random number value) is obtained. Then, by transmitting the judgment result (pre-reading success/failure command) and the variation mode result (pre-reading variation mode command) to the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the main control side set value. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the prefetching effect according to the winning/rejecting result and the variation mode without being affected by.

In this example, the pre-reading determination process is performed (that is, the random number value acquired in the acquired register is directly determined) before the acquired random number value is held, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to store the random number value once in the RAM and then read the stored random number value to perform the prefetch determination process.

Next, FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect execution determination processing in the ninth embodiment. Differences from FIG. 69 (second) are step 2155 (ninth) and step 2158 (ninth). If Yes in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2155 whether or not there is a hit and hold, and if yes, the process proceeds to step 2156. On the other hand, if No in step 2155, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2142). In Step 2158 (ninth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S preliminarily determines the change time based on the look-ahead change mode command transmitted from the CPUMC of the main control board M. In step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big-hit hold, based on the pre-reading hit/miss command transmitted from the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Further, the information about the random number value held as a hold in the main control board M can be transmitted to the sub control board S (eg, the first main game content determination random number described above at the timing of step 1310 in FIG. 23). (Three random numbers, that is, the winning/unwinning lottery random number for determining the winning/winning, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation mode lottery random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol) can be transmitted}, Whether or not it is determined as a win (big hit) when the holding is exhausted, the main control board M transmits information on whether or not a special game has occurred to the sub control board S (for example, at step 1414 in FIG. It can be grasped on the side of the sub-control board S by transmitting the win/no win lottery result regarding the game symbol, or in the case of a big hit, a special game start display instruction command is transmitted in step 1608 of FIG. 28). Focusing on such a premise configuration, there can be mentioned another method for accurately performing the prefetching effect without holding the information about the set value on the sub-control board S side.

More specifically, in a non-stochastic variation game state, information regarding a random number value held as a certain hold in the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as “204”, and the certain When information indicating that a special game has occurred is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S when the hold is exhausted, the main control is performed after the execution of the special game and in the non-stochastic variation game state. When the information regarding the random number value held as another hold on the board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as “204”, the sub control board S side is more likely than the other hold is exhausted. Since it can be presumed that a special game is scheduled to occur, the sub-control board S, on the basis of this presumption, has a look-ahead effect (advance notification) regarding a hit (big hit) before the other hold is exhausted. It becomes feasible.

That is, on the side of the sub-control board S, the information about the random number value held as a hold and the event that occurs when the hold is exhausted are accumulated as a game history (the side of the sub-control board S learns By doing so, the look-ahead effect based on the game history can be accurate as advance notification regarding a win (big hit).

However, in this way, the information regarding the random number value held as a hold and the event that occurs when the hold is exhausted are accumulated as a game history (the sub control board S side learns). In the method of improving the accuracy of the prefetch effect based on the game history, the main control is required because the setting on the main control board M side is maintained (fixed) at a certain set value. If the sub-control board S side infers/understands that the set value on the board M side has been changed (for example, if the power is cut off, a command indicating that the set value has been changed is sent from the main control board M side. When transmitted), it is desirable to clear and re-store the information that has been stored up to that point.

In addition, when the first main game win/loss table (second main game win/loss table) of the main control board M is set within the random number range as shown in FIG. 141, the non-probability variation game state Under the circumstances, the information regarding the random number value held as a certain hold in the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as “206”, and when the certain hold is exhausted, the special information is specially sent from the main control board M. When the information indicating that a game has occurred is transmitted to the sub-control board S, {the random number "206" is determined to be a hit (big hit) because only the setting 3} is held by the main control board M. Even if the information about the set value being set is not transmitted to the sub control board S (in other words, the information about the set value is not held on the side of the sub control board S), the side of the sub control board S is on the main control board M. It becomes possible to know that the side is the setting 3 (in this case, the sub-control board S side holds in advance the correspondence relationship that the random number value “206” is determined to be a hit (big hit)=setting 3). Need to be kept).

Furthermore, the first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) of the main control board M is set in a random value range as shown in FIG. 145, and even on the sub control board S side. When the same table is provided, that is, when the random value range determined to be a hit (big hit) at a certain setting value does not overlap with the random value range determined to be a hit (big hit) at another setting value ( In this example, the non-stochastic variation game state and setting 1:0 to 204, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and setting 2:205 to 410, the non-stochastic variation gaming state and setting 3:411 to 617), the non-stochastic variation gaming state Under a certain situation, information about the random number value held as a certain hold in the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as any of “411 to 617”, and the main control is performed when the certain hold is exhausted. When the information indicating that the special game is generated is transmitted from the board M to the sub control board S, the information regarding the set value held by the main control board M is not transmitted to the sub control board S (in other words, in other words, Even if the sub-control board S side does not hold the information about the set value), the sub-control board S side can grasp that the main control board M side is the setting 3. Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, the sub control board S side can quickly grasp which is the set value on the main control board M side.

Similarly, under the non-probability variation game state, the information about the random number value held as a certain hold in the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as any of "0 to 204". When the information indicating that the special game is generated is not transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S when the certain hold is exhausted (in the case of “miss”), the sub control board S side is the main Since it is possible to recognize that the control board M side is the setting 2 or 3, from this point of view also, the set value of the main control board M side on the sub control board S side is (whichever is the possibility. It can be said that it is possible to quickly grasp (whether there is).

As described above, in each of the embodiments described above (especially, an embodiment having a plurality of setting values), the main control board M grasps the setting value information, and based on the grasped setting value information, the winning/winning lottery table of the main game symbol is set. Although processing such as selection is performed, it is expected that strengthening against fraud and the like can be expected by configuring so that the control program of the main control board M as well as the sub control board S cannot grasp the setting information. .. Therefore, as a modification example, a mode in which parameters such as a winning value according to the setting can be set independently of the control program of the main control board M (CPU) will be exemplified.

Specifically, in this modification, the winning probability data storage device Q20, which is an area different from the normal storage area, is a winning probability table corresponding to a set value (three stages of settings 1 to 3 in this modification). The CPUMC of the main control board M can read data of the winning value or the like corresponding to the set value set by the setting changing means Q10 among the data of the winning value or the like stored in the winning value data storage device Q20. It is configured to be able to. Describing in detail with reference to the schematic block diagram of the hardware in the present modification example of FIG. 146, the CPU MC of the main control board M and the winning value data storage device Q20 are connected by an 8-bit data bus, and the winning value is A data storage device (ROM) Q20 is electrically connected so as to be able to transmit a lower address (eg, lower 2 bits “A0·A1” address signal line) and a read request signal (eg, read signal). Further, the terminal corresponding to the higher address (for example, the address of “A14·A15”) of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 is connected to the setting changing means Q10, and the setting value output from the setting changing means Q10 is set. The corresponding signal becomes the designation data of the higher address (for example, the address of "A14/A15") of the winning value data storage device Q20.

Next, the configuration of the setting changing means Q10 in the schematic block diagram will be described in detail. The setting changing means Q10 in this modification includes a setting key switch similar to a rotary switch, and three setting value display LEDs for notifying the setting values 1 to 3 operated by the setting key switch. The setting key switch in this modification is configured to rotate rightward by two steps after the setting key is inserted, and is biased to the first step position between the first step and the second step. There is. When the setting key is inserted into such a setting key switch and rotated rightward by one step, the setting value display LED corresponding to the currently selected setting value is configured to light up. The set value is incremented by one each time it is rotated rightward to the rotatable position. It should be noted that when the set value of 3 which is the maximum value is set and further rotated once, the set value returns to the minimum value of 1. The setting value set by the setting key switch is held by the setting changing means Q10, and is a 2-bit signal (“01” for setting 1, “10” for setting 2, and “11” for setting 3). )), and the output data is electrically connected so as to be input to the upper bit terminal of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 as described above.

Next, the configuration of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 in the schematic block diagram will be described in detail. The winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 in this modified example exemplifies a storage device having an 8-bit data storage area corresponding to 16-bit addresses from 0000h to FFFFh, and is shown in the table of FIG. 146. In this way, the hit value for each set value is non-probability variation game state (low probability)/probability variation game in correspondence with the upper address "01" "10" "11" (that is, "40h" "80h" "C0h"). It is stored for each state (high probability). Further, the lead terminal (read request terminal) of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20, the address of the lower 2 bits, and the data bus are connected to the CPU MC of the main control board M. Although not shown in the schematic block diagram, the address buses from “A3” to “A13” are connected to GND, and access to the storage area corresponding to the address shown in the table of FIG. 146 is possible. It is impossible.

(Action)
Next, regarding the flow of reading the winning value corresponding to each setting value in the present modification example, the setting value "1" is set by the setting changing means Q10, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state). A case will be described as an example. The CPUMC of the main control board M wins among the addresses corresponding to the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state) when executing a predetermined process that should refer to the winning value (for example, when performing the winning/winning lottery). The data address (00h) corresponding to the lower value of the value is designated and the data of the designated address is read. Then, since the upper address of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 is fixed to "4000h" corresponding to the setting value "1" by the output data from the setting changing means Q10, it is "4000h" data. “11001100” is output from the data bus. Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M fetches the value of “11001100” output to the data bus into a register etc., and subsequently, among the addresses corresponding to the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state), the winning value. The data (01h) corresponding to the higher value of is designated and the data of the designated address is read. Then, since the upper address of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 is fixed to "4000h" corresponding to the setting value "1" by the output data from the setting changing means Q10, it is "4001h" data. "00000000" is output from the data bus. Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily fetches the value "00000000" output to the data bus into a register or the like, and combines it with the previously fetched lower address data "11001100", which is a 16-bit value "0000000011001100". (Decimal number 205)" is obtained. Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M compares the random number value “N” for determining the win/fail with the winning value obtained as described above, and the random number value “N” is equal to or less than the winning value (N≦winning value) It is determined whether or not, and if it is equal to or less than the winning value, it is determined to be a win.

With the above-described configuration, the CPU MC of the main control board M does not know which setting value the setting value is originally, but it is possible to realize the lottery according to the setting value, which is suitable as a countermeasure against fraud. A game machine can be provided.

In this modification, a ROM that stores a normal program and a different ROM are used, but it is also possible to use a common ROM and configure some areas as described above. Further, in the present modification, the storage area corresponding to the set value is read by hardware, but it is also possible to secure fraud prevention by making a certain restriction by software.

Specifically, in the processing before shifting to the main routine in the main control board M in each embodiment (initialization processing after power-on), the output information (setting value) from the setting changing means Q10 is read and read. The storage area for the winning value according to the output information is specified (the storage area to be read at the time of the lottery is specified). Then, in a process other than the initialization process, that is, in the main routine process or the interrupt process that is performed after completion of the initialization process, the specified storage area is provided without providing the process of reading the output information (setting value) from the setting changing unit Q10. Configure to use the winning value of. With this configuration, it is possible to configure a program in which the setting value information cannot be read under conditions other than specific conditions (other than the initialization process) after the power is turned on, and it can be expected to contribute to fraud prevention. ..

As described above, in each embodiment, by specifying the storage area of the winning value table according to the set value by the hardware and the software under the predetermined condition, the lottery or the like is performed with the probability according to the set value. Since the setting value information cannot be confirmed in the normal processing routine in the main control board M, the setting value information cannot be recognized not only in the main control board M but also in the sub control board S. It can be expected that fraud such as stealing the setting value information can be effectively suppressed.

In the pre-reading determination process described above, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect by referring to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect is executed without referring to the set value. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, the pre-reading code A (random number range that is a big hit regardless of the setting value), the pre-reading code D (random number range that is a small hit regardless of the setting value), the pre-reading code E (setting value) in the pre-reading determination table described above. If it is determined to be a random number range that is deviated regardless of), the pre-reading lottery can be executed, while pre-reading codes B and C (random numbers that may be a big hit and a big hit depending on the set value) are decided. In such a case, the prefetch lottery may not be executed.

With the above-described configuration, the sub-control board can be configured to be able to execute the prefetching effect by using a common process regardless of the set value.

(10th Embodiment)
Next, FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the main processing on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. A difference from FIG. 6 which is the present embodiment is that FIG. 147 illustrates the initial setting process of step 999 (tenth) performed after the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the initial setting process on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 999-1, the main control board M executes each port register setting process. Next, in step 999-2, the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key (setting key switch) has been operated. If Yes in step 999-2, the process proceeds to step 999-4. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 999-2, the main control board M executes the setting change process (setting change process is as shown in FIG. 125) in step 999-3, and in step 999-3-1, After executing the RAM clear, the main control board M proceeds to the processing of step 999-4. Next, in step 999-4, the main control board M reads the setting value information. Next, in step 999-5, the main control board M determines whether or not the set value is 1. If Yes in step 999-5, in step 999-6, the main control board M reads the data address corresponding to the setting 1, and in step 999-7, the main control board M reads the read data value (65535). ) Is set to the random number upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning lottery random number), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1002). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 999-5, in step 999-8, the main control board M determines whether or not the set value is 2. If Yes in step 999-8, in step 999-9, the main control board M reads the data address corresponding to the setting 2, and in step 999-10, the main control board M reads the read data value (65501). ) Is set to the random number upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning lottery random number), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1002). If No in step 999-8, in step 999-11, the main control board M reads the data address corresponding to the setting 3, and in step 999-12, the main control board M reads the read data value (65301 ) Is set to the random number upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning lottery random number), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1002).

Next, FIG. 149 is a table showing a random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number set in the initial setting process. First, the non-probability variation game will be described. In the setting 1, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65535 in the non-probability variation game. As for the random number value, the random number values 0 to 204 (register number 205) are set as big hits, and the random number values 205 to 65535 are set to be lost. Next, in setting 2, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65501 during the non-probability variation game. As for the random number value, the random number values 0 to 204 (register number 205) are set as big hits, and the random number values 205 to 65501 are set to be lost. Next, in setting 3, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65301 during the non-probability variation game. As for the random number value, the random number values 0 to 204 (register number 205) are big hits, and the random number values 205 to 65301 are set to be lost.

Next, the case of probability change will be described. In setting 1, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number at the time of probability variation game is 65535 as in setting 1 at the time of non-probability variation game. As for the random number value, the random number values 0 to 409 (registered number 410) are a big hit, and the random number values 410 to 65535 are set to be lost. Next, in setting 2, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65501 in the probability varying game, as in setting 2 in the non-probability varying game. As for the random number value, the random number values 0 to 409 (registered number 410) are set as big hits, and the random number values 410 to 65501 are set to be lost. Next, in the setting 3, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65301 in the probability variation game as in the setting 3 in the non-probability variation game. As for the random number value, the random number values 0 to 409 (registered number 410) are a big hit, and the random number values 410 to 65301 are set to be lost.

With this configuration, the difference in the winning probability due to the change of the setting value is caused by the difference in the random number upper limit value under the same game state (for example, non-probability variation game, probability variation). Become. Therefore, it is possible to make the determination table for the win/loss lot common while changing the winning probability for each setting, and it is possible to reduce the need to execute a separate process for each set value in the prefetch process or the win/loss lot. ..

(Eleventh embodiment)

Next, a modification example in the case of changing the winning probability of the main game symbol according to the set value in the eighth embodiment will be described. This modified example is significantly different from the eighth embodiment in that the two-stage lottery is carried out based on the winning probability in the high probability state. Hereinafter, the present modification will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart of the random number acquisition process according to the present modification, FIG. 150(a) is a determination table provided for the first lottery process in the main lottery process, and FIG. 150(b) is the first lottery process. 2 is a determination table provided for a lottery process. Note that, in FIG. 150(a), the determination value for lottery is set for each set value, but in FIG. 150(b), the determination value for lottery common to all the set values is provided. is there.

First, the flowchart of the random number acquisition process according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 150. Since the processing proceeds in the same flow as the flowchart in FIG. 7 of the present embodiment in this modification, the main difference is the main game content determination according to the subroutine of step 1300 in the first embodiment (FIG. 7), which is the main difference. Of the random number acquisition process, the flow chart part regarding the first main game starting port will be described.

In this modified example, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game starting mouth entrance information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting mouth A10. Or not. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a first main game starting mouth entry command, which is a command related to the fact that the player has entered the first main game starting mouth A10, to the sub-main controller SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls related to the main game (particularly the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, 4). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306′, the CPU MC of the main control board M selects a first winning/winning lottery random number, a second winning/winning lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery as the first main game content determination random number. get. That is, in this modified example, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning/unwinning lottery random number for determining winning/winning obtains two random numbers, the first winning/winning lottery random number and the second winning/winning lottery random number. As in the case of this embodiment, these four random numbers (especially the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number) are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. It is supposed to do.

Next, in step 1307, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a prefetching process corresponding to each random number acquired to execute the prefetching effect based on the acquired random number. Specifically, by comparing the obtained first win/win lottery random numbers and the second win/win lottery random numbers with separate comparing means, it is determined whether or not each win/win lottery random number is a winning value. So that information based on can be set as a command in step 1310 which will be described later, and for the symbol lottery random number and the variation mode lottery, what symbol is selected or what variation mode is selected. And the predictable information is processed in step 1310 so that it can be set as a command.

Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Note that, in FIG. 150, since it is the same as the processing routine for the first main game starting port, description of the processing routine for the second main game starting port is omitted.

Next, the processing when the variation start condition is satisfied will be described with reference to the table in FIG. Here, the entire processing flow is the same as steps 1403 to 1500 in this embodiment (see FIG. 25) except for step 1410-1, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Also in this modified example, when the variation start condition is satisfied in step 1403 as in the present embodiment, in step 1405 and step 1406, the present symbol variation temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is concerned. The first main game content determination random number is read out, deleted from the RAM area, and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (holding digest processing).

After that, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M first refers to the first win/win lottery random number determination table shown in FIG. 150 to determine whether or not the first win/win lottery random number is a win. Next, it is confirmed whether the current game state is a normal game state (low probability state) or a high probability game state, and if it is a high probability state, it is a hit without determining the second random number random selection. judge. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the hand normal gaming state (low probability state) and the first winning/winning lottery random number is winning, the second winning/winning lottery random number determination shown in FIG. 150 is further performed. By referring to the table, it is determined whether or not the second win/win random number is a win.

Here, in the present modified example, the table of the first winning/winning lottery random numbers is 2050/65536 (1/31.969) in setting 1, 2100/65536 (1/31.208) in setting 2, and 2150 in setting 3. /65536 (1/30.482), and the table of the first winning/discarding lottery random number is 1/2.5 for all settings. In other words, in this modified example, the probability of winning (big hit) in the normal game state is 1/79.92 in setting 1, 1/78.02 in setting 2, and 1/76.20 in setting 3, and the high probability game state. The winning probability (big hit) in 1 is 1/31.969 in setting 1, 2 is 31.208 in setting 2, and 1/30.482 in setting 3. Therefore, in this modified example, the probability change ratio between the normal game state and the high-probability game state is 2.5 times that is common to all the set values.

As described above, by adopting two win/loss lottery random numbers as in the present modification, it is possible to finely set the hit probability in the normal time on the assumption that the win/loss is determined using a random number value within a predetermined range. Also, it is possible to obtain the effect that the winning ratio with the high probability can be made completely the same in each setting.

In this modified example, when the current gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, it is determined that the "winning" is achieved in the first main game without determining the second win/loss random number. However, even in the high probability game state, the second winning/winning lottery can be executed after setting the second winning/winning lottery random number to 1/1 and setting the second winning/winning lottery to always be “win”. is there. With this configuration, both lottery processes are commonly executed under the condition that the number of characters is different depending on the game state, so that the processing speed can be made uniform regardless of the game state. it can.

(Modification from 11th Embodiment)
Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the two-stage lottery is carried out on the basis of the winning probability in the high probability state. However, regarding the second-stage lottery (second winning/winning lottery random number determination processing), As described above, one determination table is provided for each game state (a low probability win/win lottery table and a high probability win/win lottery table), and the first-stage lottery (first win/win lottery random number It is also possible to perform the lottery by using a different determination table for each set value.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of the main game content determination random number in the eleventh embodiment, the first win/win lottery random number among win/win lottery random numbers for determining win/loss is different for each set value as shown in FIG. 151. As random numbers for comparison with the probability table, the second win/loss lottery random numbers are provided for each game state as shown in FIG. 151, and the lottery probability table common to each set value (one for low probability and one for high probability) Obtained as random numbers for comparison. Note that the look-ahead determination or the like regarding the acquired random number is the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

Next, a process when the variation start condition is satisfied (a process after the variation start condition is satisfied in step 1403 in the eleventh embodiment (also refer to this embodiment if necessary)) will be described. At step 1405 and step 1406, the first main game content determination random number relating to the present symbol variation, which is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, is read out, deleted from the RAM area, and temporarily stored. Shift the remaining pending information that is present (pending digest processing).

Thereafter, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M first refers to the first winning/winning lottery random number determination table corresponding to the set value shown in FIG. 151, and determines whether or not the first winning/winning lottery random number is a win. Determine whether. Next, it is confirmed whether the current game state is the normal game state (low probability state) or the high probability game state, and if it is the high probability state, the second winning/winning random number determination table for the high probability state is used. The second win/win lottery random number is determined by referring to the second win/win lottery random number determination table for the low probability state in the case of the normal game state (low probability state). It is determined whether or not there is. Then, if any of the random numbers is a hit, a flag or the like is set so that a big hit occurs due to the present symbol variation. It should be noted that, if one wins/wins lottery result in a win, it is possible to omit the other process as in the eleventh embodiment.

Here, in the present modification example, the table of the first win/win lottery random number is 98/100 in the setting 1, 99/100 in the setting 2, and 100/100 in the setting 3, and the win/win of the second win/win lottery random number. Of the lottery random number determination table, the table for the low probability state is common to all settings 210/65536 (1/318.4), and the table for the high probability state is common to all settings 1001/65536 (1/65.5) , Has become. That is, in this modification, the probability of winning (big hit) in the normal game state (low probability state) is 1/318.4 in setting 1, 1/315.2 in setting 2, and 1/312.0 in setting 3. The winning probability (big hit) in the high-probability game state is 1/66.8 in setting 1, 1/66.1 in setting 2, and 1/65.5 in setting 3. Therefore, in this modification, the probability change ratio between the normal game state (low probability state) and the high probability game state is 1001/210 times (4.776... .. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning probability ratio between the normal game state (low probability state) and the high probability state is the second probability random number determination table for low probability and the second random number determination table for high probability. It becomes the ratio of. For this reason, it is extremely easy to uniformly set the ratio, and in particular, as in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers per win in the winning/winning lottery table at the time of high probability is prime (1001 in this embodiment). Even in this case, the probability ratio for each setting can be the same. (This point is the same as the eleventh embodiment).

In addition, in the present modified example, whether or not the final big hit depends largely on the parameter of the second win/loss lottery random number. Therefore, it is also preferable to determine the execution of the prefetching effect based only on the information about this parameter. is there. More specifically, the actual winning probability (probability of finally being a big hit) in the present embodiment is calculated by summing the winning probability of the first winning/winning lottery random number and the winning probability of the second winning/winning lottery random number. Since the winning probability of the first win/win lottery random number is set to be extremely high (98/100 even in the setting 1), it depends largely on the win/no win result of the second win/win lottery random number. Therefore, the parameter of the second winning/winning lottery random number is important in the pre-reading determination processing for generating the information for indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit.

From such a fact, in the execution determination of the actual pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading process of the sub-control board in this embodiment), in the process of deciding whether or not to execute the effect and the content determination process, the result of the second win/win lottery random number is It is preferable to set the dependency of the information generated based on the high. (Of course, when the winning probability of the first win/loss lottery random number is extremely high as in this modified example, the win/failure prediction at the time of pre-reading determination may be performed based only on the information based on the win/no win result of the second win/win lottery random number. .)

Specifically, in the case of performing the success/failure determination stepwise by using a plurality of random numbers as in the present modification and the eleventh embodiment, determination of the prefetching effect (including whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed and the prefetching determination process is included). ) In this case, it is preferable to increase the dependency of information having a lower winning probability (the determination result of the first winning/winning lottery random number in the eleventh embodiment, the determination result of the second winning/winning lottery random number in this modification). By doing so, the function of suggesting a hit by the look-ahead effect can be appropriately performed.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the above-described second embodiment, the probability variation game state ends (sometimes referred to as ST machine) depending on the number of variations of the main game symbol when the probability variation game state is entered after the end of the special game. Here, when the probability variation game state as in the second embodiment can be ended by the number of variations of the main game symbol, when a configuration having a plurality of set values as described in detail in the eighth embodiment is applied, Probability fluctuation Probability of winning a jackpot by the end of the gaming state (sometimes referred to as the probability of continuous play) varies depending on the set value, and the advantageous state for the player is not equal for each gaming machine. There is a fear. Here, the configuration capable of solving such a problem will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 152 is an example of a first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) in the twelfth embodiment. The first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table), Since it is similar to FIG. 141, the description is omitted.

In the table referred to in the non-probability variation game state in the first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table), setting 1 and setting 2 are set in ascending order of profit rate given to the player. , Setting 3 is the order. More specifically, the probability of winning (big hit) of setting 1 in the non-stochastic fluctuation game state is set to about 1/320, and the probability of winning (big hit) of setting 2 in the non-stochastic fluctuation game state is set. However, it is set to about 1/318, and the winning probability (big hit) of the setting 3 in the non-probability variation game state is set to about 1/317. On the other hand, in the table referred to in the non-probability variation game state in the first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table), the winning probability (big hit) is the same regardless of the setting value. It is configured. More specifically, in all the setting values of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, the winning probability (big hit) is set to about 1/159.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the twelfth embodiment, after the big hit, it is configured to shift to the probability variation game state regardless of the big hit symbol related to the big hit, and to the probability variation number counter MP51c. 80 times is set, in other words, the number of probability changes is 80 times. Further, since the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is 412/65536, the probability of being able to win the jackpot in any of the fluctuations of the main game symbol of 80 times which is the number of probability changes (sometimes referred to as the consortium probability),
{1-(1-412/65536) ⁸⁰ }×100≈39.62(%)
Therefore, even if the set values are different, the probability of the same extended villa is the same.

Also, the ratio of the jackpot probability between the jackpot probability in the non-stochastic variation game state and the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is
<Setting 1>
(412/65536)÷(205/65536)≈2.01
<Setting 2>
(412/65536)÷(206/65536)≈2.00
<Setting 3>
(412/65536)÷(2077/65536)≈1.99
Has become
When setting 1 which is the setting value with the largest magnification and setting 3 which is the setting value with the smallest magnification are compared,
It is 2.01÷1.99×100≈101(%) (the value of 101% may be referred to as the setting difference of the jackpot ratio).
The setting difference of the jackpot ratio may be changed, and if reduced, the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state may be changed for each set value. Therefore, it is preferable that the setting difference of the jackpot ratio is within 110 (%).

By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment has three set values of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3 as set values, and in the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state. By adopting a configuration in which the jackpot probability can be different due to the difference in the set value, a novel and entertaining feature of advancing the game while guessing to the player how much the current set value is advantageous It is possible to teach, and by setting the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state to be the same jackpot probability even if the setting value is different, the main game symbol in the case of transition to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game In a gaming machine configured such that the probability variation game state ends depending on the number of times of variation (sometimes referred to as ST machine), it is possible to prevent the situation that the consort probability in the probability variation game state differs depending on the set value. It is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine in which the profit rate provided in the probability variation gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, does not differ depending on the gaming machine being played.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the big hit probability in the probability variation game state is configured not to differ depending on the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit probability in the probability variation game state may differ depending on the set value. You may comprise. In such a case, the profit ratio of the probability variation game state that is advantageous to the player should not be excessively deviated by the set value (so that the player can recognize that the probability variation game state = the advantageous state). ,
Big hit probability in the set value that maximizes the probability of jackpot in the probability variation game state (for example, setting 3)÷Probability of big hit in the set value that minimizes the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state (for example, setting 1)×100≦105( %) is preferable.

(13th Embodiment)
<Outline of test terminals>
Here, the test terminal according to the present embodiment and the information output from the test terminal will be supplementarily described. In this embodiment, although not mounted on the gaming machine supplied to the market (gaming store), a connector is mounted (a buffer IC or the like is mounted only at the time of testing in order to easily perform various ball output tests and the like. Therefore, it is configured to be able to output various kinds of information about the gaming machine. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a mounting region for the test terminals TS is formed in the upper center of the main control board, and at the time of the test, the corresponding land (electrically connected to the control circuit is connected to the corresponding land). By mounting (soldering) one or a plurality of buffer ICs (for example, 74HC244) and a connection connector so as to correspond to the circuit pattern), predetermined game information can be output from the test terminal TS.

<Test terminal output information>
Next, the information output from the above-mentioned test terminal will be briefly described. As described above, since the test terminal is intended to easily perform a payout test, etc., it is configured to output information for grasping the winning condition of the payout and the progress of the game in real time as much as possible. In this embodiment, a signal input to the main control board M for a game, "out ball count", "touch state", "normal symbol operation gate", "first main game starting opening", "second main game starting opening". "Normal prize hole", "1st prize hole prize", "2nd prize hole prize" are output, and "wire break short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal""door open signal""magnetic detection signal""radio wave detection""Signal""impact detection signal" is output, and also as a signal regarding the state of the gaming machine "condition device is operating""role continuous operation device is operating""1st main game symbol hit""1st main game symbol fluctuation""Medium""Second main game symbol per""Second main game symbol changing""First main game high probability state""First main game variation time shortened state""Second main game high probability state""Second Main game variation time shortened state, "Auxiliary game symbol high probability state", "Auxiliary game symbol variation time shortened state", "Auxiliary game open extension state", "Special electric auditors active", "1st prize hole solenoid driving", " The second big winning opening solenoid is being driven""Auxiliary game symbol hit""Auxiliary game symbol changing""Normal electric auditor working""Gaming machine error state" is output, and information about other symbols is "Main game symbol" The "symbol data" and "the symbol data of the auxiliary game symbol" are output. In addition, when the setting device is installed, the operating state of the setting device (for example, whether it is in the setting change mode or the setting display mode) and the set value information are also output, and the entering state When the display device J10 is installed, the information displayed on the display device is also output.

<Test terminal output information output processing>
In the present embodiment, a wide variety of information is output from the viewpoint of test information, but the output timing of these information will be briefly described below with reference to FIG. 153. Note that FIG. 153 shows only partial inputs/outputs to simplify the description.

<Signal input to main control board M regarding game and signal regarding abnormality>
Regarding these input signals, the signals input to the main control board M separately from the processing of the CPU MC are directly distributed and output via the buffer IC for the test terminal. When the sensor input of the first main game starting port is illustrated, as shown in FIG. 153, the signal of the starting port sensor input to the main control board M is converted into a signal of the level of the logic circuit by the input circuit, and the input buffer. Entered in. At the input timing of the CPUMC (winning determination processing in interrupt processing), the CPUMC opens the input buffer by designating the corresponding input port, and the input circuit and the data bus are connected so that the signal level is predetermined. Stored in the storage area of. Here, the signal line connecting the input circuit and the input buffer is also connected to the test terminal TS via the test terminal buffer. As a result, the signal input to the main control board M regarding the game is output from the test terminal TS in real time regardless of the processing status of the CPU MC. In other words, for example, regardless of whether the CPU MC of the main control board M is performing the setting change processing or the processing related to the ball entry state display device, the signal input to the main control board M regarding the game is from the test terminal TS. It is supposed to be output.

<Signal 1 regarding the state of the gaming machine>
By the processing of the CPUMC, a signal relating to the state of the gaming machine that is being output to the output driver via the output IC (generally a latch IC) as a signal to be output to various output devices of the gaming machine (for convenience, the state of the gaming machine). The signal for the test terminal corresponding to the signal 1) is distributed from the signal line connecting the output IC and the output driver and output via the buffer IC for the test terminal. As an example of the first special winning opening solenoid, as shown in FIG. 153, the drive signal of the first special winning opening solenoid output from the main control board M is the same as the output timing in the CPUMC (solenoid output processing in interrupt processing). Then, the CPUMC causes the output IC to latch the data bus signal output as the driving data by designating the address corresponding to the corresponding output port (the first output IC in FIG. 153), and outputs the signal from the output IC. A drive signal is supplied to the first special winning opening solenoid by outputting the output toward the output driver. Here, the signal line connecting the output IC and the output driver is also connected to the test terminal TS via the test terminal buffer. Thereby, the signal output from the main control board M regarding the game is output from the test terminal TS in real time according to the output processing of the CPU MC. In other words, for example, when the CPUMC of the main control board M is performing the setting change process, a process such as a big hit is not executed, so the game-related output (first special winning opening solenoid) is driven. The signal indicating is never output. On the other hand, even when the processing relating to the entry state display device is being performed, since the operation of the gaming machine is continuing, these signals are output according to the state of the gaming machine.

<Signal 2 about the state of the gaming machine and information about other symbols>
Further, among the signals related to the state of the gaming machine, signals different from those directly operating the output device, such as "first main gaming symbol hit" and "first main gaming symbol changing" (for convenience, the signal 2 relating to the state of the gaming machine 2 And other information relating to the design, the CPUMC uses a dedicated program for outputting to the test terminal, and is configured to output to the test terminal via the dedicated output IC and the test terminal buffer. .. As an example of the signal during the change of the first main game symbol, when the first main game symbol is changing, the CPUMC, in a predetermined test signal output process, the address corresponding to the second output IC shown in FIG. 153. Is specified, the data bus signal output as the data for the test signal is latched by the second output IC, and the signal is output from the second output IC to the test terminal buffer. A signal indicating that the first main game symbol is changing is output. In other words, for example, when the CPUMC of the main control board M is performing the setting change process, if the specification is such that the predetermined test signal output process is not performed, the signal indicating that the first main game symbol is changing is output. Never. (In the first place, in the present embodiment, since there is no change in the first main game symbol during the setting change, it does not affect whether or not the process is executed), on the other hand, the process related to the incoming state display device Even when the game machine is performing, the operation of the game machine is continuing, and therefore these signals are output according to the state of the game machine.

<Information indicating the operating state of the setting device>
As to whether the setting device is in the setting change mode or the setting display mode among the operating states of the setting device, a dedicated program for the CPUMC to output to the test terminal is used, and a dedicated output IC and a test terminal buffer are set. It is configured to output to the test terminal via. Taking the signal in the setting change mode as an example, in the case of the setting change mode, the CPUMC corresponds to the second output IC shown in FIG. 153 in the output processing in the setting change mode or the predetermined test signal output processing. By designating the address to be used, the data bus signal output as the data for the test signal is latched by the second output IC, and the signal is output from the second output IC to the test terminal buffer. A signal indicating that the setting change mode is in progress is output from the TS. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the set value information display device is configured by the LED, processing such as increasing the number of terminals is performed at the input destination of the test terminal in order to clearly indicate which value is the constant value. As a result, like the "signal 1 relating to the state of the gaming machine", the signal outputting the information can be divided and supplied to the test terminal TS as it is.

<Information indicating the display contents of the incoming state display device>
As for the information indicating the display contents of the incoming state display device, the CPUMC uses a dedicated program for outputting to the test terminal similarly to the information indicating the operating state of the setting device, and through the dedicated output IC and the test terminal buffer. Output to a test terminal. In the predetermined test signal output process, the CPUMC causes the second output IC to latch the data bus signal output as the data for the test signal by designating the address corresponding to the second output IC shown in FIG. 153. By outputting a signal from the second output IC to the test terminal buffer, the test terminal TS outputs a signal indicating the display content of the incoming state display device. Therefore, for example, when the CPU MC of the main control board M is performing the setting change process, if the specification is such that the predetermined test signal output process is not performed, a signal indicating the display content of the entry state display device is output. Never. (In the first place, in the present embodiment, since the entry state display device is not displayed during the setting change, there is no effect on whether or not the process is executed).

<<Summary of each embodiment>>
Here, the outline of each of the above-described embodiments will be described.

<This embodiment>
In the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as the control of the main control board, the main control board main processing, which is a general processing executed when the power is turned on, and the main control board side main processing, are executed when the power is turned on. Generation of processing is permitted later, and a timer interrupt processing for performing processing during the game is provided. Further, as a configuration relating to game playability, two main game symbols are provided (first main game symbol, second main game symbol), the second main game symbol is held and the priority is executed, and the big hit is consumed. Two big winning holes are provided (first big winning hole, second big winning hole, and during big hit, game balls are shot to the right side of the board to be hit by right hitting, about 70% after big hit ends. Until the next big hit occurs (depending on the stop pattern of the main game symbol), the probability variation state that the winning probability in the winning/discarding lottery of the main game symbol (special symbol) is high is given, and 100 times at 100% after the big hit. A high base state (auxiliary game state) is provided, and a general winning hole is provided in the vicinity of the big winning hole.In addition, during a big hit or during an auxiliary game, the right side of the sub-control board It is designed to give an instruction to strike a ball.

<Second Embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as a structure relating to game playability, 100% of the probability variation state is given after the big hit ends, and the probability variation state ends when the probability variation state changes 80 times (ST). Has been changed to. In addition, the variation mode determination lottery table in the probability variation state is divided into three stages. Further, there is provided an opening mode in which the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory becomes the longest when the winning/winning lottery of the ordinary symbol in the low base state (non-auxiliary gaming state) is successful. Further, the pre-reading effect is configured to be executed based on the held random number value (winning/winning lottery random number, symbol lottery random number, variation mode lottery random number), and during ST, it corresponds to the variation mode determination lottery table. The production stage is changed, and the prefetch production is not executed across the production stage changes. Further, when a big hit occurs continuously a predetermined number of times due to a probability variation state or an auxiliary game state, a special effect (ending effect) is executed. In a modification, the end demo image (the number of game balls acquired, etc.) is displayed at the big hit end demo time.

<Third Embodiment>
In the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the condition for giving the probability variation state is changed from the second embodiment, and a specific area in which a game ball can enter is provided inside the second special winning opening. When the game ball enters the specific area, the probability variation game is given after the big hit ends (ball certain machine).
<Fourth Embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, when a small hit occurs due to the lottery of the main game symbol (win/win lottery, symbol lottery), the game ball passes through a specific area within the big winning prize (the big winning prize due to the small hit). However, if you open it in less than 1.8 seconds, it will be a big hit and you can get a lot of balls. In addition, the probability variation in the main game symbol is not provided, and after the big hit, it becomes an auxiliary game state due to the probability variation in the normal symbol. In addition, the small hit probability (1021/1024) in the second main game symbol with an ordinary electric accessory is higher than the small hit probability (4/1024) in the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol. In that case, a small hit frequently occurs. In addition, two shielding members are provided above the specific area in the special winning opening, and it is configured so that there may or may not be a case of entering the specific area depending on the timing of the game ball entering the special winning opening. ing.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment is configured so that the game balls circulate in the game machine. In addition, it is roughly divided into a pachinko game machine and an ECO unit installed outside the pachinko game machine (each of which is detachable from and attached to a game hall facility). In the pachinko game machine, it is roughly divided into a game board side and a game frame side, and in a payout control board provided on the game frame side, control of launching a game ball and giving a prize ball to a player (in the fifth embodiment) Is configured to control addition/subtraction of ball data). Further, it is provided with an operation unit device, and is composed of a touch panel type interface, a ball number display unit, a sub-input button, etc. By operation), the game state information of the gaming machine and the game medium information recorded in the IC card (game medium recording medium) inserted in the ECO unit can be displayed and used. The prize ball payout control board controls to display the number of possessed balls {the number of game balls that can be used in the game (launched in the game area)} on the possessed ball number display portion. Furthermore, the authentication processing of the game frame and the game board (the processing of determining whether or not the game machine is an authorized game machine when the game machine is powered on) is configured to be performed via the ECO unit. ..

<Sixth Embodiment>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment is provided with a set value for changing the winning probability or the like of the winning/nothing lottery. The setting value can be changed by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and operating it when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to confirm the set value by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and operating it after the power is turned on. The setting key insertion port is provided on the main control board. While the set value is being changed (or confirmed), the set value is displayed on the set value display device provided on the main control board on the main control side, and is being changed on the effect display device on the sub control side (or A message indicating that it is being confirmed) is displayed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is configured to display the ball entering state information (base value) in the low base state (non-auxiliary gaming state) on the ball entering state display device provided on the main control board. .. Further, the main control board main processing for controlling the main control board is provided with a ball entry state display device calculation process (base value calculation process), and a timer interrupt process is provided for a ball entry state display device display control process (base value display process). ) Is provided. As the processing in the first ROM/RAM area, a main control board main processing and a timer interrupt processing are provided, and as the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, a ball entry state display device calculation process and a ball entry state display device display control process are performed. Provided, the main state control board main process calls the incoming state display device calculation process, which is a process in the second ROM/RAM region, and the timer interrupt process, the incoming state display device display, which is a process in the second ROM/RAM region. The control process is configured to be called. The entry state information is configured to be stored for each predetermined period (for example, the number of outs is 60000), and the entry state display device updates the base information (“bL.”) in real time. And the base information (“b6.”) in the immediately preceding section can be displayed.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, a win/loss lottery table corresponding to the set value is provided, and both the mode in which the set value can be estimated from the execution tendency of the prefetching effect and the difficult mode have been described. The winning/unwinning lottery table is configured such that the winning (big hit) winning probability at the time of random fluctuation game is about twice the winning (big hit) winning probability at the time of non-probability fluctuation game, and the ratio is common to all settings. Has been done. As a mode in which the set value can be estimated from the execution tendency of the look-ahead effect, a common random number range (0 to 204) is provided for common set values, and the higher the setting, the larger the random number hits outside the common random number range. Since the pre-reading effect can be generated when the winning (big hit) occurs within the common hit random number range, it can be predicted that the higher the hit (big hit) without the pre-reading effect, the higher the possibility of the high setting. As a mode in which it is difficult to infer the setting value from the execution tendency of the prefetching effect, if the prefetching effect is always executed at the time of hitting, the effect mode of winning depends on the difference in the setting value. Therefore, it is configured such that the setting cannot be discriminated.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment is a method for accurately performing prefetching effect without transmitting information about the set value to the sub control board. First, the first method is configured to refer only to the information regarding the variation mode lottery random number and/or the symbol lottery random number, without referring to the information regarding the win/loss lottery numbers. In the second method, the main control board determines whether or not the set value corresponds, and sends the determination result to the sub control board. In the third method, on the sub-control board side, information about the random number value held as a hold and an event that occurs when the hold is exhausted are accumulated as a game history (the sub-control board side learns It will be configured). In the fourth method, the control program of the main control board is configured so that the setting information cannot be grasped, so that the setting values cannot be grasped by both the main control board and the sub control board.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment, the range of win/win lottery random numbers that can be obtained differs depending on the set value. Since the number of wins (big hit) is common regardless of the set value, the winning probability in the win/win lottery differs depending on the range of the win/win lottery random number according to the set value.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to perform the winning/winning lottery using a plurality of winning/winning lottery determination tables. In the first win/win lottery determination table, the winning probability differs depending on the set value, and in the second win/win lottery determination table, the win probability is configured in common regardless of the set value, and the first win/win lottery determination table and the second win/win lottery When both of the judgment tables are won, the win/win lottery is won.
<Twelfth Embodiment>
The pachinko gaming machine in the twelfth embodiment has three setting values, namely, setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3 as setting values, and in the non-probability variation game state, the jackpot probability is high because the setting values are different. The jackpot probability is configured to be different, and the jackpot probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be the same jackpot probability even if the set values are different.

<<Summary of issues and effects in this example>>
Here, the problems and effects in each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail below.

<Issues in the fifth embodiment>
Since the player can touch the game ball, there is a concern that various frauds may occur in the game ball.

<Effects of the fifth embodiment>
A ball detection device (for example, a first ball detection device 111, a second ball detection device 211, a first winning detection device 311, a second winning detection device 321, etc.) provided on the game board side, and a game frame The prize ball permission sensors KS provided on the side (for example, the first main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS, the second main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 210KS, the first big prize mouth prize ball permission sensor 310KS, the first The winning information is detected by both of the two major winning award ball permission sensors 320KS, the general award winning ball permission sensor, etc., and the winning information transmitted from the main control board A side (for example, the winning a prize type). · Information regarding the number of prize balls) is configured to be awarded to the player only when the information regarding the number of basic prize balls stored on the prize ball payout control substrate 3000 side matches. , It is possible to prevent the acquisition of prize balls due to cheating. Also, by providing the prize ball permission sensors KS on the game frame side, it is possible to reduce the cost of the game board. Often used repeatedly). In addition, for a prize in which a prize sphere is given to a player, a predetermined display unit (for example, the prize information display device 60) is configured to display the prize hole type and the number of prize spheres. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is easy for the player to understand which winning hole has been won and how many winning balls have been obtained.

<Issues in the sixth embodiment>
Since there is a common Pachinko game machine configured to have only one type of jackpot probability for one game state (for example, non-probability variation game state, probability variation game state), the utilization rate is improved compared to the conventional one. A highly entertaining pachinko machine was needed. Further, there has been a demand for creating a game machine that can increase the degree of business freedom of the business operator (manager) of the game arcade.

<Effect of sixth embodiment>
Considering the point that the setting change is based on the operation performed only by the administrator, the effect control means (for example, the CPUSC of the sub control board S) is also shifted to the operation mode performed by the administrator, and the main control means (for example, In the main control board M (CPUMC) and the payout control means (for example, the CPU of the prize ball payout control board KH), the game function is stopped. That is, also in other control means, the process for the administrator is executed in accordance with the process of changing the setting, and the process related to the game function is not executed. Therefore, starting from the single operation of changing the setting, the plurality of control means can execute the corresponding management processing. On the other hand, in the confirmation work of setting display, by configuring the normal game processing to be maintained as much as possible, it is possible to realize appropriate processing without imposing more control restrictions than necessary.

<Problems in Seventh Embodiment and Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment>
When the main control board M executes the processing such as generation/display of the information relating to the ball displayed on the entrance status display device J10, the capacity for executing the generation/display processing becomes enormous. I will end up.

<Effects of Seventh Embodiment and Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment and the modified example 1 of the seventh embodiment, the incoming state display device calculation process is called and executed in the main loop process, and the incoming state display device display control process is called and executed in the timer interrupt process. By configuring so as to enable efficient processing by distributing the processing, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the timer interrupt processing, the entry state display device calculation process and the entry state display device display are performed. It is also possible to configure to call and execute the control process. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing and reduce the capacity. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which only one display data switching flag is provided, and to refer to the display data switching flag updated in the entry state display device calculation process in the entry state display device display control process. To be

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the second RAM area clear check process is executed every time the ball entering state display device calculation process and the ball entering state display device display control process are executed, so that a sudden abnormality due to noise or the like occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second RAM area is checked when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the normal addition award ball count in the counter addition process). The counter value, the normal out-number counter value, the total out-number counter value reaching a predetermined number, etc.) may be used as a trigger. With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve the efficiency of processing without excessively checking the second RAM area.

In addition, in the above gaming machine, when the RAM clear processing (clear processing of the first RAM area) occurs during the prize ball payout operation (for example, the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned off, or abnormal due to noise or instantaneous power). It is assumed that power will be restored after power failure). For example, when the RAM clear processing occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 6) of payouts are completed during a specific number (for example, 10) of payout balls, the remaining stored information of the number of prize balls (for example, 4) is obtained. Although it is cleared, the payout for the remaining number of prize balls is not executed, and the payout operation is ended. However, in the incoming state display device J10, the base value calculated by adding a specific number of prize balls is Is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to intentionally adjust the ball input information such as the base value, and it is possible to generate the ball input information that is configured based on the number of balls that have entered the winning opening.

<Issues in the eighth embodiment>
Since there is a common Pachinko game machine configured to have only one type of jackpot probability for one game state (for example, non-probability variation game state, probability variation game state), the utilization rate is improved compared to the conventional one. A highly entertaining pachinko machine was needed. Further, there has been a demand for creating a game machine that can increase the degree of business freedom of the business operator (manager) of the game arcade.

<Effects of the eighth embodiment>
By providing a plurality of setting values and configuring the jackpot probability of the non-probability variation game state and the probability variation game state to be different depending on the setting value, the player can set the setting value of the gaming machine high for the player. Since it is possible to proceed with the game while having an expectation that it is a set value that will be a profit, by winning the jackpot, the joy of winning a game ball and the expected setting value that is advantageous to the player You can get a feeling.

<Issues in the ninth embodiment>
In order to perform the look-ahead effect, the random number value held as a hold is determined as a big hit (big hit) based on the game state (for example, non-probability variation game) and the set value (for example, setting 1). It may be inaccurate unless it is determined in advance whether it belongs to a random number value range (for example, “0 to 204”). At that time, as configured in the second embodiment, in the case where the sub-control board S side determines whether or not to execute the prefetching effect, for example, as shown in step 2162 of FIG. It is necessary for the sub-control board S side to pre-determine whether or not the existing random number value belongs to the range of random number values determined to be a win (big hit). In that case, the sub-control board S side relates to the set value. Information is needed. However, it is not preferable to send the information about the set value held by the main control board M to the sub control board S in terms of security or ensuring the fairness of the game {transmitted to the sub control board S side. At this time, the information related to the set value may be intercepted and misused, and the information related to the set value is clearly notified to the outside on the side of the sub-control board S (for example, displayed by the amusement hall operator for maintenance purposes). Things can be stolen by game players.}.

<Effects of the ninth embodiment>
In the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, the set value can be changed, and the information related to the set value is configured not to be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect in which no discrepancy occurs.

<Problems in the tenth embodiment>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values, the random number range of the win/loss lottery, which is a big hit, differs depending on the set setting values.

<Effects of the tenth embodiment>
By configuring the total of the random numbers for winning and winning lots (random numbers for big hits, random numbers for losing, and random numbers for small hits) to be different for each set value, even if the jackpot is a big game even if the jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value. The random number range can be the same for all set values.

<Issues in the eleventh embodiment>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of set values, the contents of the win/loss lottery table become complicated depending on the set value and the game state set, and the ratio of the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation game state and the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is calculated. It is difficult to design a game machine in which all set values are the same.

<Effect of 11th Embodiment>
The win/win lottery table includes a first win/win lottery random number determination table and a second win/win lottery random number determination table. In the first win/win lottery random number determination table, the contents of the table (random number range to be hit) are set according to set values. ) Is different, but the contents of the table (random number range to be a hit) are configured not to differ depending on the game state, and in the case where the result of the winning/winning lottery referring to the first winning/winning lottery random number determination table is a winning, If it is in the variable game state, it is determined as a big hit without referring to the second winning/discarding lottery random number determination table, and if it is in the non-probability variation game state, it is referred to the second winning/discarding lottery random number determination table to execute the lottery As a result, it is possible to easily create a gaming machine in which the ratio of the jackpot probability in the non-stochastic variation game state and the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is the same for all set values.

<Issues in the twelfth embodiment>
It is configured such that the probability variation game state ends (sometimes referred to as ST machine) depending on the number of variations of the main game symbol when transitioning to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game. Here, when the probability variation game state as in the second embodiment can be ended by the number of variations of the main game symbol, when a configuration having a plurality of set values as described in detail in the eighth embodiment is applied, Probability fluctuation Probability of winning a jackpot by the end of the gaming state (sometimes referred to as the probability of continuous play) varies depending on the set value, and the advantageous state for the player is not equal for each gaming machine. There is a fear.

<Effect of twelfth embodiment>
It has three set values of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3 as setting values, and in the non-probability variation game state, by configuring so that the jackpot probability can be different due to the different setting values, the game It is possible to teach the player the novel interest of advancing the game while guessing how advantageous the set value is to the current set value, and it is the same even if the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is different. By setting so as to be a big hit probability, the probability variation game state ends (sometimes referred to as ST machine) depending on the number of variations of the main game symbol when transitioning to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game In the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the probability of a condominium game in the probability variation game state differs depending on the set value, and the profit rate provided in the probability variation game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is the game. It is possible to create a user-friendly game machine that does not differ depending on the game machine to be used.

<<Combination of Embodiments>>
<First Embodiment+Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the first embodiment and the sixth execution decision, the set value on the main control board side can be configured to be suggestable on the sub control board side. For example, it is provided in the first embodiment during a big hit. By entering the game machine ball into the general winning opening near the special winning opening, it is possible to perform a suggestion of the set value.
<Second Embodiment+Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment, it is possible to perform the effect lottery according to the set value also in the effect content determination processing on the sub-control board side in the second embodiment. For example, different production lottery may be performed according to the set value in the normal time when the probability is low and the base is low (the winning ratio of the prefetching effect or the content of the prefetching effect is different), or the high probability state and You may perform different production lottery according to a set value at the time of ST which is a high base. Here, if it is configured to execute not only a big hit suggestion but also a set value suggestion in the case of a big jackpot change, a high probability state is more likely to be a big hit than a low probability state. A lot of value suggestive effects occur, making it easy to understand the settings. For example, the prefetching effect (image) may be configured to include the content that suggests the setting, or the setting may be grasped based on the occurrence frequency of the prefetching effect. Further, it is possible to make the variation mode in the limited frequency table after the big hit end different depending on the setting, and also to make the production stage and the like different.
<Third embodiment (fourth embodiment)+fifth embodiment>
By combining the third embodiment (or the fourth embodiment) and the fifth implementation decision, in a pachinko machine provided with a specific area (V winning opening) inside a winning opening such as a starting opening or a special winning opening, a ball dish The internal game ball cannot be touched. With this structure, it is not possible to shoot objects (balls with threads, etc.) other than the game ball originally held by the game machine from the ball dish into the game area. Since it becomes possible or difficult, it becomes possible to prevent a goto act of illegally passing a game ball or the like through a winning opening or a specific area.
<Fourth Embodiment+Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the fourth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the opening manner of the V winning opening shielding member is changed according to the set value, and the winning probability of the win (big hit) in the win/loss lottery according to the set value. Change only the winning probability of winning (small hit) does not change (common regardless of the setting value) or change only the winning probability of winning (small hit) in the win/loss lottery according to the setting value (big hit) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning probability of is not changed (common regardless of the set value), and a configuration in which both the winning probability of the win (big hit) and the win probability (small win) are changed according to the set value.
<Fourth Embodiment+Eleventh Embodiment>
By combining the fourth embodiment and the eleventh embodiment, a lottery probability table (two in the eleventh embodiment) is executed for a big hit, and one lottery is used for a small hit. The winning and failure lottery is performed based on the probability table. In other words, for the big hit, the win/fail is determined by the two-stage lottery, and for the small hit, the win/win is determined by the one-stage lottery. Is completed.
<Fifth Embodiment+Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, it is possible to configure the operation unit device to check the set value. Specifically, the setting value information is transmitted from the main control board to the prize-ball payout control board, and the prize-ball payout control board can be configured to perform control to display the set value on the touch panel interface of the operation unit device. ..

M main control board MN11ta-A first main game win/loss lottery table, MN11ta-B second main game win/win lottery table MN11ta-H auxiliary game win/loss lottery table, MN41ta-A first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta -B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta -H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP22t-B second main game starting port electric auditors opening Timer MP33c winning ball counter, MP34t special game timer MP52c time saving counter, MT10 command transmitting buffer A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game starting port A11s first main game starting port entrance detection device, A20 1 main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game starting port B11s 2nd main game starting port entrance detection device , B11d second main game starting port electric accessory B20 second main game symbol display device, B21g second main game symbol display section B21h second main game symbol hold display section C first and second main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big prize mouth C11s 1st big prize mouth prize detection device, C11d 1st big prize mouth electric prize C20 2nd big prize mouth, C21s 2nd big prize mouth prize detection device C21d 2nd big prize mouth electric prize thing, D30 game area D44 firing handle D32 outer rail, D34 inner rail H auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 auxiliary game start opening H11s auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display part, H21h auxiliary game Design hold display section S Sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative design display area SG12 first hold display section, SG13 second hold display section KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, KE10 payout unit D16 transparent plate, KR prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH prize ball payout control board Ea power switch, D42 launcher E power supply unit, D40 launch control board DL10 left hitting area, DR10 right hitting area ML10 left hitting route (first downflow route), MR10 right hitting route (2nd downflow route)
D50 Right-handed route outlet NKc Ball count counter P10 Left general winning mouth, P20 Right general winning mouth HSc Left-handed instruction counter, MSc Right-handed instruction counter MP51c Probability change counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hitting game timer, MP41t -2 Discharge standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning opening), C20-1 Box member C23 Second winning opening outlet, C23s Second winning opening discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning Mouth ball detection device SM26c Look-ahead performance execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Number of consecutive games counter SB sub input button, SBs sub input button input detection device KH prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission/reception control means 3110 Reception control means, 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout processing related information temporary storage means 3311a First main game starting opening Winning counter, 3311b Second main game start mouth winning counter 3311c First big winning mouth winning counter, 3311d Second big winning mouth winning counter 3311e General winning mouth winning counter, 3312 Ball holding counter 3313 Enclosed gaming ball counter, 3400 firing Control means 3410 Launch control related information temporary storage means, 3500 Power interruption/recovery initial processing control means 3510 Power interruption information temporary storage means 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device

Claims (1)

A main game starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state ,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
Capable of displaying a main player identification information and the main game identification information display unit,
An acquisition means for acquiring the main game information based on the ball entering the main game starting opening,
When the variable display start condition is satisfied, based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means, a special game determination means for determining whether to perform a variable winning opening opening game,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
Informing means for informing information related to the game,
Have
Setting means that can be changed to the first state, the second state,
Operation means that can be operated,
State setting means for setting the setting value to a changeable setting state based on the setting means being in the first state under the first condition,
Based on that the setting means is in the first state under the second condition, although the setting value cannot be changed, the state display means for setting the setting value to the setting display state in which the setting value can be confirmed,
And a setting value changing means capable of changing the setting value based on the operation of the operating means in the setting change state.
Equipped with
Based on the setting means being changed from the first state to the second state in the setting change state, the set value is confirmed,
In the setting change state and the setting display state, it is configured not to launch the game ball by the launching means,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that, in the setting change state and the setting display state, processing associated with entry into the main game starting opening is not performed .

Images